This product is eligible for the P2HD 5 Year
Warranty Repair Program. For details, see
page 7.
Operating Instructions
Memory Card Camera-Recorder
Model No.
AJ-HPX3100G
Before operating this product, please read the insructions carefully and save this manual for
future use.
ENGLISH
FJ0910AT0 -FJ @
Printed in Japan
VQT3A79
EMC NOTICE FOR THE PURCHASER/USER OF THE APPARATUS
1. Applicable standards and operating environment (AJ-HPX3100G)
The apparatus is compliant with:
z standards EN55103-1 and EN55103-2 1996.11, and
z electromagnetic environments E1, E2, E3, E4, and E5.
2. Pre-requisite conditions to achieving compliance with the above standards
<1> Peripheral equipment to be connected to the apparatus and special connecting cables
z The purchaser/user is urged to use only equipment which has been recommended by us as peripheral
equipment to be connected to the apparatus.
z The purchaser/user is urged to use only the connecting cables described below.
<2> For the connecting cables, use shielded cables which suit the intended purpose of the apparatus.
z Video signal connecting cables
Use double shielded coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, for SDI
(Serial Digital Interface).
Coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, are recommended for analog
video signals.
z Audio signal connecting cables
If your apparatus supports AES/EBU serial digital audio signals, use cables designed for AES/EBU.
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency transmission applications, for analog
audio signals.
z Other connecting cables (USB)
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency applications, as connecting cables.
z If your apparatus is supplied with ferrite core(s), they must be attached on cable(s) following instructions in this
manual.
3. Performance level
The performance level of the apparatus is equivalent to or better than the performance level required by these
standards.
However, the apparatus may be adversely affected by interference if it is being used in an EMC environment, such as an
area where strong electromagnetic fields are generated (by the presence of signal transmission towers, cellular phones,
etc.). In order to minimize the adverse effects of the interference on the apparatus in cases like this, it is recommended
that the following steps be taken with the apparatus being affected and with its operating environment:
1. Place the apparatus at a distance from the source of the interference.
2. Change the direction of the apparatus.
3. Change the connection method used for the apparatus.
4. Connect the apparatus to another power outlet where the power is not shared by any other appliances.
A rechargeable battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased.
Une batterie rechargeable et recyclable alimente le produit que vous avez acheté.
<For USA-California Only>
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca/gov/hazardouswaste.perchlorate.
Caution regarding laser beams
The CCD may be damaged if it is subjected to light from a laser beam.
When using the camera-recorder in locations where laser irradiation equipment is used, be careful not to allow
the laser beam to shine directly on the lens.
3
EU
To remove the battery
Main Power Battery (Ni-Cd / Ni-MH / Li-ion Battery)
z To detach the battery, please proceed in the reverse order of the installation method described in this manual.
(Refer to page 108 for the detail.)
z If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used, check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery.
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)
z For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end of its service life, please consult your dealer.
PLEASE NOTE:
z When preparing to record important images, always shoot some advance test footage, to verify that both pictures and
sound are being recorded normally.
z Should video or audio recording fail due to a malfunction of this camera-recorder or the P2 cards used, we will not assume
liability for such failure.
z If the unit is operated continuously with the fan stopped due to a failure, camera images may not be output, recorded, or
played back properly.
z Please note that a beat signal may interfuse into the video signal occasionally when under an intense electric field (such as
directly under a radio tower).
What to remember when throwing memory cards away or transferring them to others
Formatting memory cards or deleting data using the functions of the unit or a computer will merely change the file
management information: it will not completely erase the data on the cards. When throwing these cards away or transferring
them to others, either physically destroy them or use a data deletion program for computers (commercially available) to
completely erase the data. Users are responsible for managing the data on their memory cards.
Precautions when installing USB drivers
Select “AJ-HPX3100” when installing USB drivers from the CD-ROM that comes with this unit (AJ-HPX3100) onto a personal
computer.
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
EEE Complies with Directive of Turkey.
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Service Europe, a division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, F.R. Germany
4
Contents
Read this first!..................................................................................... 2
General
Features of Camera unit ..................................................................... 9
Features of Recorder/player unit ...................................................... 10
Features of the Input/Output unit ...................................................... 12
Other features................................................................................... 12
Dimensions drawing.......................................................................... 13
Color TV Standard Settings (Settings for frame frequency).............. 14
System Configuration........................................................................ 15
Parts and their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section .............................. 16
Audio (input) Function Section.......................................................... 18
Audio (output) Function Section........................................................ 20
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section ...................... 21
Menu Operation Section ................................................................... 25
Time Code Section ........................................................................... 26
Warning and Status Display Functions............................................. 27
Display Window Functions................................................................ 28
LCD Monitor...................................................................................... 29
Viewfinder ......................................................................................... 30
Recording and Playback
P2 Cards........................................................................................... 32
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards........................................ 34
Basic Procedures.............................................................................. 35
Normal Recording............................................................................. 37
PRE-RECORDING function.............................................................. 38
Loop Recording................................................................................. 39
Interval Recording............................................................................. 39
ONE CLIP REC Function.................................................................. 42
Recording Review Function.............................................................. 44
Normal and Variable Speed Playback .............................................. 45
Text Memo Function ......................................................................... 45
Shot Mark Function........................................................................... 46
Recording Setting and Operation Mode............................................ 46
Adjustments and Settings for
Recording
Multi Format...................................................................................... 47
Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance............................... 49
Setting the Electronic Shutter ........................................................... 53
5
Assigning Functions to USER Buttons.............................................. 55
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels........ 57
Setting External Reference Signal and GENLOCK .......................... 61
Setting Time Data ............................................................................. 62
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays................................................... 75
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor ............................................. 87
Selection of video output signals ...................................................... 88
Handling data.................................................................................... 90
Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)................................... 104
Preparation
Power Supply.................................................................................. 108
Mounting the Lens and Performing the Flange Back and
White Shading Adjustments............................................................ 111
Preparing for Audio Input................................................................ 114
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod .................................................. 115
Attaching the Shoulder Strap.......................................................... 116
Attaching the Rain Cover................................................................ 116
Attaching the F.AUDIO LEVEL control Knob.................................. 117
Connection of the DC OUT connector and
the external REC strat/stop switch.................................................. 117
Manipulating Clips with
Thumbnails
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview................................................ 118
Connection with external
device
Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port .............. 136
Connection using the SDI IN connector.......................................... 142
Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G) ........................ 143
Connection of the extension control unit (AG-EC4G) ..................... 145
Maintenance and Inspections Inspections Before Shooting........................................................... 146
Maintenance ................................................................................... 148
Warning System.............................................................................. 153
Menu
Menu Configuration......................................................................... 158
Menu Description Tables ................................................................ 162
Updating the Firmware incorporated into the unit............................................................199
Specifications...................................................................................................................200
6
Index................................................................................................................................204
z The SD card logo is a registered trademark.
z SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
z MMC (Multi Media Card) is a registered trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
z Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
z Screenshots are used in accordance with Microsoft Corporation guidelines.
z Apple is trademark or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
z Unislot is a registered trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki Co., LTD.
z Other model names, company names, and product names listed in these operating instructions are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
z This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer, and
no license is granted or shall be implied for any use other than the personal uses detailed below.
- To encode video in compliance with the AVC standard (“AVC Video”)
- To decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity
- To decode AVC Video that was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video
• Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC (http://www.mpegla.com).
Note concerning illustrations in these instructions
z Illustrations (camera-recorder, menu screens, etc.) in these operating instructions differ slightly from the actual camera-
recorder.
References
z References are shown as (page 00).
Terminology
z Both SD Memory Cards and SDHC Memory Cards as referred to as “SD Memory Cards” in these operating instructions.
z Memory cards that have the “P2” logo (e.g., AJ-P2C064AG, an optional accessory) are referred to as “P2 cards” in these
operating instructions.
z Video that is created during a single recording operation is referred to as a “clip” in these operating instructions.
P2HD 5 Year Warranty Repair Program*1
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic P2HD device.
Register as a user for this device to receive a special service warranty up to five years of free warranty repairs.
Customers who register as users on the website will receive an extended warranty repair valid for up to
five years.
5
1st year
2nd year
3rd year
Extended warranty repair
*
4th year
5th year
*
2
3
4
P2HD device
Basic warranty
*
*
*1: Please note that this extended warranty is not available in some countries/regions. *2: Not all models eligible for extended warranty coverage.
*3: The basic warranty period may vary depending on the country/region. *4: Not all repair work is covered by this extended warranty.
*5: The maximum warranty period may be adjusted depending on the number of hours the device has been used.
Free 5 years of Warranty Repairs
Make sure to save the “Registration Notice” e-mail
during the warranty period.
Purchase
P2 product
Register online
within 1 month
“Registration Notice”
e-mail sent
Details about user registration and the extended warranty: http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e
Please note, this is a site that is not maintained by Panasonic Canada Inc. The Panasonic Canada Inc. privacy policy does not apply and is not applicable in relation to any
information submitted. This link is provided to you for convenience.
7
General
Attention
Adjust the following two settings when using the unit for the first time.
z Adjust the black-balance setting when using the unit for the first time. (Refer to page 52)
z The unit is delivered from the factory with the color TV standard not yet specified. To revise the settings for frame
frequency according to the TV standard, refer to the procedures described on page 14.
The unit is a solid CCD camera-recorder integrating 2/3-inch 2.2-megapixel components that support interlaced/progressive
drive (reading all pixels) and record/playback that supports the compression format for AVC-Intra100, AVC-Intra50 and
DVCPRO HD, DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV.
The unit supports the HD and SD methods shown in the following table. The unit is also equipped with CAC (chromatic
aberration correction function for the magnification ratio chromatic aberration of lenses), Scan Reverse (corrects images
when Anamo lenses or lenses for film applications are used), and the film-like gamma function.
For recording, the compression and recording methods are selectable among AVC-Intrra100, AVC-Intra50, DVCPRO HD,
DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV. Since minimal image deterioration occurs when recording with AVC-Intra 100 compression in
particular, high image quality can be retained.
_Supported formats
Mode
SYSTEM MODE
Shooting/Recording method
AVC-Intra100
AVC-Intra50
59.94i
29.97P (Native)
23.98P (Native)
1080-59.94i
59.94i
29.97P Over 59.94i
23.98P Over 59.94i (2-3 Pull down)
23.98PA Over 59.94i (2-3-3-2 Pull down)
DVCPRO HD
HD
AVC-Intra100
AVC-Intra50
50i
25P (Native)
1080-50i
50i
DVCPRO HD
25P over 50i
59.94i
29.97P Over 59.94i
23.98P Over 59.94i (2-3 Pull down)
23.98PA Over 59.94i (2-3-3-2 Pull down)
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
480-59.94i
576-50i
SD
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
50i
25P Over 50i
General:
8
Features of Camera unit
_Multi-format
_DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher) function
With this function, the dynamic range of high brightness
areas that may be skipped with white blanks in an
ordinary recording method can be expanded by
compressing images and maintaining the contrast.
(Refer to page 55)
By applying the interlace drive/progressive drive
(reading all pixels) to the 2.2-mega pixel CCD, the unit
supports a variety of recording methods. (Refer to page
48)
_Chromatic Aberration Compensation function
The unit is equipped with a function to correct the
magnification ratio chromatic aberration of lenses
caused by the fact that the refractive index in lenses
varies with the wavelength of light (hereinafter referred
to as chromatic aberration). By using this function,
chromatic aberration around the lens can be corrected
and high definition images can be obtained. However, a
lens supporting chromatic aberration compensation is
must be used. (Refer to page 104)
_Lens file function
The unit has 8 lens files.
By using an SD memory card, 64 lens files can be
stored. (Refer to page 99)
_Focus assist function
The unit will display a marker to help with focusing when
shooting videos. This function provides a visual cue for
focusing. (Refer to page 55)
_Scan Reverse function
_Data management function
Within the unit, one user data file and four sets of scene
file data can be saved.
The Scan Reverse function, as standard configuration,
cancels the image inversion that occurs when a lens
adapter from Canon or Angenieux is used, and it can be
switched through the Menu settings. (Refer to page 162)
By using an SD memory card as the setup cart, up to
eight sets of setup data can be stored. (Refer to page
90)
_Film-like Gamma function
In order to obtain film tone in Varicam (AJ-HDC27
series), the unit is equipped with the FILM-REC gamma
almost equivalent to Varicam.
_Color bar
The unit employs the SMPTE color bar, ARIB color bar,
Split color bar for SNG (Satellite News Gathering) as
well as the conventional color bar, which is useful for
adjusting the color monitor. (Refer to page 184)
_2-disk 4-type configuration optical filters
The unit is equipped with CC filters for 3200K, 4300K,
5600K, and 6300K. The 5600K filter for outdoor
recording is standard. (Refer to page 21)
_14-bit A/D conversion digital signal processing
Analog video signals are processed into digital data by a
14-bit A/D converter with sampling frequencies of 74
MHz. It is possible to reproduce images that are more
finely detailed.
_
Storage type high-sensitivity function (DS. GAIN)
The unit uses the storage type gain increase function by
driving the CCD progressively. With this function, it is
possible to obtain brighter pictures without increasing
noise under low light conditions.
This is a function that makes it possible to achieve
higher sensitivity of up to 34 dB above the regular gain
increase. Furthermore, this function can also be used as
picture effects. (Refer to page 185)
In addition, this function operates when shooting in
59.94i and 50i. SHUTTER mode turns off when in this
state.
General: Features of Camera unit
9
Features of Recorder/player unit
_Multiple Slots
_HD: Format AVC-I 100/AVC-I 50/DVCPRO HD
AJ-HPX3100 is equipped with 2 slots for P2 cards. 2
cards may be inserted in these slots for continuous
recording. They also provide new recording capabilities
specific to memory cards.
SD: Format DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV
Recorded video is compressed through a component
digital recording method that uses a state-of-the-art
compression technology, and sound is recorded using
the non-compression PCM recording method, which
excels in such areas as S/N ratio, frequency bands,
waveform properties and reproducibility of fine areas.
These methods further enhance the quality of images
and sound.
z Hot-Swap recording
The Hot-Swap capability allows cards not in use to be
replaced without interrupting recording. This facilitates
continuous recording.
z LOOP REC
AJ-HPX3100 can retain a certain amount of
previously recorded material by continuously loop-
recording data into a specified recording area.
z INTERVAL REC/ONE SHOT REC
And it is also possible to select AVC (Advance Video
Coding) compression of the ISO/IEC14496-10 standard
in addition to DVCPRO HD in HD mode. The unit
performs the in-frame compression.
The AJ-HPX3100 features interval recording at
minimum one-frame intervals. This function is
particularly suited to shooting science and nature
programs. Frame-by-frame shooting is simple with the
one-shot recording function.
In SD mode, you can select a recording format
appropriate for your purpose. For example, choose
DVCPRO50 to give higher priority to image quality or
DVCPRO if cost efficiency is a high priority.
z PRE-RECORDING function
‹Note
In standby status, AJ-HPX3100 always stores video
and sound input to the camera for up to 8 seconds.
This means that the PRE-RECORDING function,
when turned on, records the video and sound for a
preceding duration preset by the user. This feature
recovers critical moments that you might have
missed. For DVCPRO and DV, video and sound can
be recorded for up to 15 seconds.
When the clip is played back in the format not selected on
the menu, the picture may be disturbed until the format is
detected.
_4-channel Digital Audio Recording (all formats)
In HD (1080i) mode, 4-channel digital audio recording is
used. Also, you can record at 24 bits when selecting
AVC-Intra format.
z ONE CLIP REC Function
All formats in SD mode also support 4-channel digital
audio recording with high-quality sound (48 kHz/16 bits).
This function compiles multiple recordings into a
combined clip and does not isolate single recordings
(from REC START to STOP) to single clips. The
combined clip can be handled with ease with
transferring or copying etc., as the clip can be treated
as a single thumbnail or when editing. Up to a
maximum of 99 recordings can be combined into this
single clip.
_Clip Thumbnailing
z Automatic generation of thumbnails
AJ-HPX3100 automatically generates a thumbnail for
each recording cut (clip). It is possible to make use of
this on the camera-recorder as well as for non-linear
editing purposes, and after uploading to a server.
z Thumbnail display on the LCD monitor
The 81.28 mm (3.2 inches) color LCD side of the your
video camera-recorder can provide a multi-screen
view of 12 clip thumbnails. You can choose a desired
clip to playback instantly.
z Data protection
Data on P2 cards will not be lost due to overwriting
unless the files are deleted or the cards are initialised.
Recordings are written only to free space.
z Seamless playback of selected clips
You can select more than one clip from the thumbnail
view for continuous playback and output of seamless
video.
‹Note
During continuous playback of clips in different recording
formats, seamless playback is not available.
z Display of clip information
By selecting clips, information added to clips, such as
the recording time, Text Memo, Shot Marks and
metadata can be checked.
General: Features of Recorder/player unit
10
_Text Memos & Shot Marks
_Recording Time on P2 Cards (When one 64 GB
Each clip can incorporate comments, in the form of text
memo added to the thumbnail associated with the time
code, together with shot marks which, for example, can
help you distinguish OK cuts from reject cuts.
Both text memos and shot marks can be added to
selected clips during and after a recording. This is
helpful for editing recorded video.
card is used)
HD Mode
Recording method and Recording time
Image system
DVCPRO HD AVC-Intra100 AVC-Intra50
Approx.
64 minutes
Approx.
64 minutes
Approx.
128 minutes
1080-59.94i/50i
*1
In addition, you can use the copy function for each text
memo block to take only the necessary portions out of a
clip.
1080-30PN/
25PN (Native)
Approx.
64 minutes
Approx.
128 minutes
1080-24PN
(Native)
Approx.
80 minutes
Approx.
160 minutes
_Front-mounted Sound Level Control Mechanism
AJ-HPX3100 features a front-mounted control for fine
adjustment of the sound recording level. This control is
particularly effective for adjusting the sound level when
you are shooting without a sound recordist. The control
can be disabled. (Refer to page 19)
*1 Including 30P, 24P, and 25P pull down of the DVCPRO HD
SD Mode
Recording method and Recording time
Image system
DVCPRO *2
DV *2
DVCPRO 50
Approx.
Approx.
Approx.
_Support for Built-in Unislot Wireless Receiver
AJ-HPX3100 is designed to support an optional slot-in
wireless receiver. (Refer to page 114 and 191) The unit
also supports 2-channel wireless receivers.
480-59.94i/576-50i *3
128 minutes 256 minutes 256 minutes
*2 For 2ch audio recording
*3 Including 30P, 24P, and 25P pull down
‹Note
_Recording Review Capability
The values for 32 GB cards are 1/2, the values for 16 GB
cards are 1/4 and the values for 8 GB cards are 1/8 those of
64 GB cards shown above.
This capability automatically plays back the last 2 to 10
seconds of recorded video, allowing you to quickly
check the recorded contents.
_On splitting clips recorded on P2 cards
If the one-time continuous recording exceeds the
duration which is given in the table below when a P2
card with a memory capacity of 8 GB or more is used in
AJ-HPX3100, the recording is automatically continued
on a separate clip. When performing thumbnail
operations (such as display, delete, repair or copy) for
these kinds of clips using a P2 device, it is possible to
perform the operations for the entire recording as a
single clip. However, with nonlinear editing software or
a personal computer, the recording may be displayed as
separate clips.
_Built-in Time Code Generator/reader
A special-purpose Subcode track can be used to record
and reproduce time code information.
_Support for Metadata
AJ-HPX3100 is capable of recording positional
information (latitudes, longitudes and altitudes), as
UMID information (metadata), from the GPS unit AJ-
GPS910G (optional accessory). Names/titles can also
be recorded, e.g. the camera person, the reporter, or the
program which was registered on the SD memory card
in advance. This information is also useful in managing
information on clips. Regarding SD memory cards,
please also see <Cautions in using SD memory cards>
(page 22).
Continuous
Recording method (except for native)
recording time
DVCPRO HD
AVC-Intra100
AVC-Intra50
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
Approx.
5 minutes
Approx.
10 minutes
_P2 cards that can be used with this unit
You can use P2 cards from 4 GB to 64 GB, like the
optional AJ-P2C064AG (64 GB) and the AJ-P2E032XG
(32 GB). (As of October, 2010)
Approx.
20 minutes
DV
‹Notes
z The AJ-P2C002SG (2 GB) is disabled.
z Depending on the type of P2 card, you need to update
the firmware installed on this unit.
> [Updating the Firmware incorporated into the unit] (page
199)
z For the latest information not available in the operating
Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at the following
Web sites.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
General: Features of Recorder/player unit
11
Features of the Input/Output unit
_Independent Dual HD SDI output equipped as
_Confirmation of return video signals
With the viewfinder, you can check the return video
signal (analog HD-Y signal) supplied to the GENLOCK
IN connector of this unit or the HD SDI signal input to
the SDI IN connector. And you can use them to check
programs.
standard
The HD SDI signals output from the SDI OUT connector
and the MON OUT connector are each independent.
Embedded audio is superimposed on HD SDI output.
Also, in SD mode, independent dual SD SDI signals can
be output from the SDI OUT connector and the MON
OUT connector.
Only video signals from the same record format can be
confirmed. Also, in SD mode, you can check only the
SD SDI signal input to the SDI IN connector.
_Features USB2.0 port (HOST/DEVICE)
_DC OUT connector
By connecting with a PC via USB2.0, a P2 card inserted
in AJ-HPX3100 can be used as a bulk storage device.
It is also possible to store data on a P2 card onto a USB
2.0-connected external hard disk equipped with USB
host capability as well as view clips stored on hard disks
and write them to P2 cards. (Refer to page 136)
The DC OUT connector of the unit produces 1.5 A of
electrical current.
By connecting an external switch to this connector, it is
possible to control REC start/stop.
Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting the LED
to this connector, it is useful for shooting video when
fixing the camera on a crane. (Refer to page 117)
_Down converter output provided as a standard
configuration
_HD/SD SDI input function
When in HD mode, the MON OUT connector can output
down converter signals (SD SDI signals or analog
composite signals).
You can record SDI signals input from the SDI IN
connector.
However, what you can record is limited to the SDI
signal with the same recording format as this unit.
_Remote control connector
By connecting the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G) or
the extension control unit (AG-EC4G), which is available
as an optional accessory, the unit can be controlled
remotely. (Refer to page 143)
_LIGHT connector
You can connect to Anton/Bauer Ultralight 2. You can
use bulbs up to 50 W.
For batteries, because sometimes there isn’t enough
power for lighting, use batteries with an ample power
margin.
Other features
_Viewfinder connection
_Camera extension system
From the viewfinder connector of the unit, 1080-59.94i
or 1080-50i signals are output.
Furthermore, signals are output for switching the
frequencies of the connected viewfinder.
Confirm images in multi formats by connecting the
viewfinder (AJ-HVF21KG, AJ-CVF100G), which is
available as an optional accessory. (Refer to page 30)
By combining the camera adapter (AG-CA300G) and
the base station (AG-BS300P/E) which are optional, you
can employ this unit as a camera extension system. In
addition to consulting the instruction manual for each
device regarding connection methods and precautions
for these devices, use them according to the AJ-
HPX3000G guidelines.
This unit is compatible with the HD viewfinder, so it is
not possible to check the return video image in the
viewfinder on systems where the SYSTEM MODE menu
option is set to “480-59.94i” or “576-50i”, with the VF
Interface box (AG-YA500G) connected. You can select
the SYSTEM MODE menu option from the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING page.
_User button
On the side panel of the unit, five user buttons (USER
MAIN/USER1/USER2/SHOT MARK/TEXT MEMO) are
available.
Each button can be assigned the on/off function for any
frequently used feature selected from among the many
features of the unit, such as slot select and Y get (Refer
to page 55).
General: Features of the Input/Output unit
12
Dimensions drawing
Unit: mm (inch)
140 (5-1
)
/
335.8 (13-1
)
4
/
2
General: Dimensions drawing
13
Color TV Standard Settings
(Settings for frame frequency)
The unit is delivered with the color TV standard not yet specified. To revise the settings for frame frequency according to the
preferred standard, refer to the procedures described below.
1
2
After connecting the unit to the power supply
and then turning on the power, press the
MENU SW button while pressing the LIGHT
SW button to open OPTION MENU.
5
6
Move the arrow (→) to YES and press the JOG
dial button. The settings selected in Step 3
above are reflected in FACTORY and
CURRENT DATA on the screen.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor
(arrow) to the AREA SELECT item, and the
press the JOG dial button. The menu item
AREA SELECT is found in the <AREA
Turn off the power supply once and then turn
on it again.
◆Notes
SETTING> screen on the OPTION MENU page.
z The settings are not saved unless SET is executed even if
NTSC, NTSC(J), or PAL is selected in the AREA SELECT.
z When AREA SELECT is revised, the “_ AREA SET” blinks.
z When these items are set when the unit is used for the first
time, only the following 11 items are revised. When the other
settings of the unit are set in MAIN MENU, the MENU setting
values for items other than the following 8 are ones that were
set at the factory.
*** OPTION MENU ***
OPTION
#
AREA SETTING
Factory
settings
NTSC
NTSC(J)
PAL
SYSTEM
MODE
1080-
59.94i
1080-
59.94i
1080-
59.94i
1080-50i
AVC-I 100/ AVC-I 100/ AVC-I 100/ AVC-I 100/
3
4
Select the area among NTSC, NTSC(J), and
PAL. After selecting the area by turning the
JOG dial button, press the JOG dial button.
REC FORMAT
60i
60i
60i
50i
CAMERA
MODE
60i
60i
60i
50i
*1
< AREA SETTING >
7.5%A
7.5%
7.5%A
7.5%
0%
0%
0%
0%
SET UP
#
AREA SELECT:
AREA SET
PAL
SET UP (D/C)
*2
_
REAR LINE IN
LVL
+4dB
+4dB
+4dB
+4dB
0dB
AUDIO OUT
LVL
+4dB
20dB
+4dB
20dB
0dB
HEAD ROOM 20dB
18dB
GUI metadata
language
indication
American American Japanese/ American
Move the cursor (arrow) to _ AREA SET by
turning the JOG dial button, and then press
the JOG dial button. The following window
appears.
English
English
For Japan English
Not
Not
ENGLISH Not
LANGUAGE
displayed displayed JAPANESE displayed
MDY MDY YMD DMY
DATE
*3
FORMAT
*1 SET UP of the SYSTEM MODE menu
(Enabled only for 480-59.94i)
*2 SET UP of the DOWNCON SETTING menu
(Enabled only for 1080-59.94i)
*3 Select THUMBNAIL > SETUP > DATE FORMAT from the
thumbnail menu.
> [Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode] (page 132).
AREA SET?
YES
#
NO
General: Color TV Standard Settings (Settings for frame frequency)
14
System Configuration
Rain cover
SHAN-RC700
Soft carrying case
AJ-SC900
Hard carrying case
Unislot wireless microphone receiver
AJ-HT901G
Remote control unit
AJ-RC10G
2-type HD Viewfinder
AJ-HVF21KG
Remote control cable
AJ-C10050G
Color Viewfinder
Extension control unit
AG-EC4G
AJ-CVF100G
GPS unit
AJ-GPS910G
Stereo microphone
Ultralight2
AJ-MC900G
(Maximum 50 W)
Anton/Bauer
Microphone holder
AJ-MH800G
AJ-HPX3100G
DIONIC90/160
HYTRON140
Battery
Lens (Bayonet type)
Anton/Bauer
FUJINON/
CANON
V mount
ENDURA E-10
type
Battery
plate
IDX
Tripod adapter
SHAN-TM700
SD Memory cards*
P2 Cards*
External DC power supply
◆Note
All of the devices and accessories other than the unit, which are shown in this system configuration, are optionally available. To
use these devices and accessories, refer to the respective operation manuals.
*
For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the operating Instructions, visit the P2
Support Desk at the following Web sites.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
General: System Configuration
15
Parts and their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section
17
15
14
14
4
13
16
18
12
2
10
9
7
8
5
6
1
3
11
8. Lens cable/microphone cable clamp
1. POWER switch
This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables.
> [Mounting the Lens and Performing the Flange Back
and White Shading Adjustments] (page 111)
Used to turn on/off the power.
2. Battery mount
A battery pack from Anton/Bauer is mounted here.
> [Mounting the Battery and Setting the Battery Type]
(page 109)
9. Tripod mount
When you want to mount camera-recorder on a tripod,
the optional tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700) is attached
here.
3. DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)
camera-recorder is connected to an external DC power
supply.
> [Mounting the Camera on a Tripod] (page 115)
10.LENS jack (12-pin)
> [Use of the external DC power supply] (page 110)
The lens connection cord is connected here. For a
detailed description of your lens, see the relevant
manufacturer’s instruction manual.
4. LIGHT switch
Choose a way to turn the video light connected to the
16.LIGHT connector ON/OFF.
11.DC OUT (DC power supply) output socket
This output socket is designed for 12-VDC. It provides a
maximum current of 1.5 A.
AUTO: If you leave the video light POWER switch
ON, then the light will light at the same time
that this unit starts recording, and the light will
go out at the same time recording stops.
MANUAL: The light will light according to whether the
video light POWER switch is ON/OFF.
Connect an external switch to this socket to control REC
starts and stops or an LED for use as a tally lamp.
> [Connection of the DC OUT connector and the
external REC strat/stop switch] (page 117)
5. Lens mount (bayonet 2/3-type)
The lens is attached here.
‹Note
Confirm the pin arrangements of the DC output connector
of the external DC power supply and the DC IN socket on
the unit, and connect the proper polarities to each other.
If the 12 V power supply is connected to the GND
connector in error, it may cause a fire or failure of the unit.
> [Mounting the Lens and Performing the Flange Back
and White Shading Adjustments] (page 111)
6. Lens lever
Lower this lever to lock the lens to the lens mount.
> [Mounting the Lens and Performing the Flange Back
and White Shading Adjustments] (page 111)
7. Lens mount cap
To remove the cap, raise the 6. lens lever.
When the lens is not mounted, replace the cap.
Parts and their Functions: Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section
16
12.VF connector (20 Pin)
Installs the viewfinder (AJ-HVF21KG, AJ-CVF100G,
which are optional).
> [Viewfinder] (page 30)
‹Note
Please be aware that when the SYSTEM MODE is set at
480/59.94i or 576/50i the image quality displayed on the
viewfinder screen, and the image quality actually recorded
and output from this unit will be different.
13.GPS connector
This connects the optional GPS unit AJ-GPS910G.
14.Shoulder strap fittings
The shoulder strap is attached here.
> [Attaching the Shoulder Strap] (page 116)
15.Light shoe
A video light or similar accessory can be attached here.
The mounting hole size is 1/4-20UNC (screw length less
than 6 mm).
16.LIGHT connector
You can connect an Anton/Bauer Ultralight 2 or
equivalent product under 50 W for the video light. Also,
when the light is lit, the battery charge level goes down
sharply.
When using the light, we recommend using a battery
above 90 Wh.
17.Accessory mounting holes
Attach the accessories. Do not use for any purpose
except to attach the accessories.
There are two types of mounting hole size: 1/4-20UNC
(screw length less than 10 mm) and 3/8-16UNC (screw
length less than 10 mm).
18.Microphone holder mounting screw
The screws are for mounting the AJ-MH800G
microphone holder (optional) and the AG-YA500G VF
interface box (optional).
Parts and their Functions: Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section
17
Audio (input) Function Section
15
8
2
12
3
9
4
6
11
1
16
5 10
7
16
13 14
4. AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch
Use this switch to select the signals recorded through
Audio Channels 1 - 4.
1. MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 5-pin)
A microphone (optional accessory) is connected here.
Power for the microphone comes from this jack.
A remote microphone may be connected. When a
microphone is used, set the power to ON through the
menu option FRONT MIC POWER.
FRONT: Signal from the microphone connected to the
1.MIC IN (microphone input) jack is recorded.
W.L. (WIRELESS) :
Signal from the slot-in wireless receiver is
recorded.
REAR: Signal from the audio device connected to the
5.AUDIO IN CH1/3 / CH2/4 (audio input
channel 1/3 / 2/4) connectors is recorded.
The menu item FRONT MIC POWER is found in the
<MIC/AUDIO> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
> [Preparing for Audio Input] (page 114)
2. AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 (audio channel 1/
3 / 2/4 recording level adjustment) controls
With the 3.AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 / CH2/4 (audio
channel 1/3 / 2/4 automatic/manual level adjustment
selector) switch positioned to [MAN], these controls can
be used to adjust the recording levels for Audio
Channels 1/2 (With the menu settings 3/4).
Note that the controls are designed to be locked. For
adjustment, each control must be depressed while
turning.
‹Note
When you use stereo microphone (AJ-MC900G optional),
set both CH1 and CH2 (With the menu settings CH3, CH4)
to [FRONT]. The signal from L CH is recorded to CH1 (With
the menu settings CH3) and that from R CH to CH2 (With
the menu settings CH4).
5. AUDIO IN CH1/3 / CH2/4 (audio input channel 1/
3 / 2/4) connectors (XLR, 3-pin)
Audio devices or a microphone may be connected here.
> [When Using Audio Devices] (page 115)
3. AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 / CH2/4 (audio channel
1/3 / 2/4 automatic/manual level adjustment
selector) switch
6. LINE/MIC (line input/mic input) selector switch
Used to select the audio signal input from the 5.AUDIO
IN CH1/3 / CH2/4 (audio input channel 1/3 / 2/4)
connectors.
Use this switch to select recording level control mode for
Audio Channels 1/2 (With the menu settings 3/4).
AUTO: Recording level automatically controlled.
MAN: Recording level manually controlled.
LINE: Audio signal line-input from the audio device is
input.
MIC: Audio signal from a self-powered (active)
microphone is input. (The main unit does not
supply power to the remote microphone).
Parts and their Functions: Audio (input) Function Section
18
7. Microphone input +48V ON/OFF switch
This is the ON/OFF switch providing power to the
microphone connected to the 5.AUDIO IN CH1/3 / CH2/
4 (audio input channel 1/3 / 2/4) connector.
+48V:
OFF:
Provides +48 V to the microphone.
Does not provide +48 V to the microphone.
‹Note
If the REAR MIC POWER menu option is not set to “ON”
then power is not supplied regardless of the switch
position. Select the REAR MIC POWER menu option from
the <MIC/AUDIO> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
8. Wireless slot
A Unislot wireless receiver (optional accessory) may be
attached here.
9. F.AUDIO LEVEL (audio recording level
adjustment) control
This control adjusts the recording levels for Audio
Channels 1/3 and 2/4.
However, when the 3.AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 / CH2/4
(audio channel 1/3 / 2/4 automatic/manual level
adjustment selector) switch is set to [AUTO], the level
will adjust automatically and the 2.AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3
/ CH2/4 (audio channel 1/3 / 2/4 recording level
adjustment) controls and this knob will not be active.
The control can be enabled or disabled through the
menu options FRONT VR CH1 or FRONT VR CH2
(With the menu settings FRONT VR CH3 and FRONT
VR CH4). These menu items can be found in the <MIC/
AUDIO> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
Parts and their Functions: Audio (input) Function Section
19
Audio (output) Function Section
10.AUDIO OUT connector (XLR, 5-pin)
15.Speakers
This connector outputs audio signals recorded on
Channels 1/2 or 3/4.
The speakers output EE sound during recording, and
reproduced sound during playback.
Output signals are selected with the 11.MONITOR
SELECT (audio channel) CH1/2 / CH3/4 selector switch.
The speakers emit an alarm sound when the warning
lamp blinks and/or the indicator activates.
When the 16.PHONES (earphones) jack is connected
with earphones, sound from the speaker is
automatically muted.
11.MONITOR SELECT (audio channel) CH1/2 /
CH3/4 selector switch
Use this switch to select the audio channel whose
signals are output to the speakers, earphones or AUDIO
OUT connector.
16.PHONES (earphones) jack (mini jack)
This connector is designed for audio monitoring (stereo)
earphones.
CH1/2: Signals on Audio Channels 1 and 2 are output.
CH3/4: Signals on Audio Channels 3 and 4 are output.
Both the front and rear connectors output the same
sound.
The channel indications on the display window and on
the audio level meter in the viewfinder are synchronised
with this selector switch.
12.MONITOR SELECT (audio selection) CH1/3 / ST
/ CH2/4 selector switch
The MONITOR SELECT switch is synchronised with the
audio signal output to the speakers and earphones, and
from the AUDIO OUT connector.
CH1/3: Signal on Audio Channel 1 or 3 is output.
ST:
Stereo audio signals on Audio Channels 1 and
2 or Audio Channels 3 or 4 are output. The
stereo signals can be changed to mixed
signals using a menu option.
CH2/4: Signal on Audio Channel 2 or 4 is output.
MONITOR SELECT switch
Monitor
switch
CH1/2
CH3/4
CH1/3
ST
Audio Channel 1
Audio Channel 3
Stereo signals from
Audio Channels 1
and 2*
Stereo signals from
Audio Channels 3
and 4*
CH2/4
Audio Channel 2
Audio Channel 4
* You can select between stereo and mixed signal
types using the menu option MONITOR SELECT.
This menu option can be found in the <MIC/
AUDIO> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
13.MONITOR (volume) control
Adjust the volume from earphones connected to the
15.Speakers, or 16. PHONES (earphones) jack.
14.ALARM (warning alarm volume adjustment)
Used to control the volume of the warning sound
emitted from 15.Speakers or earphones connected to
the 16.PHONES (earphones) jack.
If the control is minimised, no alarm is audible.
Parts and their Functions: Audio (output) Function Section
20
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
5
8
11 12 13
10
1
7
15
18
2
3
a
6
20 21 22
19
a
4
14 17 16
9
3. SHUTTER switch
1. CC FILTER/ND FILTER (filter switching)
Used to enable or disable the electronic shutter.
controls
These are used to select the filter in accordance with the
subject’s brightness and color temperature.
OFF: Electronic shutter disabled.
ON:
Electronic shutter enabled.
SEL: Used to change the speed of the electronic
CC FILTER knob (outside, large diameter)
A : 3200K
C : 5600K
B : 4300K
D : 6300K
shutter.
This dial switch returns to its original position. Each turn
of the switch alters the shutter speed.
> [Setting the Electronic Shutter] (page 53).
ND FILTER knob (inside, small diameter)
1 : CLEAR (transparent)
3 : 1/16 ND
2 : 1/4 ND
4 : 1/64 ND
Shooting
conditions
4. AUTO W/B (white/black) BAL switch
AWB: White balance is automatically adjusted.
When the WHITE BAL switch on the side is
positioned at [A] or [B], the adjusted value is
stored in the memory.
CC FILTER
A (3200 K)
ND FILTER
1 (CLEAR)
Sunrise, sunset,
inside a studio
B (4300 K) or
C (5600 K) or
D (6300 K)
Outdoors under a
clear sky
2 (1/4 ND) or
3 (1/16 ND)
Note that when the switch is positioned at
[PRST] this function does not work.
Outdoors under
cloudy or rainy
skies
1 (CLEAR) or
2 (1/4 ND)
ABB: Black balance is automatically adjusted.
The automatic adjustment function of the black
shading can be assigned to this switch by turn-
ing on the SHD.ABB SW CTL item. (Refer to
page 184) The menu item SHD.ABB SW CTL is
found in the <SW MODE> screen on the CAM
OPERATION page.
D (6300 K)
Snowscapes, high
mountains,
seashores or other C (5600 K) or
perfectly clear
scenery
B (4300 K) or
3 (1/16 ND) or
4 (1/64 ND)
D (6300 K)
2. USER MAIN, USER 1 and USER 2 buttons
These buttons can be assigned user-selected functions,
using a menu option. Each button, when pressed,
performs the assigned function.
‹Note
To stop automatic adjustment of the white or black
balance in progress, set the switch to either ([AWB] or
[ABB]).
If automatic adjustment is cancelled, the value in effect
before automatic adjustment will be used.
> [Assigning Functions to USER Buttons] (page 55).
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
21
5. SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons
These buttons are enabled when the 3.SHUTTER
switch is positioned at [ON] and synchro scan is
selected.
12.FF (fast forward) button
During pause, this button is used to perform fast
playback with the lamp blinking.
During playback, it performs an approximately 4a fast
playback with the PLAY and FF lamps blinking.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
start of the next clip is located in pause mode.
They are used to adjust the speed of the synchro scan.
The – button decreases shutter speed; the + button
increases shutter speed.
If you shoot a PC monitor, for example, you should
adjust shutter speed so that the horizontal bars in the
viewfinder will produce less noise.
13.PLAY/PAUSE button
This button is used to view playback using the
viewfinder screen or a color video monitor. The lamp
comes on when playback starts.
6. REC button
Pressing this button starts recording, pressing again
stops recording.
In playback mode, this button pauses (PLAY/PAUSE)
playback with the lamp blinking.
This button has the same function as the 27.REC button
on the handle and the VTR button at the lens.
14.P2 CARD ACCESS LED
This LED indicates the recording and playback status of
each card.
7. SHOT MARKER button
Pressing this button while recording adds a shot mark to
the thumbnail of that clip. This button also adds a shot
mark to any thumbnail selected on the LCD monitor.
For more information on shot marks.
> [P2 CARD ACCESS LED and Status of P2 cards]
(page 33)
15.REMOTE (remote control) connector
Connect the AJ-RC10G remote control unit (optional).
> [Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G)]
(page 143)
> [Shot Mark Function] (page 46)
Also, you can use this button as the USER3 button for
menu settings.
> [Assigning Functions to USER Buttons] (page 55)
You can also remote control part of the functions by
connecting the AG-EC4G extension control unit
(optional).
> [Connection of the extension control unit (AG-
EC4G)] (page 145)
8. Text memo button
Records a text memo if pressed during recording or
playback or when playback is paused.
> [Text Memo Function] (page 45)
Also, you can use this button as the USER4 button for
menu settings.
16.SD memory card insertion slot
An SD memory card (optional accessory) is inserted
here. Use the SD memory card for recording/calling the
settings menu and lens files for this unit, and also
uploading metadata, etc.
> [Assigning Functions to USER Buttons] (page 55)
9. MON OUT CHARACTER switch
This switch controls the superimposition of characters
onto the video output from the MON OUT connector.
‹Notes
<Cautions in using SD memory cards>
z Use the unit by inserting an SD memory card that is
compliant with the SD standard or the SDHC standard.
z MMC (MultiMediaCards) cannot be used. (Bear in mind
that taking pictures may no longer be possible if you do
use them.)
ON: Characters are superimposed.
OFF: Characters are not superimposed.
> [Settings of signals output from MON OUT
connector] (page 89)
z If you intend to use miniSD/microSD cards in camera-
recorder, always install the adapter specially designed
for miniSD/microSD cards. (The unit will not work
properly if only the miniSD/microSD card adapter is
installed. Make sure that the card has been installed in
the adapter before using it.)
z Use of Panasonic’s SD memory cards and miniSD/
microSD cards is recommended. Be sure to format
cards using camera-recorder.
10.REW (rewind) button
During pause, this button performs a fast-reverse
playback with the lamp blinking.
During playback, it performs an approximately 4a fast-
reverse playback with the PLAY and REW lamps
blinking.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
start of the clip being played back is located in pause
mode.
z Any SD memory card with the following capacities (8 MB
to 2 GB) and any 32 GB SDHC memory card can be used
with the unit.
z For the latest information not available in the operating
Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at the following
Web sites.
11.STOP button
This button stops playback.
Also, press this button when you stop interval recording
or one-shot recording, or when you quit consolidating
clips once in ONE CLIP REC mode.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
z The SDHC card conforms to a new standard for memory cards
with a large capacity of more than 2 GB which was established
by the SD Association in 2006.
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
22
17.BUSY (operation mode display) lamp
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory
card.
21.OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch
Used to select the video signals sent from the camera
unit to the memory, viewfinder and video monitor.
It stays illuminated when the card is active.
CAM. AUTO KNEE ON:
Video being recorded through the camera is sent with
the auto knee circuit activated.
It is also possible to assign the DRS (Dynamic Range
Stretcher) function instead of the AUTO KNEE
function.
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF:
Video being recorded through the camera is sent in
manual knee mode.
‹Note
While the lamp is on, do not insert or remove the card. The
SD memory card might break.
18.Focal plane index (
)
This symbol indicates the focal plane of the CCD
sensor.
It provides a reference for making accurate focal
distance measurements from the subject.
BARS:
Color bar signal is output. The AUTO KNEE circuit
does not work.
You can select between four types of color bar signal.
> [COLOR BARS] (page 184).
19.MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU CANCEL
switch
This is the dual purpose spring switch for MARKER
selection and MODE CHECK/MENU CANCEL.
When you press this switch on the side of this unit, the
marker displayed by the viewfinder changes. Press this
button on the side of this unit to switch the information
display screen for A and B, the two types of markers set
with the menu, A (A marker display) > B (B marker
display) > OFF (no marker display). When the power is
turned on, the last selected indication before power-
down appears.
‹Note
With the factory settings, TEST TONE is output to all 4
channels of audio when OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch is
set to [BARS] and CH1 of AUDIO IN switch is set to
[FRONT].
The output method of TEST TONE can be changed in the
TEST TONE menu option.
> [TEST TONE] (page 190)
Auto Knee function
Usually, when you adjust levels to shoot people or scenery
against a strongly lit background, the background will be totally
whited-out, with buildings and other objects blurred. In this case,
the AUTO KNEE function reproduces the background clearly. This
function is effective when:
• The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a clear
sky.
• The subject is a person inside a car or building, and you also
want to capture the background visible through a window.
• The subject is a high-contrast scene.
> [Marker Check Screen Displays (MARKER SELECT
button function)] (page 86)]
When you pull this button toward you, a six screen
display for camera setting status (STATUS screen
display, !LED screen display, FUNCTION screen
display, AUDIO screen display, CAC screen display,
USER SW screen display) switch sequentially on the
viewfinder.
The camera output signal is not affected. The display
goes out in about 5 seconds. When the selected screen
is displayed, the display will continue while you press
the button.
22.WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector)
switch
Used to select the white balance adjustment method.
While displaying the menu, this button works as a switch
to cancel changed setting values.
PRST:
Use this when you have no time to adjust the
white balance.
The value for the white balance is factory-set
to 3200 K.
It can be changed to any color temperature
using a menu option.
>[Setting Color Temperature Manually]
(page 51).
20.Gain selector switch
Use this switch to select video amplifier gain, according
to lighting conditions under which you are shooting.
The values for L, M, and H can be preset using menu
options.
These are factory-set to 0 dB for L, 6 dB for M, and 12
dB for H.
A or B: Pressing the 4. AUTO W/B BAL Switch
toward [AWB] automatically adjusts the white
balance, saving the adjusted value in Memory
A or B.
Also, with menu settings you can assign B to
auto tracking white balance (ATW) of the auto
tracking mode.
>[Adjusting the White Balance] (page 49).
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
23
28
27
26.MON OUT (monitor output) connector
This is the video output connector for the monitor.
According to the MONITOR OUT MODE menu option,
images independent of SDI OUT can be output. Also,
with the menu settings, HD-SDI or down converted SD-
SDI or VBS can be selected. Up convert is not
supported.
You can select the MONITOR OUT MODE menu option
from the <OUTPUT SEL> screen of the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
You can set character superimposition with the 9.MON
OUT CHARACTER switch switch separately from the
25.SDI OUT connector.
> [Settings of signals output from MON OUT
connector] (page 89).
29 30
25 24 26 23
‹Note
23.GENLOCK IN connector
When inputting HD SDI signals use a cable above 5C-FB.
When GENLOCK is set on the camera, or when the time
code is externally locked, reference signals are input.
Also, you can check the return video signal on the
viewfinder screen by inputting an HD-Y signal, and
selecting HD-Y with the RETURN SIGNAL menu option.
You can select the RETURN SIGNAL menu option from
the <GENLOCK> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
27.REC button
Pressing this button starts recording, and pressing again
stops recording.
This button has the same function as 6.REC button and
the VTR button at the lens.
It may be disabled with 28.REC protection button.
> [Setting External Reference Signal and GENLOCK]
(page 61)]
28.REC protection button
This button disables 27.REC button on the handle.
ON: The REC button is enabled.
OFF: The REC button is disabled.
24.SDI IN connector
You can input HD/SD SDI signals. By selecting “SDI”
with the REC SIGNAL menu option, you can record
signals from this input connector.
29.USB 2.0 connector (HOST)
30.USB 2.0 connector (DEVICE)
A USB 2.0 cable is connected here.
You can select the REC SIGNAL menu option from the
<SYSTEM MODE> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
Also, you can set GENLOCK on the menu based on this
input signal.
When the menu option PC MODE is set to “ON”, data
can be transferred via USB 2.0. During such data
transfer, recording, playback or operations of clips is
permitted.
The menu item PC MODE is found in the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
> [Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0
port] (page 136)
> [Setting External Reference Signal and GENLOCK]
(page 61)]
‹Note
When inputting HD SDI signals use a cable above 5C-FB.
25.SDI OUT connector
This is the dedicated SDI output connector. The same
signal format as the SYSTEM MODE is output. Down
convert and up convert are not supported.
You can independently set character superimposition
with the 26.MON OUT (monitor output) connector.
> [Settings of signals output from SDI OUT connector]
(page 88)
‹Note
When inputting HD SDI signals use a cable above 5C-FB.
Parts and their Functions: Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
24
Menu Operation Section
2
1
5
4
3
1. MENU button
Used to turn on/off the menu.
2. JOG dial button
With the menu open, this button is used to navigate
through menu pages, select options and specify values.
> [Setting Menu Options] (page 160)
3. SD memory card insertion slot
An SD memory card (optional accessory) is inserted
here. It is used when writing or saving menu data or lens
files on an SD memory card.
4. BUSY (operation mode display) lamp
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory
card.
It stays illuminated when the card is active.
‹Note
While the lamp is on, do not insert or remove the card. The
SD memory card might break.
5. MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU CANCEL
switch
If you pull the button toward you while changing menu
option settings, you can revert to values before the
change.
Parts and their Functions: Menu Operation Section
25
Time Code Section
5
6
7
8
1
2
4
3
9
7. DISPLAY (counter display selector) switch
Indications of the time code, CTL and user bits on the
counter of the display window depend on the positions
of this switch and the 8.TCG (time code selector) switch.
Pressing the 5.HOLD button also displays Date/Time/
Time Zone.
1. GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)
This connector is used to input a reference signal before
the camera unit is gen-locked, or before the time code is
externally locked.
> [Externally Locking the Time Code] (page 68)
2. SDI IN connector (BNC)
UB:
TC:
User bits/DATE/TIME/Time zone indicated.
Time code indicated.
When GENLOCK is set on the camera, or when the time
code is externally locked, reference signals are input.
> [Externally Locking the Time Code] (page 68)
CTL: CTL indicated.
8. TCG (time code selector) switch
This switch is used to specify the stepping mode for the
built-in time code generator.
‹Note
Input SDI signal must be the same format selected on the
system mode menu of this unit.
F-RUN: Select this position to continuously advance
the time code independently of the P2 card
recording status.
3. TC IN connector (BNC)
This connector is used to input a reference time code
when you externally lock the time code.
> [Externally Locking the Time Code] (page 68)
Use this mode to synchronise the time code
with the time of day, or to externally lock the
time code.
4. TC OUT connector (BNC)
SET:
Select this position to set the time code and/or
user bits.
When you inter-lock the time code of camera-recorder
with that of an external device this must be connected
with the time code input (TC IN) connector of the
external device.
R-RUN: Select this position to advance the time code
only during recording.
For spliced scenes recorded on P2 cards, the
sequence of time codes is unbroken.
> [Externally Locking the Time Code] (page 68)
5. HOLD button
9. CURSOR and SET buttons
Pressing this button freezes the time data indication on
the counter. Note that time code generation continues.
Pressing the button again reactivates the counter.
This function is used to ascertain the time code or CTL
count of a particular recorded scene.
Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits.
The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons,
and the center rectangular one is the SET button.
> [Setting Time Data] (page 62)
6. RESET button
This button resets the time data (CTL) on the counter to
“00:00:00:00”.
If this button is pressed when with the 8.TCG (time code
selector) switch positioned at [SET], time code and user
bits data are reset to 0, and real-time data is reset to the
initial value.
Parts and their Functions: Time Code Section
26
Warning and Status Display Functions
5
6
1
2
3
4
7
1. Back tally lamp
When the 2.BACK TALLY switch is set to [ON], the lamp
behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp at the
viewfinder.
2. BACK TALLY switch
This switch controls the action of the 1.back and 7.rear
tally lamps.
ON: Back and rear tally lamps enabled.
OFF: Back and rear tally lamps disabled.
3. WARNING lamp
This lamp starts blinking or lights up if something
unusual occurs in the memory.
4. USB lamp
Stays on when the camera-recorder is in USB mode.
5. LIGHT button
Use this button to control illumination of the display
window.
Alternately pressing this button toggles illumination of
the 6.Display window on or off.
6. Display window
This window displays warnings, battery-remaining level,
sound volume, time data, and other information.
‹Note
When the battery is installed, the camera-recorder
indicates the data even if the power is turned off. To turn
off the data indications to keep the battery from being
discharged, specify OFF for the menu item P. OFF LCD
DISPLAY. The menu item P. OFF LCD DISPLAY is found in
the <TC/UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
7. Rear tally lamp
When the 2.BACK TALLY switch is set on [ON], the rear
tally lamp behaves in the same way as the back tally
lamp.
Parts and their Functions: Warning and Status Display Functions
27
Display Window Functions
Mode indication
W:
P2 card/battery-remaining level indications
Stays illuminated when the camera-recorder operates in
SD mode (480-59.94i, 576-50i) and is set to 16:9 mode.
Stays illuminated when the camera-recorder is in HD
mode (1080i).
Stays illuminated when the recording/playback format is
DV.
Media-remaining space indication bar
The bar indicates the remaining free space on each P2 card,
using a seven-segment display.
Each segment can represent either three or five minutes of
remaining free space, depending on the value set through the
menu option CARD REMAIN/„. According to the set value, the
segments disappear one-by-one. The menu option CARD
REMAIN /„ can be found in the <BATTERY/P2CARD> screen on
the MAIN OPERATION page.
HD:
DV:
GPS: Stays illuminated when radio waves are not received
during GPS operation.
GPS : Stays illuminated when radio waves are received during
GPS operation.
P-REC: Stays illuminated when the PRE REC MODE is set to
ON, and blinks when recording is continued after the
recording tally lamp has gone out. The menu item PRE
REC MODE is found in the <REC FUNCTION> screen
on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
OVER
OVER
SLAVE HOLD W HDVGPS
NDF
0
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P-iREC
10
20
30
iREC: Remains illuminated during INTERVAL REC mode
recording, and blinks during a pause.
h
Y
minM
s
D
frm
i:
Blinks when INTERVAL REC mode is selected.
E
E
F
F
MEDIA
BATT
OVER
OVER
NDFSLAVE HOLD W HDVGPS
40
0
OO
-dB
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P-iREC
LOOP
13
24
10
20
30
Battery-remaining level indication bar
For a battery with a digital indicator (percentage indication),
if the remaining level of the battery is higher than 70%, all
seven segments up to the “F” position are lit.
When the remaining level falls below 70%, the segments go
out one-by-one for each drop of 10%. All seven segments
can be set to light up when the battery-remaining balance is
100%. To do so select “100%” for the menu item BATT
REMAIN FULL. The menu item BATT REMAIN FULL is
found in the <BATTERY/P2CARD> screen on the MAIN
OPERATION page.
h
Y
minM
s
D
frm
E
E
F
F
MEDIA
BATT
40
OO
-dB
LOOP
13
24
Time code indication
NDF: Stays illuminated when the time code is in non-drop frame
mode.
DF:
Stays illuminated when the time code is in drop frame
mode.
Audio channel level meter
SLAVE: Stays illuminated when the time code is externally locked.
HOLD: Stays illuminated when the time code generator/reader
value is frozen.
CTL: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned
at [CTL] to display the CTL count.
When the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 switch is set to
[CH1/2], the meter indicates 1 and 2 as the audio channel
numbers, together with their audio levels. When the switch is
set to [CH3/4], the meter indicates 3 and 4 as the audio
channel numbers, together with their audio levels.
TCG: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned
at [TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB) generator
value.
Memory action status indication
TC:
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at
[TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB) reader value.
Error Code Indication
> [Warning System] (page 153)
VTCG: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned
at [UB] to display the VIUB generator value.
VTC: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned
at [UB] to display the VIUB reader value.
OVER
OVER
SLAVE HOLD W HDVGPS
NDF
0
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P-iREC
TIME: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned at
[UB] to display the real-time hour, minute and second.
DATE: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned
at [UB] to display the real-time date.
10
20
30
h
Y
minM
s
D
frm
No Indication:
E
E
F
F
MEDIA
BATT
The CTL, VTCG, TIME, and DATE stay off when the DISPLAY
switch is positioned at [UB] to display real time, time zone, hour
and minute.
Time count indication:
The time code, CTL, user bits and real time are shown.
40
OO
-dB
LOOP
13
24
Information indication
LOOP:Stays illuminated in LOOP REC mode.
[Loop Recording] (page 39).
‹Note
When the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB, each press of
the HOLD button changes the indication through VTCG (VTC)
> DATE > TIME > No Indication (Time Zone) > TCG (TC),
in that order.
>
Parts and their Functions: Display Window Functions
28
LCD Monitor
5. CURSOR and SET buttons
The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons,
and the center rectangular one is the SET button.
They are used to select a thumbnail and manipulate the
thumbnail menu.
> [Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails] (page 118).
6. EXIT/CANCEL button
Used to return the display to the previous state when the
thumbnail menu or the property screen is displayed.
Also, when you press the button while pressing the
SHIFT button, it cancels. It is convenient when
canceling clip selection status for a batch.
2
7. SHIFT button
Use by pressing at the same time as other buttons.
1
3
6
5
4
7
z SHIFT button + cursor button (#/$)
On the thumbnail screen, moves the pointer to the
first or last thumbnail of the clip.
z SHIFT button +SET button
Selects all clips from the clip just selected up to the
cursor position.
z SHIFT button +EXIT/CANCEL button
Operates the cancel function.
> [EXIT/CANCEL button] (page 29)
1. LCD monitor
The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder.
Alternatively, it can show clips on the P2 card in a
thumbnail format.
In thumbnail display mode, clips can be edited or
deleted, or P2 cards can be formatted using the
4.THUMBNAIL MENU button and 5.CURSOR and SET
buttons.
Operations while pressing the SHIFT button are
displayed below each button.
‹Notes
z The image quality displayed with this monitor is
different from the image quality actually recorded/output
from this unit. Be careful especially when setting the
menu item SYSTEM MODE of this unit to “480/59.94i”
and “576/50i”. The menu item SYSTEM MODE is found in
the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
z The image in the monitor is disrupted momentarily when
the SYSTEM MODE menu item is set to “480/59.94i” or
“576/50i”, and the image is switched between the
camera image and playback image, but this is not a
malfunction.
z An image may freeze onto the LCD display for a while
when the battery is removed or the external DC power
supply is unplugged while the power is still on, but this
is not a malfunction. It will disappear after a while if left
as it is.
z Residual images may seem to increase when the
temperature is low, but this is not a malfunction.
2. OPEN button
Used to open the LCD monitor.
3. THUMBNAIL button
This button switches the content on the 1.LCD monitor
from the video in the viewfinder to clip thumbnails.
Another press switches them back to the video from the
viewfinder.
Note that this switchover is not performed during a
recording or playback.
4. THUMBNAIL MENU button
In thumbnail display mode, this button allows you to
manipulate the thumbnail menu (e.g., to delete clips).
Parts and their Functions: LCD Monitor
29
Viewfinder
An HD viewfinder can be used with this unit. It is recommended to use the optional AJ-HVF21KG or AJ-CVF100G (59.94/50
Hz switching). (z: the finder shows nothing on a black screen)
Video seen through
Mode
HD viewfinder
viewfinder
Video from camera
Playback
±
±
±
±
HD
Return video (HD-Y)
HD-SDI input (HD)
Video from camera
Playback
*1
±
*2
±
SD
Return video (VBS)
z
*3
HD-SDI input (SD
)
±
Each viewfinder shows return signals and SDI input signals in the recording formats assigned to the camera-recorder.
*1 HD Signals.
*2 The image in the viewfinder is disrupted momentarily when the SYSTEM MODE menu item is set to “480/59.94i” or “576/50i”, and the
image is switched between the camera image and playback image, but this is not a malfunction. The SYSTEM MODE menu option can
be selected from the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
*3 Image may be disrupted in a vertical direction when the return video image of the SDI input signal is displayed on the viewfinder with the
SYSTEM MODE menu option set to “480-59.94i” or “576-50i” and the GENLOCK menu item set to “INT”. This is not a malfunction, but
the disruption can be cleared by selecting “SDI IN” in the GENLOCK menu option. The GENLOCK menu option can be selected from the
<GENLOCK> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
For details, please refer to the operating instructions for each viewfinder.
AJ-HVF21KG
4. PEAKING control
Used to adjust the outlines of the video image in the
13 14 11 7
viewfinder for easier focusing. This does not affect the
signal output from the camera.
9
10
12
5. CONTRAST control
Used to adjust the contrast of the video image in the
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from
the camera.
1
8
6. BRIGHT control
Used to adjust the brightness of the video image in the
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from
the camera.
4
5
2
3
6
1. Viewfinder (optional accessory)
During recording or playback, the viewfinder displays
the video image in monochrome. It also displays
warnings, messages, zebra patterns, markers (safety
zone and center markers), etc.
7. Front tally lamp
This lamp is activated when the 3.TALLY switch is
positioned at [HIGH] or [LOW], and stays on during
recording. It also blinks in synchronisation with the REC
lamp in the viewfinder, and provides alerts.
Use the TALLY switch to change the intensity of the
lamp to ([HIGH] or [LOW]).
2. ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
This switch is used to display the zebra pattern in the
viewfinder.
ON: Zebra pattern displayed.
OFF: No zebra pattern displayed.
8. Back tally lamp
This lamp stays illuminated during shooting. It also
blinks in synchronisation with the REC lamp in the
viewfinder, and provides alerts.
When the lever is positioned at [OFF], the back tally
lamp is hidden.
3. TALLY switch
Used to control the 7.Front tally lamp.
HIGH: Front tally lamp brightly illuminated.
OFF: Front tally lamp stays off.
LOW: Front tally lamp dimly illuminated.
Parts and their Functions: Viewfinder
30
If, when fitting a large lens, there is insufficient space
between the top of the lens and the bottom of the viewfinder,
the positions of the slide rails can be shifted upwards slightly
by repositioning the screws.
9. Eyepiece
‹Note
Do not leave the eyepiece aimed at the sun. Doing so
may damage the internal components.
a
10.Diopter adjustment ring
Use this to make adjustments in line with your diopter, in
order to obtain optimum clarity in the viewfinder image.
The adjustable range of the viewfinder view angle is
shown in the following table.
Product Number
AJ-HVF21KG
Adjustable range
–0.9 D to –4.4 D
b
For an eyepiece for presbyopia, consult the dealer.
11.Connecting plug
a. Conventional screw positions
b. Reposition and fix 3 screws here to raise the slide rail by
approximately 8 mm.
12.Locking ring
13.Microphone holder
14.Viewfinder stopper
Used to attach or remove the viewfinder.
16
15
15.Viewfinder left-right position anchoring ring
Used to adjust the side-to-side position of the
viewfinder.
16.Viewfinder front-back position anchoring lever
Used to adjust the fore-and-aft position of the
viewfinder.
‹Note
For more information, see th e instruction manual for the
viewfinder.
Parts and their Functions: Viewfinder
31
Recording and Playback
P2 Cards
Inserting P2 Cards
3
4
5
Insert a P2 card into the P2 card slot until the
EJECT button pops up.
‹Note
When using the camera-recorder for the first time, be sure to
set the time data beforehand.
> On how the time data is set, see [Setting Time Data] (page 62).
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
EJECT button
Insert the card
with the logo
facing up.
Push the eject button that pops up to the right.
Insert a P2 card into camera-recorder. The P2 CARD
ACCESS LED for the appropriate slot indicates the
status of the P2 card.
>[P2 CARD ACCESS LED and Status of P2 cards]
(page 33).
POWER: ON
2
Open the card slot cover.
P2 CARD
ACCESS
LED
Close the slot cover.
Card slot cover
‹Notes
z To prevent cards from falling out, dust from entering
and reduce the risk of exposure to static electricity,
close the card slot cover before moving the camera.
z Format P2 cards only on a P2 card device.
Recording and Playback: P2 Cards
32
<For Your Information>
Removing P2 Cards
The P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs may be set to stay off using
the menu option ACCESS LED. The menu item ACCESS
LED is found in the <OPTION MODE> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page.
1
2
3
Open the card slot cover.
Raise the EJECT button.
Then, depress the EJECT button to release the
P2 card so that you can remove it.
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card Content
To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally
erased, position the write-protect switch on the P2 card at
[Protect].
‹Note
Write-protect switchover can be performed while the card is
being accessed (during recording or playback), but does not
take effect until access to the card ceases.
Raise the EJECT
button.
Press the raised EJECT
button to remove a P2
card.
‹Notes
z After insertion, do not remove the P2 card while it is being
accessed or recognized (the P2 card access LED flashes
orange), or the P2 card may fail. If your unit is not set to turn
on the P2 CARD ACCESS LED, before removing the card
ensure that PRE-RECORDING have finished after stopping
recording or playback.
Protect
z If a P2 card being accessed is removed, the viewfinder
displays “TURN POWER OFF” and camera-recorder gives a
warning using an alarm and the WARNING LED. In addition,
all P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs blink rapidly in green. If this is
the case, turn the power off.
Write-protect switch
P2 CARD ACCESS LED and Status of P2 cards
P2 CARD
ACCESS LED
MODE CHECK
indication*
Status of P2 Card
> For more information on warning indications, see [Warning
System] (page 153).
Stays on in green ACTIVE
Writing and reading
enabled
z If a P2 card is removed while being accessed, clips on it may
become irregular. Check the clips and restore them if
required.
> For more information about how to restore clips, see
[Restoring Clips] (page 126).
z If a P2 card being formatted is removed, it may be not be
formatted properly. In this case, the viewfinder displays
“TURN POWER OFF”. If this message appears, turn off the
power, then restart camera-recorder to reformat the card.
z If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played
back, the inserted P2 card is not recognised and the P2
CARD ACCESS LED for that card does not come on. Card
recognition starts when the playback ends.
Stays on in
orange
ACTIVE
Writing and reading
enabled. The card is
recordable (LOOP REC
also enabled).
Blinks in orange ACCESSING
Writing or reading being
performed.
Blinks rapidly in INFO READING
orange
Recognaising the P2 card.
Blinks slowly in
green
FULL
The P2 card has no free
space. Only reading is
enabled.
z Even if a P2 card is inserted in a vacant slot while recording,
the media may not be recognized during the following times:
Š Immediately after PRE-RECORDING
PROTECTED
The write-protect switch on
the P2 card is positioned at
[PROTECT]. Only reading
is enabled.
Š Immediately before or after switching from the first P2
card for recording to the second one, when data are
recorded on multiple cards spanning from one to the
other (hot-swap recording)
Stays off
NOT
The card is not supported
by your unit. Replace the
card.
SUPPORTED
FORMAT ERROR The P2 card is not properly
formatted. Reformat the
card.
NO CARD
No P2 card is inserted.
* The mode check indication is shown in the viewfinder.
> [Viewfinder Status Indication Layout] (page 76).
Recording and Playback: P2 Cards
33
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards
The P2 card is a semiconductor memory card that is used as the recording medium in the professional video production and
broadcasting devices that make up the DVCPRO P2 Series.
z Since data recorded in the DVCPRO P2 format or AVC-
Intra are in a file format, they have excellent compatibility
with PCs. The file structure is a unique format, which in
addition to video and audio data in MXF files contains
various other important information items. The folder
structure links the data as shown on the right.
Device:\
CONTENTS
AUDIO
CLIP
ICON
PROXY
VIDEO
VOICE
All these folders are required.
* This is the file in which the
information on the final clip
that was recorded with the P2
device is written.
LASTCLIP.TXT*
Changing or deleting just one information component
could make it impossible to recognize the data as P2 data
or use the card in a P2 device
z When transferring data from a P2 card to a PC, or when rewriting data saved on a PC to a P2 card, to prevent data loss be
sure to use the special P2 Viewer software. Download it from the following website.
You can also visit the support desk at the following website for details on the system requirements of P2 Viewer.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
z When using regular IT tools such as Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer data to a PC, follow the
instructions below. However, be sure to use the P2 Viewer when returning data to a P2 card.
Š Transfer the corresponding CONTENTS folder and LASTCLIP.TXT file together as a set.
Do not transfer individual files from the CONTENTS folder.
When copying, copy the LASTCLIP.TXT file at the same time as the CONTENTS folder.
Š When transferring multiple P2 cards to a PC, create a folder for each P2 card to prevent clips with the same name from
being overwritten.
Š Do not delete data from the P2 card.
Š Before using a P2 card, be sure to format it with a P2 device.
Recording and Playback: How to handle data recorded on P2 cards
34
Basic Procedures
This section describes the basic procedure for shooting and
recording. Before you embark on a shoot, pre-inspect your
system to ensure that it works properly.
Switch Setting
When a battery and P2 cards are installed, set the switches
as detailed below, before starting to use your unit.
* For directions on inspecting your memory card camera-recorder, see
[Inspections Before Shooting] (page 146).
Setting the switches before shooting and recording
Battery Set-up to P2 card Insertion
AUDIO SELECT
USER MAIN:
CH 1/3 / CH 2/4:
This switch is factory-set to perform
AUTO
slot selection.
1
2
Insert a charged battery pack.
Turn on the POWER switch and ensure that
more than four segments of the battery-
remaining amount indication bar are
illuminated.
TCG:
F-RUN or
R-RUN
If the number of illuminated segments is fewer than
five, first check the battery placement. If placement is
not the problem, replace the battery with a fully charged
one.
OUTPUT:
CAM/AUTO KNEE ON
GAIN:
3
Insert a P2 card and ensure that the P2 CARD
ACCESS LED stays on in orange or green.
Then, close the card slot cover.
Normally, this should be set to 0 dB. If
conditions are too dark, an
appropriate gain level should be set.
When more than one P2 card slot contains a P2 card,
the card in the slot with the lowest number is used first.
However, regardless of slot number, a P2 card inserted
later will not be accessed until the other cards have
been used.
‹Notes
z The USER MAIN button is factory-set to perform the slot
selection function, which selects the target card from among
several P2 cards.
When a new target P2 card is selected, the appropriate slot
number appears on the P2 card remaining amount indicator
in the viewfinder.
Example:
> For more information about the indications in the viewfinder,
see [Viewfinder Status Indication Layout] (page 76).
z SLOT SEL function is enabled during recording. Until the P2
card on which images are recorded has been switched
completely, “SLOT SEL” blinks on the viewfinder. If the
“SLOT SEL” operation cannot be executed for any reason, for
instance immediately after starting recording or switching
the P2 card on which images are recorded, “SLOT SEL
INVALID” is displayed.
If all 2 slots contain P2 cards, the cards are used in
order of slot numbers 1>2. However, if the P2 card in
Slot 1 is removed and then re-inserted, the cards will be
used in the following order: 2>1.
2
2 3
1
Note that the recording order is retained even if the power is
turned off. When the power is next turned on, the last card
written before powering-down will be the target card.
‹Note
When “SLOT1” is selected for the menu option P.ON REC SLOT
SEL, recording starts from the P2 card inserted in the smallest
slot number, after the power is turned on.
The menu item P.ON REC SLOT SEL is found in the <REC
FUNCTION> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Recording and Playback: Basic Procedures
35
White/Black balance adjustment to recording completion
White/Black Balance Adjustment to Recording
Completion
For shooting, follow the steps below.
1
2
Select a filter according to light conditions.
When the white balance is saved:
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B].
When the white or black balance is not saved
and you have no time to adjust the white
balance:
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [PRST].
This adjusts the white balance against the filter
according to the position of the FILTER control.
3
1 4 5, 6 2
2
If the white balance is adjusted on the spot:
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B] and shoot a
white test subject so that it appears at the center of the
screen. Then, follow the steps below to adjust the white
balance.
1. Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to
adjust the white balance.
2. Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [ABB] to
adjust the black balance.
3. Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to
adjust the white balance again.
For directions on making adjustments, see [Adjusting
the White Balance] (page 49) and [Adjusting the Black
Balance] (page 52).
3
4
Point the camera at your subject to adjust the
focus, and zoom.
To use the electronic shutter, set the shutter
speed and operation mode.
For more information, see [Setting the Electronic
Shutter] (page 53).
5
6
Press either the REC button to start recording.
During recording, the REC lamp in the viewfinder stays
illuminated.
To stop recording, press either the REC
button at the lens.
The REC lamp in the viewfinder goes out.
Operation Buttons
During recording, all operation buttons (REW, FF, PLAY/
PAUSE, STOP) are disabled.
Recording and Playback: Basic Procedures
36
Normal Recording
REC button starts recording of video and sound on the P2 card. A cluster of data that consists of video and sound generated
through a shooting action, together with such added information as meta data, is called a “clip”.
Normal Recording and Native Recording
In the unit, the camera’s recording method is selectable
between the Native recording method with the frame rate
unchanged and the normal recording method pulling the
‹Notes
z The recording will start from the top frame of a five-frame
frame rate down to 59.94 or 50 frames.
cycle for 24P/24PA recording or a four-frame cycle for 24P
native recording, respectively. Therefore, the time code may
be discontinued when recording clips continuously in
different modes during the recording cycle.
Normal recording (Pull-down recording)
z Even if a P2 card has just been inserted, or the power has
been just turned on, you can start recording using the
internal memory of camera-recorder. In this case, recording
cannot be stopped until the P2 card is recognised. If the
inserted card is not recognized as a recordable P2 card, the
record in internal memory is instantly discarded, and the
message “CANNOT REC” message is displayed on the
viewfinder. Pull the MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU
CANCEL switch to check P2 card status (displayed in
viewfinder).
Images at 24P (23.98p: referred to as 24P) are pulled down
in 2:3 mode. Images at 30P (29.97p: referred to as 30P) are
pulled down in 2:2 mode and recorded as 59.94i (referred to
as 60i). Images at 25P are recorded as 50i with 2:2 pulled
down. 24PA (2:3:3:2 Advanced Pull down) is supported as
well.
AVC-Intra does not support pull-down recording.
Example of 24P Over 60i
Camera
recording
A
B
C
D
2:3 pull down
= recording
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Native recoding
This recording method extracts and records effective frames
at the frame rates of the AVC-Intra recording in 1080i.
Even in Native recording, the rate for outputting camera
images and playback images is 59.94i or 50i that are pulled
down.
MARKER SEL, MODE CHK /
MENU CANCEL switch
REC button
Example of 1080-24PN (Native)
Camera
recording
A
B
C
D
2:3 pull down
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Recording
A
B
C
D
Recording and Playback: Normal Recording
37
PRE-RECORDING function
The internal memory of your unit is capable of storing
‹Notes
several seconds of video and sound data coming from the
camera. This capability can be used to record video and
sound several seconds before either the REC button is
pressed to start recording. To use this function, the menu
option PRE REC MODE must be set to “ON”. The storage
duration of the internal memory can be set from the menu
option PRE REC TIME. These menu items are found in the
<REC FUNCTION> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
The function of the menu option PRE REC MODE may be
assigned to a desired user button by using any one of the menu
options USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW, USER2 SW, SHOT
MARK (USER3) SW or TEXTMEMO (USER4).
z “P-REC” indication when the “PRE REC MODE” menu
option is set to OFF
After recording is stopped, the “P-REC” indication remains
displayed until all video and sound are recorded on the P2
card, even if the PRE REC MODE menu option is set to OFF.
> For details of the [P-REC] display, refer to [29.INTERVAL
REC/PRE RECORDING information display (page 81)].
In addition, this display can be turned off by configuring the
P-REC/i-REC settings. The menu item P-REC/i-REC is found
in the <VF INDICATOR> screen on the VF page.
z Immediately after the power is turned on, the menu option
PRE REC TIME is selected and/or the storage duration is
changed, the content in internal memory will be undefined. In
these situations, the video or sound will not be recorded for
the duration specified, even if the REC button is pressed to
start recording.
z A P2 card that has been just inserted takes some time to
recognise. In this situation, video or sound may not be
recorded for the duration specified, even if the REC button is
pressed to start a recording.
z The internal memory does not store video or sound when a
playback or recording review is being performed. For this
reason, no video or sound can be recorded during such
operation.
These menu items are found in the <USER SW> screen on
the CAM OPERATION page.
These are the options for PRE REC TIME.
1-8 SEC
(When recording in DVCPRO50 in HD or SD mode)
1-15 SEC
(When recording in DVCPRO or DV in SD mode)
Specify the duration for which data may be recorded before
either the REC buttonis pressed.
z When recording starts, the time code indication (TCG) may
be shown as “HOLD” until the P2 card has been recognised.
z PRE RECORDING function does not work when recording
SDI input signals and when INTERVAL REC and LOOP REC
functions are working.
REC/PAUSE
REC start
(Recording pauses)
(Recording starts)
Real-time video
Real-time sound
A
B
C
Specified PRE-REC
duration
Previous clip
Content on P2 card
A
B
New clip
Recording and Playback: PRE-RECORDING function
38
Loop Recording
When two P2 card slots contain cards, this function allows
‹Notes
the target P2 card to be switched in order. Even when the
free space of a P2 card is used up, this function continues
recording while erasing existing data.
To use this function, the menu option LOOP REC MODE
must be set to “ON”. The menu item FLOOP REC MODE is
found in the <REC FUNCTION> screen on the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
z When the LOOP REC capability is used, each P2 card must
have at least one minute of free space.
z During LOOP REC, the P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs for all target
P2 cards illuminate in orange. Note that if any of the target P2
card is removed, LOOP REC stops.
z When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON, the
viewfinder and display window both show “LOOP”.
However, when only one card is inserted, or when each card
has less than one minute of free space, the LOOP REC
capability does not work, even if the option LOOP REC
MODE is set to ON. If this is the case, the indication “LOOP”
flashes in the viewfinder and on the display window.
z When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to “ON”, the
space remaining on the P2 card is displayed as an estimated
recording time for the current recording format. When LOOP
REC is stopped immediately after deleting an old recording,
the actual time remaining may be shorter than the displayed
time.
Card1
Card2
Before LOOP
REC starts
Content
recorded
No content
Recording starts
Recording
Cycle 1
B
B
A
Recording
Cycle 2
C
z LOOP REC function does not work when:
Š the INTERVAL REC MODE menu option is set to “ON” or
“ONE SHOT”.
Š the ONE CLIP REC MODE menu option is set to “ON”.
Š Native mode, 24P or 24PA mode is selected in the REC
FORMAT or CAMERA MODE menu option.
Data is recorded by connecting the unrecorded sections on the
P2 card (in the sequence of A to B). When the remaining
recording space becomes zero, A is erased and new data is
recorded (C).
Š the REC SIGNAL menu option is set to “SDI”.
> [Recording Setting and Operation Mode] (page 46)
Terminating the LOOP REC Mode
You can terminate the LOOP REC mode by either:
z Turning off the POWER switch of camera-recorder; or
z Setting the menu option LOOP REC MODE to “OFF”.
Interval Recording
It is possible to record in intervals of one frame as the
shortest length by using the internal memory of the unit.
To use this option, set the interval recording mode, REC
TIME, PAUSE TIME and TAKE TOTAL TIME for the menu
option INTERVAL REC MODE. When the settings are
finalized, TOTAL REC TIME needed on the P2 card is
automatically calculated and displayed. The menu item
INTERVAL REC MODE is found in the <REC FUNCTION>
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
The following are the options for INTERVAL REC MODE:
OFF:
No interval recording performed.
ON:
Interval recording performed.
ONE SHOT:
Performs “one-shot” recording for the duration
specified under the REC TIME option by pressing the
REC button.
Recording and Playback: Loop Recording
39
Shooting procedures when INTERVAL REC is ON
To stop the Interval recording mode
z Setting the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE to “OFF”.
1
Following basic operations of shooting and
recording according to “Basic Procedures”,
lock the camera securely.
When INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “OFF”, the mode
returns to ordinary recording mode if the POWER switch of
the unit is turned OFF.
If INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to “ON”, the interval
recording mode will not change even if the POWER switch is
turned OFF.
2
3
Check that “i” is blinking in the display, and
that the interval recording mode is selected.
Press REC button.
Interval recording starts. Recording automatically stops
after the specified TAKE TOTAL TIME, and the entire
recording is generated as one clip.
“i” starts blinking in the display when the internal
recording mode is selected. “iREC” illuminates after
recording starts. “iREC” blinks during a pause.
The display in the viewfinder is the same as that in the
display window.
The tally lamp illuminates during recording. If PAUSE
TIME is set at 2 minutes or longer, the tally lamp
illuminates at 5-second intervals to indicate that it is
paused. The tally lamp also blinks 3 seconds before
recording starts.
Time Axis
REC TIME
(Recording
time=t1)
iREC start
t1
t1
2
t1
t1
t1
N
Real-time video
Sound
1
3
N-1
PAUSE TIME
(Pausing
time=t2)
t2
t2
t2
TAKE TOTAL TIME
(Time necessary for shooting)
Content on P2 card
1
2
3
N-1
N
One clip
TOTAL REC TIME
(Recording time on P2 card)
To stop recording
Press the STOP button. Recording stops. Then, the camera
accesses the P2 card to record the video stored in memory
before recording stops. The record from the beginning of the
interval recording to the moment of pressing the STOP
button is generated as one clip.
For continuous recording
Press the REC button, again. Interval recording resumes.
Recording and Playback: Interval Recording
40
Shooting procedures for the ONE SHOT mode of
INTERVAL REC
During INTERVAL REC mode general notes
z Sound
After setting the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC, follow
these steps:
Interval recording does not record audio.
z Record/Playback Buttons
During interval recording, all operation buttons other than
STOP (REW, FF, PLAY/PAUSE) are disabled.
1
2
Following basic operations of shooting and
recording according to “Basic Procedures”,
lock the camera securely.
z If the power is turned off during recording
If the AJ-HPX3100 is turned off during interval recording,
the video stored in memory is recorded onto the P2 card,
and then the camera automatically turns off.
Press the REC button.
z The AJ-HPX3100 automatically goes into ONE
SHOT pause mode after the specified REC TIME.
z Performs recording for the duration specified under
the REC TIME option by pressing the REC button,
and returns to ONE SHOT pause mode.
z Time code indication
When recording starts, the time code (TCG) display may
not update until the unit recognizes the P2 card.
z Removing cards
During INTERVAL REC mode operation, the P2 card
access LED for the inserted P2 card blinks in orange. Do
not remove the P2 card during this status. If you should
remove the card accidentally, restore clips. However, even
if the clips are restored, the last 3 to 4 seconds up to a
maximum of about 10 seconds of the recording may be
lost if the P2 card is removed while recording onto multiple
P2 cards. For more information on how to fix clips, see
[Restoring Clips] (page 126).
3
Press the STOP button.
The video stored in memory are generated as one clip.
iREC
start
iREC
start
STOP
button
Time
Axis
REC TIME
(Recording
time=t)
Real-time video
Sound
A
B
t
t
z Operating mode limitations
Content on P2 card Previous clip
A
B
INTERVAL REC function does not work when:
Š the LOOP REC MODE menu option is set to “ON”.
Š the ONE CLIP REC MODE menu option is set to
“ON”.
One clip
Š Native mode, 24P or 24PA mode is selected in the
REC FORMAT or CAMERA MODE menu option.
Š The REC SIGNAL menu option is set to “SDI”.
> [Recording Setting and Operation Mode] (page 46)
To divide clips or to change the P2 card used for
recording
Even during ONE SHOT mode, clips will not be generated
on the P2 card until the STOP button is pressed. Press the
STOP button, and stop ONE SHOT mode operation.
When replacing the P2 card, check the access LED, etc. to
make sure that access has been terminated before
removing the P2 card.
z Thumbnail operation and menu operation
Thumbnail operation does not work during the INTERVAL
REC mode operation. Press the STOP button before
operating thumbnails.
When standby time is set to 1 minute or more or when in
ONE SHOT mode, the following restrictions apply even
though the menu can be operated during stand-by mode.
Š The respective settings or SYSTEM MODE, REC
SIGNAL, REC FORMAT, CAMERA MODE, AUDIO
SMPL RES, 25M REC CH SEL, and PC MODE cannot
be changed.
To stop the ONE SHOT mode of INTERVAL REC
z Set the menu option INTERVAL REC MODE to “OFF”.
When INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to [OFF], the mode
returns to ordinary recording mode if the POWER switch of
the unit is turned OFF.
If INTERVAL REC HOLD is set to [ON], the ONE SHOT
mode will not change even if the POWER switch is turned
OFF.
Š The respective settings for SD CARD READ/WRITE,
LENS FILE CARD R/W, READ USER DATA, READ
FACTORY DATA, reading SCENE FILE, and CAC FILE
CARD READ cannot be executed.
Recording and Playback: Interval Recording
41
ONE CLIP REC Function
This function compiles multiple recordings into a combined
clip and does not isolate single recordings (from REC
START to STOP) to single clips.
Exiting ONE CLIP REC mode
Set the ONE CLIP REC MODE item to “OFF” in the Menu.
REC Start
REC Start
REC Start
Cueing to the Start of the Combined Section of
the Clip
First Recording
REC stop
Second Recording
REC stop
Nth Recording*
REC stop
A text memo can be automatically added to the start of the
recording, the start of a section can be cued for playback,
and the thumbnail of the location can be checked before
each recording.
Automatically add a text memo to the start of the recording
by setting the START TEXT MEMO item to “ON”. The menu
item START TEXT MEMO is found in the <OPTION MODE>
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Single Combined Clip
* Up to a maximum of 99 recordings can be combined into a
single clip. When the 99th recording ends, recordings are no
longer automatically combined into the same clip. Subsequent
recordings are combined into a new clip.
Check and playback the location of the added text memo by
selecting THUMBNAIL > TEXT MEMO CLIPS from the
Thumbnail Menu and moving the cursor over the desired
clip.
Use this function by setting the ONE CLIP REC MODE item
to “ON”. The menu item ONE CLIP REC MODE is found in
the <REC FUNCTION> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
> [Playing back a clip at the position where a text memo is
recorded] (page 124)
When the ONE CLIP REC mode is selected, “1-CLIP” will
display in the lower right of the viewfinder and the LCD
monitor.
Start the first recording by pressing the REC button. “START
1¢CLIP” will display.
Any subsequent recordings are automatically combined into
the clip. Up to a maximum of 99 clips can be combined into a
single clip.
In addition, cue the location of the text memo for playback by
setting the SEEK SELECT item to “CLIP&T”. Press the FF or
REW button while playback is paused. The menu item SEEK
SELECT is found in the <OPTION MODE> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page.
Recording a New Clip
Follow the instructions below to use a new and separate clip
and end combining to the clip.
z Press and hold the STOP button for about 2 seconds
while recording is paused. (operating while recording is on
standby)
Or
z Press and hold the REC button for about 2 seconds while
recording to stop recording. (operating while recording)
Follow the instructions above to end combining to the clip.
“END 1-CLIP” displays. Subsequent recordings use a new
and separate clip.
‹Notes
z In addition to the aforementioned steps, the following ends
combining to the clip and subsequent recordings use a new
clip.
Š When the power is turned off
Š When the P2 card with the previous recording is
removed
Š When the P2 card is formatted or the clip is deleted
(when the previous combined clip does not exist)
z The clip does not stop combining even when the STOP
button is pressed in the Menu or on the thumbnail display.
z Pressing the STOP button of the remote control unit (AJ-
RC10G) or the extension control unit (AG-EC4G) cannot quit
consolidating clips.
Recording and Playback: ONE CLIP REC Function
42
Precautions when in ONE CLIP REC mode
z The INTERVAL REC and LOOP REC functions cannot be
used at the same time.
z This mode does not operate when the REC SIGNAL item
is set to “SDI”. The menu item REC SIGNAL is found in
the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
z The menu and thumbnail operations are restricted as
follows when combining to the clip. Press and hold the
STOP button for about 2 seconds to stop combining to the
clip when switching to this mode.
Š The following menu items cannot be changed.
SYSTEM MODE, REC SIGNAL, REC FORMAT,
CAMERA MODE, AUDIO SMPL RES, PC MODE,
25M REC CH SEL
Š The following Menu items, related to the reading/
writing of the SD memory card and reading of the
settings file, cannot be executed.
SD CARD READ/WRITE, LENS FILE CARD R/W,
READ USER DATA, READ FACTORY DATA,
Reading SCENE FILE, CAC FILE CARD READ
Š Selecting the OPERATION > COPY menu option of
the thumbnail menu does not work.
z The processing time to complete the recording may take a
little more time than normally to allow the clip to be
combined with subsequent recordings.
z The fade process does not work on discontinuous audio
during playback where the recordings are combined within
the clip.
z If non-linear editing software is used on clips with multiple
combined recordings, the software may not operate
normally (present as of Oct 2010).
Refer to the P2 support page from the following web site
for the most recent information on software that has been
confirmed to work with these types of clips.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Recording and Playback: ONE CLIP REC Function
43
Recording Review Function
When recording is paused, pressing the RET button
automatically locates the last two seconds of video just
recorded, and the viewfinder provides video playback.
After playback, the camera-recorder is again ready to start
recording.
The picture location/playback duration can be increased to
up to 10 seconds by continuously pressing the RET button.
For short clips, however, when the start of a clip is located,
continuously pressing the RET button does not play back
any clips before that clip.
The function of the RET button may be assigned to a
desired user button by using one of the menu options USER
MAIN SW, USER1 SW, USER2 SW, SHOT MARK (USER3)
SW or TEXT MEMO (USER4) SW. These options can be
found in the <USER SW> screen on the CAM OPERATION
page.
When recording is paused, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE
button plays back the last recorded clip, from the beginning.
This unit enters the recording standby mode after the
playback ends.
Recording pauses
Recording starts
2-10 Seconds
Recorded clip
The PLAY button plays back
the clip from the beginning.
The RET button puts
the camera-recorder
into REC REVIEW
mode.
‹Notes
z Set the menu option RET SW to “R. REVIEW”. The menu item
RET SW is found in the <SW MODE> screen on the CAM
OPERATION page.
z When the SDI OUT MODE or MONITOR OUT MODE menu
option is set to “MEM”, the image of REC REVIEW is output
not only to the viewfinder but also on the video output
connector (SDI OUT connector, MON OUT connector) during
REC REVIEW.
Note that when a backup device is connected to back up the
video the pictures for REC REVIEW are backed up. These
menu items are found in the <OUTPUT SEL> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page.
z In ONE CLIP REC mode, the furthest rewind point using REC
REVIEW and the start point for playback after pausing a
recording is not at the start of the clip, but at the start of the
most recent recording.
Recording and Playback: Recording Review Function
44
Normal and Variable Speed Playback
The PLAY/PAUSE button provides monochrome playback
through the viewfinder and color playback on the LCD
monitor. A color video monitor connected to the SDI OUT or
MON OUT connector of camera-recorder also provides color
playback.
You can also view playback with SDI from the SDI OUT
connector, but the SDI OUT MODE menu option needs to be
set to “MEM”. The menu item SDI OUT MODE is found in
the <OUTPUT SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
When playback is paused, the REW button locates the
beginning of the current clip while maintaining the pause
mode.
‹Notes
z The camera-recorder cannot play back clips where the
SYSTEM MODE differs. If this is the case, set the SYSTEM
MODE of camera-recorder to the format of the desired clip
before playing it back.
z When a P2 card has been just removed or inserted, or when
the power has been just turned on for playback, it may take
some time for camera-recorder to read clip information. If
this is the case, the viewfinder displays “UPDATING”. If data
is played back when the P2 card is being recognized, the
message “CANNOT PLAY” will be displayed.
Variable speed playback
z If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played
back, the clips on the inserted P2 card will not be played
back. A P2 card inserted during playback will be recognised
after playback ends.
The FF and REW buttons provide 32a and 4a fast
playbacks and fast reverse playbacks.
When playback is paused, the FF button locates the
beginning of the next clip while maintaining the pause mode.
Text Memo Function
Text memos are time-coded thumbnails added to any video
point when a clip is being recorded or played back. The Text
Memo button adds text memo information at the appropriate
point. You can edit added text memos using the P2 viewer.
Through a thumbnail display, you can choose and play back
the text memo point or copy any portion.
‹Notes
z One clip can have up to 100 text memos.
z Text memos can also be recorded when the LCD monitor is
in thumbnail mode. In this case, the text memo is added to
the position on the clip where the cursor is set (normally at
the beginning) only.
z For a clip with voice memos added through the AJ-SPX800
or any other camera-recorder, you can record up to 100 text
and voice memos in combination. For information about
voice memos, see the instruction manual for the AJ-SPX800.
z Text memos cannot be recorded when the color bar is output
or the unit is in LOOP REC mode and INTERVAL REC mode.
> [Text Memo] (page 124)
TEXT MEMO button
Recording and Playback: Normal and Variable Speed Playback
45
Shot Mark Function
A shot mark is added to the thumbnail of a clip to distinguish
Shot marks may also be added or erased using clip
that clip from others. With the LCD monitor, only clips that
have shot marks can be viewed and/or played back.
thumbnails.
> [Shot Mark] (page 123)
‹Notes
Adding Shot Marks
z When the color bar is output or the unit is in LOOP REC
mode and INTERVAL REC mode, it is impossible to add/
delete shot marks.
z It is impossible to add shot marks to incomplete clips (refer
page 120).
z For clips recorded on plural P2 cards or clips split on a P2
card (refer to Note on page 11), a shot mark is added to the
top clip only.
To add a shot mark during recording, press the SHOT MARK
button. The viewfinder displays “MARK ON” and adds a shot
mark to the thumbnail of the appropriate clip. Another press
of the button erases the shot mark.
When the SHOT MARK button is pressed during a recording
pause, a shot mark is attached to the clip recorded
immediately before. The shot mark can be deleted with
another press.
SHOTMARKER
button
Recording Setting and Operation Mode
AJ-HPX3100 recording mode works according to the priorities outlined in the following table, relative to the setting of the
menus and switches.
Menu switches related to system/recording
Limitations on various functions
Functional
operation
mode
INTERVAL
LOOP REC
MODE
ONE CLIP
REC FORMAT PRE Recording a
REC SIGNAL
Shot Mark
REC MODE
REC MODE CAMERA MODE RECORDING Text Memo
Disabled
SDI input
record
(recording
mode is 60i or
50i)
SDI
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
INTERVAL
REC
ON or
ONE SHOT
Only 60i, 50i,
30P
(Over60i),
25P(Over50i)
are available
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
LOOP REC
OFF
CAM
ONE CLIP
REC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Enabled*
Enabled*
Enabled*
Enabled*
All modes are
available (no
limitations)
Enabled
1s - 8s/15s
Normal
Recording
OFF
*
Disabled for color bars
Recording and Playback: Shot Mark Function
46
Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Multi Format
Video system and Recording format
The unit uses an interlace/progressive scan (reading all pixels) switchable type CCD.
With combinations of the SYSTEM MODE and CAMERA MODE menu options, you can select a video system from among 12
types including HD (1080i) and SD. When selecting “SDI” on the REC SIGNAL menu option, you can record external signals
input from the SDI IN connector.
These menu items are found in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Selecting a recording signal and method
SYSTEM MODE menu option
REC FORMAT menu option
Allows you to select a combination of system frequency
(59.94 Hz or 50 Hz) and signaling system (1080i, 480i,
or 576i). When a change has been made to the
SYSTEM MODE option, the viewfinder indicates “TURN
POWER OFF.” Then, turn the POWER switch of the
camera-recorder off and wait five seconds or longer
before turning the camera-recorder on again.
Used to select the recording mode. The menu item REC
FORMAT is found in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on
the SYSTEM SETTING page.
For HD mode (1080i)
AVC-I 100
The AVC-Intra100 format is used to record
video. The native recording format applies to
the 30PN, 24PN and 25PN modes.
AVC-I 50
The AVC-Intra50 format is used to record
video. The native recording is applied to the
30PN, 24PN and 25PN modes.
DVCPRO HD
REC SIGNAL menu option
CAM
Signals from the camera are recorded. The
CAMERA MODE option allows you to select a
camera operation mode (frame mode).
Signals from the SDI IN connector are
recorded.
SDI
The DVCPRO HD format is used to record
video.
‹Note
When SDI is selected, the time code or UMID
For SD mode (480i, 576i)
DVCPRO50
superimposed on SDI input signals are not recorded.
The DVCPRO50 format (50 Mbps) is used to
record video.
CAMERA MODE menu option
Used to select a camera operation mode when the
option REC SIGNAL is set to CAM.
>[Recording formats and output connector signal
formats] (page 48).
DVCPRO
The DVCPRO format (25 Mbps) is used to
record video.
The DV format is used to record video.
DV
‹Notes
ASPECT menu option
z When the camera has been switched from 60i or 30P to
24P or 24PA, video may produce noise for a moment
because the pull-down five-frame cycle is adjusted. This
is not an abnormal condition.
Used to select the aspect ratio for the SD mode. (480i or
576i) The menu item ASPECT is found in the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
z When AVC-I 100 or AVC-I 50 is selected, the CAMERA
MODE menu option cannot be selected.
16：9
4：3
The 16:9 aspect ratio is used to record video.
The 4:3 aspect ratio is used to record video.
AUDIO SMPL RES menu option
Used to select the number of bits of audio in HD mode
(1080i). You can select the AUDIO SMPL RES menu
option from the <SYSTEM MODE> screen of the
SYSTEM SETTING page.
16BIT
24BIT
Records at 16 bits.
Records at 24 bits.
‹Note
This menu option is not displayed in the DVCPRO HD
mode, and a 16-bit recording is employed.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Multi Format
47
Recording formats and output connector signal formats
The table below shows the formats used to record signals from the CCD and externally input signals along with the formats for
signals output from the output connectors.
Menu setting
Recording and output status
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
SYSTEM REC
REC
CAMERA
MODE
item
*3
Recording
Video
1080-59.94i
*4
*5
HD SDI (1080)
SD SDI (480i, 576i)
MODE SIGNAL FORMAT
item
item
item
Audio
Video
1080-59.94i
Audio
Video
480-59.94i
Audio
AVC-I 100/60i
AVC-I 50/60i
60i
AVC-I 100/
30PN
AVC-I 50/
30PN
1080-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
480-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
30P
1080-29.97P Native 4ch
48 kbps
4ch
48 kbps
16 bit/24 bit
4ch
48 kbps
16 bit
*1
*1
16 bit/24 bit
AVC-I 100/
24PN
AVC-I 50/
24PN
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
24PN
1080i-23.98P Native
1080-59.94i
CAM
1080-
59.94i
60i
1080-59.94i
480-59.94i
1080-29.97P
Over59.94i 2:2
1080-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
480-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
30P
4ch
4ch
4ch
48 kbps
16 bit
DVCPRO HD/
60i
48 kbps
16 bit
48 kbps
16 bit
1080-23.98P
Over59.94i 2:3
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
24P
1080-23.98P
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
24PA
4ch
4ch
4ch
SDI
All options Unrelated 1080-59.94i
48 kbps
16 bit/24 bit
1080-59.94i
1080-50i
48 kbps
16 bit/24 bit
480-59.94i
576-50i
48 kbps
16 bit
*1
*1
*1
*1
AVC-I 100/50i
AVC-I 50/50i
50i
1080-50i
4ch
48 kbps
16 bit/24 bit
4ch
48 kbps
16 bit/24 bit
4ch
48 kbps
16 bit
AVC-I 100/
25PN
AVC-I 50/
25PN
1080-25PsF
Over50i 2:2
576-25PsF
Over50i 2:2
25P
1080-25P Native
1080-50i
CAM
1080-50i
50i
1080-50i
576-50i
4ch
48 kbps
16 bit
4ch
48 kbps
16 bit
4ch
48 kbps
16 bit
DVCPRO HD/
50i
1080-25P
Over50i 2:2
1080-25PsF
Over50i 2:2
576-25PsF
Over50i 2:2
25P
4ch
1080-50i
4ch
576-50i
4ch
SDI
All options Unrelated 1080-50i
48 kbps
16 bit/24 bit
48 kbps
16 bit/24 bit
48 kbps
16 bit
*1
*1
60i
480-59.94i
480-59.94i
480-29.97P
Over59.94i 2:2
480-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
30P
DVCPRO50/
60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
4ch (2ch) *2
48 kbps
16 bit
4ch (2ch) *2
48 kbps
16 bit
CAM
-
-
480-23.98P
Over59.94i 2:3
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
24P
480-
59.94i
480-23.98P
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
24PA
4ch (2ch) *2
48 kbps
16 bit
4ch (2ch) *2
48 kbps
16 bit
SDI
All options Unrelated 480-59.94i
480-59.94i
576-50i
-
-
-
-
-
-
DVCPRO50/ 50i
50i
576-50i
4ch (2ch) *2
48 kbps
16 bit
4ch (2ch) *2
48 kbps
16 bit
CAM
SDI
576-25P
Over50i 2:2
576-25PsF
Over50i 2:2
DVCPRO/50i
DV/50i
25P
576-50i
4ch (2ch) *2
48 kbps
16 bit
4ch (2ch) *2
48 kbps
16 bit
All options Unrelated 576-50i
576-50i
*1 You can select 16 bit or 24bit in the menu item AUDIO SMPL RES when the AVC-Intra format is selected.
*2 In the menu item 25M REC CH SEL, you can select 4ch when the DVCPRO50 format is selected, and can select 4ch or
2ch when the DVCPRO or DV format is selected when the AVC-Intra format is selected.
*3 The time code, user bits, and UMID are recorded.
*4 The time code, user bits, and UMID (selectable between ON and OFF) are output.
*5 EDH (ON/OFF enabled), UMID (ON/OFF enabled) are output. Time code, user bits are not output.
‹Notes
z UMID is not output for recording or playing back in DV format.
z During playback, the formats for clips in the same system mode are switched automatically and played back.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Multi Format
48
Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
To record high-quality video with the unit, the black and white balances must be adjusted according to conditions.
For higher quality, it is recommended that the adjustments should be made in this order AWB (white balance adjustment) >
ABB (black balance adjustment) > AWB (white balance adjustment).
Adjusting the White Balance
Whenever light conditions change, the white balance must
be re-adjusted.
To adjust the white balance, follow the steps below.
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.
Flip up the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is
positioned at [AWB], then release it.
z The switch returns to the central position with the
white balance automatically adjusted.
1
Set the switches as illustrated below.
CC/ND FILTER control
‹Note
To cancel automatic white balance adjustment in process
(the viewfinder displays “AWB ACTIVE”), re-position the
AUTO W/B BAL switch at [AWB].
If automatic adjustment is cancelled, the value in effect
before automatic adjustment will be used.
z During an adjustment, the viewfinder displays the
following message:
AWB ACTIVE
z The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds, and
the following message will appear:
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
memory specified in Step 1 ([A] or [B]).
WHITE BAL: A or B
OUTPUT: CAM
GAIN:Under normal conditions, set to 0 dB
If it is too dark, an appropriate gain
should be set.
AUTO W/B BAL switch:
Used to perform AWB.
AWB A OK 3.2K
2
3
Adjust the CC/ND FILTER control according to
the light conditions.
> For examples of CC/ND FILTER adjustments, see
[Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
Section] (page 21).
z If the subject’s color temperature is lower than 2300K
or higher than 15000 K the following message
appears:
If the arrow points down (;) the actual color
temperature is lower than the temperature indicated.
If the arrow points up (:) the actual temperature is
higher than the temperature indicated.
Case 1: when lower than 2300K
Place a white pattern at a point where the light
conditions match those for the light source of
the subject.
z Then zoom-in on the white pattern so that white color
appears in the screen. A white object (cloth or wall)
may be used instead of a white pattern.
z The illustration below shows the required size for the
white space.
AWB A OK 2.3K;
Case 2: when higher than 15000K
AWB A OK 15K:
‹Notes
z Do not include a high-intensity spot in the screen.
z The white object must appear at the center of the
screen.
1/4 or more of the screen in width
1/4 or more of the
screen in height
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
49
Detection area for the white balance
Retaining white balances
The detection area for the white balance is selectable
between 90%, 50% and 25%, using the menu option AWB
AREA.
Each value in memory is retained even if the camera-
recorder is turned off; it will not be lost until the white
balance is re-adjusted. White balances are stored in either of
two systems: A or B.
The detection area is factory-set to 25%.
The menu item AWB AREA is found in the <WHITE
BALANCE MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “ON” (default),
each system stores only one value. If this is the case, the
values are not synchronised with the filters.
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “OFF”, the
adjusted value for each filter can be automatically stored in
the memory that corresponds to the position of the WHITE
BAL switch (A or B). Your unit has four built-in filters; it stores
eight (4 a 2) adjusted values.
The menu item FILTER INH is found in the <WHITE
BALANCE MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
Also, when the S. GAIN (super gain) function is operating,
the AWB switch doesn’t operate, and the message (AWB
UNABLE/S.GAIN MODE) is displayed.
90%
50%
25%
When you have no time to adjust the white
balance
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].
This adjusts the white balance for the filter according to the
position of the CC/ND FILTER control.
On settings for Auto-tracking white balance (ATW)
This unit is equipped with an auto tracking white balance
(ATW) function that automatically tracks the white balance of
images according to the lighting conditions.
You can set this ATW function to the [B] of the WHITE BAL
switch. With the AWB B menu option, select “ATW”.
You can select the AWB B menu option from the <WHITE
BALANCE MODE> screen of the CAM OPERATION page.
You can also assign the ATW function to the USER MAIN/
USER1/USER2 buttons.
When the white balance has not been
automatically adjusted
When the white balance has not been successfully adjusted,
the viewfinder displays an error message.
If one of the error messages listed below appears, take the
appropriate steps, then adjust the white balance again.
If the error message appears after repeated readjustments,
the interior of the unit must be inspected. For more
information, contact your distributor.
>[Assigning Functions to USER Buttons] (page 55)
To cancel auto tracking white balance
Error message
Description
The color
temperature is too filter.
high.
Remedies
COLOR TEMP.
HIGH
Select an appropriate
Press the USER button assigned to ATW again, or change
the WHITE BAL switch. However, when ATW has been set
to the [B] of the WHITE BAL switch, it cannot be cancelled
with the USER button.
COLOR TEMP.
LOW
The color
temperature is too filter.
low.
Select an appropriate
# < WHITE BALANCE MODE >
LOW LIGHT
There is insufficient Increase the light level or
FILTER INH
SHOCKLESS AWB
AWB AREA
AWB B
ATW SPEED
:ON
:NORMAL
:25%
:MEM
:NORMAL
light.
There is too much Decrease the light level
light. or gain.
The FILTER control Check the FILTER
gain.
LEVEL OVER
CHECK FILTER
TIME OVER
TEMP PRE SEL SW :3.2K/5.6K
COLOR TEMP PRE
AWB A TEMP
AWB B TEMP
:3200K
:3200K
:3200K
is displaced.
control.
AWB was not
completed within
the time allowed.
Shooting conditions may
be unstable. If flicker
occurs, press the shutter
and readjust the AWB
under stable conditions.
‹Note
This function does not provide a 100 % accurate white balance.
The tracking performance relative to changes in ambient
lighting and white balance performance have been given a
degree of latitude.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
50
Setting Color Temperature Manually
The white balance can be manually adjusted by setting the
color temperature. Manual color temperature settings can be
performed for each of the WHITE BAL switch positions:
PRST, A and B.
The color temperature is set using the menu options COLOR
TEMP PRE, AWB A TEMP, and AWB B TEMP.
These menu items are found in the <WHITE BALANCE
MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
There are two types of color temperature adjustment for
COLOR TEMP PRE: VAR or 3.2K/5.6K Switchable.
VAR:
Selectable within the range from 2300K; to
15000K:.
3.2K/5.6K:
Switchable between 3200K and 5600K.
‹Note
Even if the color temperature has been manually set, automatic
adjustment of the white balance (AWB) records the color
temperature at the time of AWB at the position where the
WHITE BAL switch was located. When the CC filter position is
switched, the value for the color temperature changes.
# < WHITE BALANCE MODE >
FILTER INH
SHOCKLESS AWB
AWB AREA
:ON
:NORMAL
:25%
AWB B
:MEM
ATW SPEED
:NORMAL
TEMP PRE SEL SW :3.2K/5.6K
COLOR TEMP PRE
AWB A TEMP
AWB B TEMP
:3200K
:2600K
:3200K
Viewfinder displays related to white balance
>[Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 75).
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
51
Adjusting the Black Balance
The black balance must be adjusted when:
z You use your unit the first time;
‹Notes
z Ensure that the lens connector is connected and the
lens iris is CLOSE.
z Your unit has not been used for some time;
z The ambient temperature has changed substantially;
z The gain switchover value has been changed; or
z S.GAIN (super gain) has been set with the USER MAIN/
USER1/USER2 button.
z During a black balance adjustment, light is
automatically cut off.
z During a black balance adjustment, the gain switchover
circuit is automatically switched.
The viewfinder screen may flicker and/or display noise;
this is not a failure.
z If you find the black shading annoying after performing
an auto black balance adjustment, adjust the black
shading. To do so, go to the menu option DETECTION
(DIG), move the cursor (>), then press the JOG dial
button. The menu item DETECTION (DIG) is found in the
<BLACK SHADING> screen on the MAINTENANCE
page.
z When you are changing the assignment for DS.GAIN on
the USER SW GAIN screen of the menu
1
Set the switches as illustrated below.
When you set the SHD.ABB SW CTL menu option to
“ON” and press the AUTO W/B BAL switch for 8
seconds or longer, [B-SHD READY] is displayed in the
viewfinder and black shading can be automatically
adjusted after the automatic black balance operation.
While the black shading is being adjusted, the “B-SHD
ACTIVE” message is displayed in the viewfinder.
Ensure that the lens iris is closed completely until the
“B-SHD OK” message is displayed in the viewfinder.
The menu item SHD. ABB SW CTL is found in the <SW
MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
However, when the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G:
optional accessory) or extension control unit (AG-
EC4G: optional accessory) is connected, automatic
black shading cannot be executed even if the ABB
switch is held down.
AUTO W/B BAL switch:
Used to perform ABB.
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE
selector switch: CAM
2
Tilt the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is
positioned at [ABB], then release it.
z The switch returns to the central position with the
black balance automatically adjusted.
z During adjustment, the viewfinder displays the
following message:
z To cancel the automatic black balance adjustment in
process (the viewfinder displays “ABB ACTIVE”), flip
the AUTO W/B BAL switch down to [ABB] again.
If automatic adjustment is cancelled, the value in effect
before automatic adjustment will be used.
Retaining black balances
ABB ACTIVE
Each value in memory is retained even if the camera-
recorder is turned off.
‹Note
During adjustment, the lens iris automatically becomes
CLOSE.
z The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds and
the following message will appear:
ABB OK
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
memory.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Adjusting the White balance and Black Balance
52
Setting the Electronic Shutter
This section provides a description of the electronic shutter, together with setting and handling directions.
Shutter Modes
The table below lists the shutter modes in which the unit’s electronic shutter can be used as well as the shutter speeds which
can be selected.
To use the fixed shutter speed
To use the half shutter speed (HALF)
z For eliminating flicker due to lighting
z For shooting images when adding effects as if taken with
z For shooting fast moving subjects clearly
film
‹Notes
To use the shutter speed of SYNCHRO SCAN
z No matter in which mode the electronic shutter is used, the
higher the shutter speed, the lower the camera’s sensitivity.
z When the aperture is in the automatic mode, it will
increasingly open and the depth of focus will become
shallower as the shutter speed is increased.
z For shooting monitor screens in a way that minimizes the
pattern of horizontal lines
z For shooting images when adding effects to the subjects’
movement
CAMERA
MODE
Mode
Video system
Shutter speed
Half shutter speed
1/120
Variable range for SYNCHRO SCAN
1080-59.94i
1080-29.97P
1080-23.98P
60i
1/61.7 - 1/7200
1/30.9 - 1/3600
1/24.7 - 1/2880
1/24.7 - 1/2880
1/61.7 - 1/7200
1/100, 1/120,
1/250, 1/500,
30P
24P
1/60
1/48
1/48
1/120
1/60
1/48
1/100
1/50
1/100
HD
1/1000, 1/2000,
HALF
180deg, 172.8deg,
144.0deg, 120.0deg,
90.0deg, 45.0deg
1080-23.98PA 24PA
480-59.94i
480-29.97P
480-23.98P
1080-50i
60i
SD
HD
30P
24P
50i
1/30.9 - 1/3600
3 deg - 350 deg
1/24.7 - 1/2880
1/51.4 - 1/6000
1/25.7 - 1/3000
1/51.4 - 1/6000
(1.0 deg step)
1/60, 1/120,
1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000,
HALF
1080-25P
576-50i
25P
50i
180deg, 172.8deg,
144.0deg, 120.0deg,
90.0deg, 45.0deg
SD
576-25P
25P
1/50
1/25.7 - 1/3000
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting the Electronic Shutter
53
Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed
The shutter speed in any shutter mode is set using the
SHUTTER switch.
In SYNCHRO SCAN mode, shutter speed can be switched
easily, using the SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT switches
(+/–) on the side panel.
1
Press the SHUTTER switch, positioned at
[ON], towards [SEL].
Note that the range of selectable shutter speeds may be pre-
defined; whether or not to use the SYNCHRO SCAN mode
may be determined through the <SHUTTER SPEED> and
<SHUTTER SELECT> screens.
>[CAM OPERATION] (page 181)
The selected shutter speed is retained even if the unit is
turned off.
# < SHUTTER SPEED >
SYNCHRO SCAN :ON
POSITION1
POSITION2
POSITION3
POSITION4
POSITION5
POSITION6
:ON
:ON
:ON
:ON
:ON
:ON
SHUTTER switch
2
Once more, press the SHUTTER switch
towards [SEL]. Repeat this switchover until
the desired mode or speed appears in the
viewfinder screen.
If all modes and speeds are available, the display
changes in the following order:
# < SHUTTER SELECT >
NORMAL mode
POSITION1 SEL :1/100
POSITION2 SEL :1/120
POSITION3 SEL :1/250
POSITION4 SEL :1/500
POSITION5 SEL :1/1000
POSITION6 SEL :1/2000
POSITION1
POSITION2
POSITION3
POSITION4
POSITION5
POSITION6
SYNCHRO
SCAN mode
Viewfinder displays relating to the shutter
See [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 75).
‹Note
SHUTTER mode turns off when operating the DS.GAIN.
Placing the Camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode
Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at [ON] towards
SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons (+/–)
[SEL], to place the camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN
mode.
z In the SYNCHRO SCAN mode, it is possible to change the
shutter speed continuously by operating the SYNCHRO
SCAN (+/–) buttons.
z The shutter speed display in synchro scan mode is
switchable between second indication and angle
indication.
>[SYNCHRO SCAN DISP.] (page 177)
SHUTTER switch
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting the Electronic Shutter
54
Assigning Functions to USER Buttons
The USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW , USER2 SW, SHOT
MARK SW (USER3 SW) and TEXT MEMO SW (USER4
SW) buttons can be assigned user-selected functions.
To select desired functions, use the menu items USER MAIN
SW, USER1 SW , USER2 SW, SHOT MARK SW (USER3
SW) and TEXT MEMO SW (USER4 SW). These options can
be found in the <USER SW> screen, which is accessible
from the CAM OPERATION page.
“+3”. You can select the BLACK GAMMA
menu option from either the <LOW
SETTING> screen, the <MID SETTING>
screen, or the <HIGH SETTING> screen of
the PAINT page.
The digital zoom function is assigned.
This function zooms up the angle of view at 2/
3/4 vertical horizontal ratio.
D.ZOOM:
ATW:
The automatic tracking white balance function
is assigned.
< USER SW >
#
USER MAIN SW
USER1 SW
:SLOT SEL
:S.GAIN
ATW LOCK: When you press while the ATW function is
operating, the white balance value is set.
When you press once again the ATW function
resumes operation.
USER2 SW
:DS.GAIN
:SHOT MARK
SHOT MARK SW
(USER3 SW)
TEXT MEMO SW
(USER4 SW)
:TEXT MEMO
Y GET:
Function of indicating the brightness level of
the center marker assigned.
DRS:
The function of the dynamic range stretcher is
assigned.
This function expands dynamic range by
compressing the image level of high intensity
components and extending the image level of
low intensity components.
The compression level is variable on the
<KNEE LEVEL> screen on the PAINT page.
Selectable Functions
INH:
No function assigned.
S.GAIN:
S.GAIN function assigned. The AWB does not
function while the S.GAIN function is ON.
DS.GAIN function assigned.
DS.GAIN:
‹Notes
‹Notes
z Because the DRS function compresses the
image level of high intensity components and
extends the image level of low intensity
components, turning the DRS function ON/
OFF sometimes causes slight differences in
color.
z The DS.GAIN function only operates when
shooting in 59.94i and 50i. Also, SHUTTER
mode turns off when operating the DS.GAIN.
z Image when the DS.GAIN function is turned
ON or OFF will not be continuous.
S.IRIS:
I.OVR:
Super Iris function assigned.
This is useful for backlight compensation.
Iris Override function assigned.
zWhen the DRS function is turned on, the Knee
function and the BLACK GAMMA function are
not available.
The target (reference) value in Auto Iris mode
must be changed.
ASSIST：
The function to turn on or off the assigned
focus assist indication.
To change the target value, put the unit into
this mode and press the JOG dial button. Turn
the JOG dial button clockwise or anti-
clockwise to change the value. The iris
indication section of the viewfinder screen
displays “+”, “+ +”, “–”, or “– –”.
‹Note
When the ASSIST button is turned on, a
graph is displayed on the viewfinder and the
bottom right of the LCD monitor. Adjust the
focus ring on the lens so that the graph comes
further right.
When the desired value is displayed, stop
turning the JOG dial button. Then, press the
dial button to accept that value.
Note that once the mode is cancelled or the
power is turned off the original reference
value will be used again.
C.TEMP： The function to switch to the mode that allows
the JOG dial button to change the assigned
color temperature. It is useful for intentionally
changing the color temperature after adjusting
the white balance. To change the color
temperature, press the user button with this
assigned function, and then press the JOG
dial button. The color temperature indicated
on the viewfinder display is highlighted and
starts blinking, indicating that the color
temperature can be changed. While the
indication is blinking, the JOG dial button can
be turned to change the color temperature. At
this time, the value set for the position (PRST,
A, or B) to which the WHITE BAL switch is set
is also changed.
+:
+ +:
–:
Iris opens up by 0.5.
Iris opens up by 1.
Iris closes down by 0.5.
Iris closes down by 1.
– –:
No indication:The reference value is used.
Super Black function assigned.
This function lowers the black level to the
pedestal level or below.
S.BLK:
B.GAMMA: The BLACK GAMMA function is allocated.
This function highlights the black gradations.
Regardless of the value set in the BLACK
AUDIO CH1/3:
GAMMA item, the BLACK GAMMA is set to
The function to switch the input signal of audio
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Assigning Functions to USER Buttons
55
channel 1 or audio channel 3 (you can switch
with the VR SELECT menu option on the
<MIC/AUDIO> screen of the MAIN
<SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
SHOT MARK: Function to add a shot mark when you press,
and delete the mark when you press again is
assigned. For details on the Shot Mark
OPERATION page) is assigned.
Pressing the button switches the input signal
in the following order: FRONT > REAR >
W.L. Note that the AUDIO IN switch can also
be used to change the input signal: later
specification takes precedence.
function, see [Shot Mark Function] (page 46).
This function can only be assigned to the
SHOT MARK (USER3) button. It cannot be
assigned to other USER buttons.
AUDIO CH2/4:
TEXT MEMO: The function to record a text memo in the
frame for the point in time when you pressed
is assigned. For details on the Text Memo
function, see [Text Memo Function] (page 45).
This function can only be assigned to the
TEXT MEMO (USER4) button. It cannot be
assigned to other USER buttons.
The function to switch the input signal of audio
channel 2 or audio channel 4 (you can switch
with the VR SELECT menu option on the
<MIC/AUDIO> screen of the MAIN
OPERATION page) is assigned.
Pressing the button switches the input signal
in the following order: FRONT > REAR >
W.L. Note that the AUDIO IN switch can also
be used to change the input signal: later
specification takes precedence.
LCD B.L:
Switches the intensity of the LCD monitor
back light. Interlocks with the set value of the
BACK LIGHT menu option. You can select the
BACK LIGHT menu option from the <LCD
MONITOR> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
REC SW:
Function of the REC START/STOP button
assigned.
RET SW:
PRE REC:
Function of the RET button at the lens assigned.
PRE-RECORDING switch ON/switch OFF
function assigned.
‹Notes
z When the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G: optional) or the
extension control unit (AG-EC4G: optional) is connected,
and I.OVR and C TEMP are assigned to the USER button on
the AJ-RC10G or AG-EC4G, operation of this unit’s JOG dial
button is disabled.
z The functions below also go OFF when the power of this unit
is turned OFF.
I.OVR/S.BLK/B GAMMA/Y GET/DRS/ASSIST/C.TEMP/ATW/
ATW LOCK/D.ZOOM/S.GAIN/DS.GAIN
SLOT SEL: Function of switching the target P2 card
among multiple cards assigned.
PC MODE: The function to turn on or off the assigned
USB device or USB host mode. Switching
between the USB device and USB host
modes is set by selecting the PC MODE
SELECT menu option. The menu item
However for C.TEMP, variable color temperature will be
retained.
FRONT MIC POWER is found in the
Setting the Switchover of USER SW GAIN
AJ-HPX3100 allows three other modes to be used in
addition to the L/M/H standard gain settings: the analog
gain-up S.GAIN (super gain) mode to achieve a gain of 30
dB or more, the cumulative gain-up DS.GAIN (digital super
gain) mode which uses progressive drive.
To select these functions, perform menu operations to select
the S.GAIN item and DS.GAIN item, and preset the gain to
be used for each item. These menu items are found in the
<USER SW GAIN> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
For instance, if the S.GAIN and DS.GAIN functions have
been allocated to the USER MAIN button, USER1 button or
USER2 button, the gain can be increased by using these
buttons in combination with the USER buttons.
3) To achieve ultra-high sensitivity:
Use the S.GAIN function and DS.GAIN function in
combination. However, exercise care during operation
since image lag will become more conspicuous with
moving subjects the more the gain is increased by using
the DS.GAIN function.
When shooting moving subjects, keep the gain increase
with the DS.GAIN function to under 12 dB
:.
# < USER SW GAIN >
S.GAIN
¢
30dB
36dB
42dB
¢
¢
DS.GAIN
6dB:
10dB:
12dB:
15dB:
20dB:
24dB:
28dB:
34dB:
¢
¢
¢
¢
1) To increase the gain without increasing noise:
The DS.GAIN function is used.
2) To increase the normal analog gain:
(noise is increased)
¢
¢
¢
¢
Use the S.GAIN feature alone.
Settings Options and Usage
‹Note
S.GAIN:
An analog gain increase with an asterisk is one
that is valid. One without an asterisk is invalid.
A cumulative gain increase with an asterisk is
one that is valid. One without an asterisk is
invalid.
Note that the accuracy of AUTO IRIS, White Balance, and
Black Balance may be influenced by an increase in noise.
DS.GAIN:
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Assigning Functions to USER Buttons
56
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting
Recording Levels
AJ-HPX3100 supports independent 4-channel sound recording in any recording format.
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 / CH2/4 switches are set to [AUTO], the recording level of audio channel 1/2 (3/4 with the
menu settings) is automatically adjusted. Also you can adjust manually by setting to [MAN] and using the AUDIO LEVEL CH1/
3 / CH2/4 controls and the F.AUDIO LEVEL controls. Also from the menu you can select whether the recording level for audio
channel 3/4 (1/2 with the menu settings) is automatic adjustment or manual adjustment (performing adjustment on the set
values in the menu).
‹Notes
z With this unit you can select whether with the AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 controls the channel 1/2 audio level is adjusted, or the
channel 3/4 level is adjusted. With the factory settings, the level adjust controls are set to adjust the audio for channel 1/2.
z Even in HD mode (1080i), 4-channel sound is recoded on P2 cards.
z When SDI input signals connector are recorded, the settings above are overridden; audio signals from the SDI IN connector is
always recorded.
Selecting Audio Input Signals
The input signals to be recorded on Audio Channels 1, 2, 3,
and 4 are selected with the AUDIO IN switch.
You can check input selection status with the MODE CHECK
of the AUDIO screen.
>[Audio (input) Function Section] (page 18)
Displays whether REAR
XLR AUTO (rear XLR
Displays the system
of each input signal
connector input automatic CH1 - 4.
switching) is selected.
AUDIO IN switches
Also, when the REAR XLR AUTO CH1/2 and REAR XLR
AUTO CH3/4 menu options are set to “ON”, the selection of
input signal automatically switches to [REAR] at the point
when the XLR connector is inserted in the AUDIO IN CH1/3 /
2/4 connectors in the back. At this time, the AUDIO IN switch
for the corresponding channel is disabled.
When using the DVCPRO or DV format of SD mode (480i,
576i), the factory settings are set to not record audio
channels 3 and 4. When recording Channel 4, set the 25M
REC CH SEL menu option to “4CH”.
You can select each menu option from the <MIC/AUDIO>
screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels
57
Recording level adjustment
Audio level adjustment menu
You can select the recording level adjustment method from
among three methods, the adjustment control/adjustment
with menu options/automatic adjustment.
Select CH1/2 on the VR SELECT menu option
With the VR Select menu option, select the two channels,
CH1/2 or CH3/4, to assign to the adjustment controls. The
VR SELECT menu option can be selected from the <MIC/
AUDIO> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
The two channels which are not selected become automatic
adjustment, but it is also possible to select adjustment with
the menu option.
The factory settings assign CH1/2 to the adjustment
controls.
Selecting the level adjustment method
Select CH3/4 on the VR SELECT menu option
With the VR SELECT menu option, select either CH1/2 or
CH3/4 to assign the AUDIO LEVEL CH/1/3 / CH2/4 controls.
CH1/2: Assigns AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 controls to
channels 1/2.
AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 / CH2/4 switches are
enabled for channels 1/2.
The channels 3/4 become automatic adjustment,
but the automatic adjustment is released by setting
the AUTO LEVEL CH3 menu option and AUTO
LEVEL CH4 menu option to “OFF”, making it
possible to adjust the level with the LVL CONTROL
CH3 menu option and LVL CONTROL CH4 menu
option. You can select each menu option from the
<MIC/AUDIO> screen of the MAIN OPERATION
page.
‹Note
When the VR SELECT menu option is changed, the value of
each menu option in the menu screens above is inherited. For
example, the AUTO LEVEL CH1 menu option inherits the value
of the AUTO LEVEL CH3 and vice versa.
CH3/4: Assigns AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 controls to
channels 3/4. AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 / CH2/4
switches are enabled for the channels 3/4. The
channels 1/2 become automatic adjustment, but the
automatic adjustment is released by setting the
AUTO LEVEL CH1 menu option and AUTO LEVEL
CH2 menu option to “OFF”, making it possible to
adjust the level with the LVL CONTROL CH1 menu
option and LVL CONTROL CH2 menu option.
When the level adjustment controls are assigned
to CH1/2
Selection of level adjustment for channel 1 and 2
Level adjustment methods for channel 1 and 2 are selected
with the AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 / CH2/4 switches, either
[AUTO] (automatic adjustment) or [MAN] (manual
adjustment with the adjustment knob). When [MAN] is
selected, volume for channel 1 and 2 is controlled with the
AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 knobs.
Display
window
AUDIO LEVEL
CH1/3 / CH2/4
controls
AUDIO
SELECT CH1/3
/ CH2/4 switch
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels
58
Adjustment with AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 knobs
Adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 knobs while
looking at the audio channel level meter in the display
window, or the audio level meter display in the LCD monitor.
Also when the bar at the highest level (0dB) is passed, the
OVER display lights up to indicate that the input volume is
too great.
It is necessary to adjust such that 0 dB will not be displayed
even at the maximum.
The audio level meter displayed in the display window
OVER
SLAVE HOLD W HDVGPS
NDF
Level adjustment of channel3/4
0
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P-iREC
Automatic adjustment is enabled when the AUTO LEVEL
CH3 menu option and AUTO LEVEL CH4 menu option are
turned “ON”.
Also when these menu options are turned “OFF”, operation
of automatic adjustment stops, and audio level adjustment is
possible with the LVL CONTROL CH3 and LVL CONTROL
CH4 menu options. You can select each menu option from
the <MIC/AUDIO> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
10
h
Y
minM
s
D
frm
20
E
E
F
F
MEDIA
BATT
30
40
OO
-dB
LOOP
1
2
The audio level meter displayed inside the viewfinder
When the level adjustment knobs are assigned to
CH3/4
Selection of level adjustment for channel 3 and 4
Level adjustment method for channel 3 and 4 are selected
with the AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 / CH2/4 switches, either
[AUTO] (automatic adjustment) or [MAN] (manual
adjustment with the adjustment knob).
Adjustment with the F.AUDIO LEVEL control
When you operate this unit alone, we recommend you use
the F.AUDIO LEVEL control for adjustment of audio level.
Select the audio channel you want to adjust in advance, and
while looking at the level meter in the viewfinder screen,
adjust the F.AUDIO LEVEL control so that input does not
become too great.
When [MAN] is selected, volume for channel 3 and 4 is
controlled with the AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 controls.
Adjustment with AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 controls
In the same way as when the level adjustment knob is
assigned to CH1/2, adjustment is possible with the AUDIO
LEVEL CH1/3 / CH2/4 controls.
Furthermore, when the recording level is adjusted with the
F.AUDIO LEVEL control, whether to enable for the selected
input signal system of each channel is set with the FRONT
VR CH1 menu option and FRONT VR CH2 menu option.
You can select each menu option from the <MIC/AUDIO>
screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
Level adjustment of channel1/2
Automatic adjustment is enabled when the AUTO LEVEL
CH1 menu option and AUTO LEVEL CH2 menu option are
turned “ON”.
Also when these menu options are turned “OFF”, operation
of automatic adjustment stops, and audio level adjustment is
possible with the LVL CONTROL CH1 and LVL CONTROL
CH2 menu options. You can select each menu option from
the <MIC/AUDIO> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
FRONT VR CH1, CH2
OFF:
disabled
FRONT: enabled when FRONT is selected for input
signal
W.L.:
enabled when wireless is selected for input
signal
REAR: enabled when REAR is selected for input
signal
ALL:
enables all input systems
F.AUDIO
LEVEL control
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels
59
Selection table of adjustment methods
When selecting “CH1/2” with the VR SELECT menu option
CH1、CH2
CH3、CH4
AUTO LEVEL CH3 menu item
AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 switch
Adjustment methods
Adjustment methods
AUDIO SELECT CH2/4 switch
AUTO LEVEL CH4 menu item
MAN
Manual adjustment with
the adjustment controls
OFF
Manual adjustment with the
LVL CONTROL CH3 menu
option, LVL CONTROL CH4
menu option
AUTO
Automatic adjustment
ON
Automatic adjustment
When selecting “CH3/4” with the VR SELECT menu option
CH1、CH2
CH3、CH4
AUTO LEVEL CH1 menu item
Adjustment methods
AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 switch
AUDIO SELECT CH2/4 switch
Adjustment methods
AUTO LEVEL CH2 menu item
OFF
Manual adjustment with the
LVL CONTROL CH1 menu
option, LVL CONTROL CH2
menu option
MAN
Manual adjustment with
the adjustment controls
ON
Automatic adjustment
AUTO
Automatic adjustment
You can check selection status of the audio level adjustment
method with the MODE CHECK of the AUDIO screen.
Displays selection status
of level adjustment.
Displays whether F.AUDIO LEVEL
is enabled for each channel.
VR:
adjustment with
the adjustment
knob
OFF:
ON:
---:
the F.AUDIO LEVEL
control is disabled.
the F.AUDIO LEVEL
control is enabled.
level adjustment with the
knob is not selected.
(Automatic adjustment or
adjustment with the menu
is selected)
MENU: adjustment with
the menu
AUTO: automatic
adjustment
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels
60
Setting External Reference Signal and GENLOCK
Locking video signal to external reference signal
You can lock the video signals output from this unit to a
‹Note
reference signal provided externally.
This unit can receive external reference signals from the
following two connectors.
The sub-carrier of the composite signals of this unit is not
locked to the sub-carrier of the reference signal.
z GENLOCK IN connector (for analog signals only)
z SDI IN connector (for SDI signals only)
GENLOCKing to standard signals provided from
the SDI IN connector
Provides SDI signals matching system frame frequency to
the SDI IN connector.
GENLOCKing to standard signals provided from
the GENLOCK IN connector
To enable reference signals input to the SDI IN connector, you
need to select “SDI IN” with the GENLOCK menu option.
In addition, when “SDI” is selected with the REC SIGNAL
menu option, the reference signal input to the SDI IN
connector is synchronized regardless of the state selected
with the GENLOCK menu option. The phase of the output
signal at this time becomes the same as the reference signal
provided to the SDI IN connector.
An HD-Y signal that matches system frame frequency or a
composite signal is provided to the GENLOCK IN connector.
To enable reference signals input to the GENLOCK IN
connector, you need to select “GL IN” with the GENLOCK
menu option. Select the output signal to lock the input
reference signal with the GL PHASE menu option. (Only
when 1080-59.94i, 1080-50i)
Perform horizontal phase adjustment of the reference signal
and output signal with the H PHASE COARSE menu option
and the H PHASE FINE menu option. You can select each
menu option from the <GENLOCK> screen of the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
Perform horizontal phase adjustment of the reference signal
and output signal with the H PHASE COARSE menu option
and the H PHASE FINE menu option. You can select the
REC SIGNAL menu option from the <SYSTEM MODE>
screen of the SYSTEM SETTING page.
The following output states result from selection of external reference signals and GENLOCK setting.
Setting of
Selection of external reference signal
GENLOCK
State of output signal
(phase relation with external reference signal)
Recording
format
Input signal and
Input connector
GENLOCK *
GL PHASE *
1080i
SDI IN
HD SDI: SDI IN
connector
HD SDI
HD SDI output matches HD SDI input signal.
For the HD SDI input signal, the VBS output delays by about 90 H.
COMPOSIT
VBS output matches HD SDI input signal.
For the HD SDI input signal, the HD SDI output gains by about 90 H.
SD SDI: SDI IN
connector
HD SDI
HD SDI output is non-synchronous with HD SDI input signal.
VBS output is non-synchronous with HD SDI input signal.
COMPOSIT
GL IN
HD-Y: GENLOCK IN HD SDI
connector
HD SDI output matches HD-Y input signal.
For the HD-Y input signal, the VBS output delays by about 90 H.
COMPOSIT
VBS output matches HD-Y input signal.
For the HD-Y input signal, the HD SDI output gains by about 90 H.
VBS: GENLOCK IN HD SDI
connector
HD SDI output matches VBS input signal.
For the VBS input signal, the VBS output delays by about 90 H.
COMPOSIT
VBS output matches VBS input signal.
For the VBS input signal, the HD SDI output gains by about 90 H.
INT
-
-
-
Output is non-synchronous with input signal
480i/576i
SDI IN
SD SDI: SDI IN
connector
SD SDI output matches SD SDI input signal.
VBS output matches SD SDI input signal.
HD SDI: SDI IN
connector
-
-
-
-
SD SDI output is not locked to SD SDI input signal.
VBS output is not locked to SD SDI input signal.
GL IN
INT
VBS: GENLOCK IN
connector
SD SDI output matches SD SDI input signal.
VBS output matches SD SDI input signal.
HD-Y: GENLOCK IN
connector
SD SDI output is not locked to HD-Y input signal.
VBS output is not locked to HD-Y input signal.
-
Output is non-synchronous with input signal
*
The GENLOCK menu option and the GL PHASE menu option are selected from the <GENLOCK> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting External Reference Signal and GENLOCK
61
Setting Time Data
This unit provides time codes, user bits, and day-hour (real time) data as time data, and they are recorded in frames
synchronous with images, and are also recorded as data for clip metadata files. It also includes a CTL counter and camera ID.
Description of time data
Time code
CTL counter
The TCG switch can be used to switch between Rec run and
free run.
The CTL counter will measure total recording time after
resetting in the recording operation. On the other hand, this
value is the count time and sets the start point of a clip that
can be played back. This can be used to find the current
playback position.
Free run:
The time code always advances even when the
power is turned off. It can be handled as time. It
can be slaved to the time code input through
the TC IN connector.
Rec run:
The time code is recorded as sequential values
regenerated as the time code for a clip
recorded on a P2 card.
Camera ID
The camera ID can be set with 10 characters a3 lines,
which can be superimposed on the color bar video. It can be
also superimposed along with date and time data.
User bits
The following two types of user bits are built in.
LTC UB: recorded as LTC, and output from the TC OUT
connector. Also, output as LTC of HD SDI
signals.
VITC UB
:
recorded as VITC (with DVCPRO, recorded in
the VIDEO AUX zone). Also, output as VITC of
HD SDI signals.
You can select and record each respective user set values,
time, year month day, with the same value as time codes,
camera photo frame rate information, input value of external
signals from the TC IN connector.
‹Notes
z Only one type of user set value can be recorded.
z For recoding 24P/24PA in 1080i or 480i mode, VITC UB is
fixed to frame rate information.
z In Native mode, VITC UB is fixed to frame rate information.
Date and time (real time)
The built-in clock maintains the date and time. When the
GPS unit AJ-GPS910G is installed, the built-in clock is
corrected with accurate date and time information from the
GPS. This clock is used to store the date and time while the
power is turned off and as the time for the user bits and date
data, as well as the reference for file generation times during
clip recording, which determine the sorting order of
thumbnails and the order of playback. It is also used to
generate clip metadata and UMIDs (Unique Material
Identifiers).
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
62
Recording time code and user bits
The number of frames for TC varies with the settings for the input signal, system mode, and camera mode as follows.
No. of frames
Recording
frame
No. of frames No. of frames
REC
SIGNAL
SYSTEM
MODE
of TC during
recording and
presetting
LTC
VITC
of the output
TC
of the
displayed TC
LTC UB
VITC UB
*8
MODE
60i,
As per the TC As per the TC
As per the
VITC UB mode
30P (Over 60i)
mode*3
mode*3
30/24
switchable
As per the UB
mode*5
Always frame
rate
information*2
24P (Over 60i)
24PA (Over 60i)
Always non-
drop frame*4
Always non-
drop frame*4
30
As per the TC As per the TC
1080-59.94i
30
30PN (Native)
30
mode*3
mode*3
Always frame
rate
Recording:
24 fixed
Playback:
30/24
As per the UB
*
7
mode*5
Always non-
drop frame*4
Always non-
drop frame*4
information*6
24PN (Native)
24
25
switchable
CAM
50i,
As per the UB As per the
25P (Over 50i)
mode*5
VITC UB mode
1080-50i
j*3
j*3
25
30
25
Always frame
rate
information*6
As per the UB
25PN (Native)
*
7
mode*5
60i
As per the TC As per the TC
mode*3
As per the
VITC UB mode
30P (Over 60i)
mode*3
30/24
switchable
As per the UB
mode*5
480-59.94i
576-50i
30
Always frame
rate
information*2
24P (Over 60i)
24PA (Over 60i)
Always non-
drop frame*4
Always non-
drop frame*4
50i,
As per the UB As per the
j*3
j*3
25
30
25
25
30
25
25
25P (Over 50i)
mode*5
VITC UB mode
1080-59.94i
480-59.94i
As per the TC As per the TC
mode*3 mode*3
30/24 switchable
25
As per the UB As per the
SDI*1
j
mode*5
VITC UB mode
1080-50i
576-50i
j*3 j*3
*1 It will not be slaved to a TC or UB value that is input in the SDI IN connector.
*2 If the option menu FRAME RATE UB is set to “MENU”, then recording is performed as per the UB or VITC UB mode. If
this is the case, however, edit tools (e.g. PC edit software) cannot record the required information. The menu item
FRAME RATE UB is found in the <OPTION> screen on the OPTION MENU page.
*3 For free run, the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector.
*4 For free run, the time code is slaved to the time code input through the TC IN connector if it is a non-drop frame.
*5 When the option UB MODE is set to EXT, then the bits are slaved to the user bits input through the TC IN connector. The
menu item UB MODE is found in the <TC/UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
*6 Regardless of the menu settings, frame rate information is always recorded. During playback, the information is output
after being converted into pull-down frame rate information.
*7 When the UB MODE is set to “FRM RATE”, the pull-down frame rate information read out from the VITC UB area is
output during playback.
*8 For details on this item, refer to [Recording formats and output connector signal formats] (page 48)
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
63
Setting of the User bits
LTC UB is selected with the UB MODE menu option, and
VITC UB is selected with the VITC UB MODE menu option.
You can select each menu option from the <TC/UB> screen
of the MAIN OPERATION page.
2
3
Position the TCG switch at [SET].
When the left digit starts blinking you can change the
value.
USER (UB MODE only)
Use CURSOR buttons to set the user bits.
The included user value is recorded. A user value is
input through the display window. The recorded user
value is retained even if the power is turned off.
>For more information about how to input a user value,
see [Inputting a user value] (page 64).
TIME
! button:Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.
" button:Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.
# button:Advances the blinking number by one digit.
$ button:Winds back the blinking number by one digit.
The time kept by the built-in clock is recorded.
DATE
The hour digits for date and time kept by the built-in
clock are recorded.
EXT (UB MODE only)
4
5
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-
RUN].
Go to the <TC/UB> screen from the MAIN
OPERATION page, and set the menu option
UB MODE to “USER”.
The user bits value input through the TC IN connector is
recorded. The included user’s value will also be this
input value.
‹Notes
TCG
z When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET],
thumbnails cannot be manipulated.
z To confirm VICT UB, press the HOLD switch to display
VTCG on the display window.
The time code value is recorded.
FRM RATE
The frame rate information for camera shooting is
recorded.
Retaining the user bits
>[Frame rate information recorded in user bits] (page
64)
The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and
retained even if the camera-recorder is turned off.
REGEN
The user bits last recorded on the current target P2 card
is read and recorded as is.
Frame rate information recorded in user bits
USER/EXT (VITC UB MODE only)
The included user’s value is recorded as the VITC UB
area. It is the same value as the user bits indicated
when the option UB MODE is set to “USER” or “EXT”.
If video information to be recorded based on the frame rate
set through the menu option CAMERA MODE is recorded in
the user bits, it can be edited with editing tools (e.g. PC
editing software). In 1080i and SD mode, the frame rate
information for the VITC UB recorded are used usually. The
menu item CAMERA MODE is found in the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Inputting a user value
HOLD switch
DISPLAY switch
Display
window
TCG
switch
CURSOR and SET buttons
1
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
64
The frame rate information of user bits in Native recording is
as follows.
Frame rate information
The frame rate and video pull-down menu are linked to the
time code and user bits as follows:
ꢀꢀ
ꢀ
!# 8
ꢀ
Media management information
REC START/STOP mark
ꢀꢀ ꢀ# !# '
ꢀ
Verification
information
for the 6 digits
to the right
Media management information
z Updated frame information/
Effective frame
Fixed value
Camera recording mode
24PN: 24C
Checking
information for the 6
digits at right.
Sequence No.
Fixed value
30PN: 308
25PN: 25A
Camera shooting mode
60i:
30P:
24P:
600
308
248
24P, 24PA: 0 to 4
In all other modes: Fixed at F
‹Note
During playback of clips recorded in Native recording frame
rate information of user bits is converted according to the
image pull down and then output.
24PA: 24C
50i:
502
25A
25P:
Example:
Recording
ꢀꢀ
Playback
ꢀ
!# 8
ꢀ
Frame rate: 24P Over 60i (2:3)
Starting field for the updated
frame
ꢀꢀ
ꢀ
!# '
ꢀ
Time code frame digit
# indicates sequence No. 0 to 4.
• • •
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Image
• • •
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Sequence No.
• • •
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information
10 10 01 01 00 10 10
• • •
01 00 10 10 01 01 00
Frame rate: 24PA Over 60i (2:3:3:2)
Time code frame digit
• • •
00 01 02 03 04 05 06
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Image
• • •
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De
Sequence No.
• • •
• • •
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information
10 10 01 00 10 10 10
00 10 10 10 01 00 10
Frame rate: 30P Over 60i (2:2)
25P Over 50i (2:2)
Time code frame digit
• • •
00 01 02
Image
• • •
Ao Ae Bo Be Co Ce
Updated frame information
• • •
10 10 10
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
65
Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time
Time
difference
Time
difference
Area
Area
1
2
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].
00:00 Greenwich
+ 00:30
–12:00 Kwajalein
–11:30
–11:00 Midway Island
Press the HOLD button to display a date in the
display window.
+ 01:00 Central Europe
+ 01:30
3
4
Position the TCG switch at [SET].
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10:30
+ 02:00 Eastern Europe
+ 02:30
10:00 Hawaii
09:30 Marquesas Islands
09:00 Alaska
08:30
Use the CURSOR and SET buttons to set the
year, month and day (Y/M/D).
Note that any later than 2037 cannot be set.
+ 03:00 Moscow
+ 03:30 Tehran
+ 04:00 Abu Dhabi
+ 04:30 Kabul
! button:Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.
" button:Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.
# button:Advances the blinking number by one digit.
$ button:Winds back the blinking number by one digit.
08:00 Los Angeles
07:30
+ 05:00 Islamabad
+ 05:30 Bombay
+ 06:00 Dacca
07:00 Denver
06:30
5
6
7
Press the HOLD button to display a time in the
display window.
06:00 Chicago
05:30
+ 06:30 Rangoon
+ 07:00 Bangkok
+ 07:30
05:00 New York
04:30
Use the CURSOR buttons to set the hour,
minute and second (h/min/s).
+ 08:00 Beijing
+ 08:30
04:00 Halifax
03:30 Newfoundland Island
03:00 Buenos Aires
02:30
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-
RUN]. The internal clock starts at the moment
the switch position is changed.
+ 09:00 Tokyo
+ 09:30 Darwin
+ 10:00 Guam
8
9
Press the HOLD button to display a time zone
(time difference between local time and
Greenwich Mean Time) in the display window.
02:00 Mid-Atlantic
01:30
+ 10:30 Lord Howe Island
+ 11:00 Solomon Islands
+ 11:30 Norfolk Island
+ 12:00 New Zealand
+ 12:45 Chatham Islands
+ 13:00
01:00 Azores Islands
00:30
Position the TCG switch at [SET].
10 Use the # and $ buttons to set the desired
hours and minutes ahead of (no sign) or
behind (– sign) the Greenwich Mean Time.
‹Notes
Example: If the local time is five hours behind
Greenwich Mean Time (New York),
set the time zone to “05:00 –”.
z In Step 4, if the TCG switch is positioned at [F-RUN] or [R-
RUN], this also activate the internal clock.
To cancel date, time and time zone settings in process, hold
down the SET button and position the TCG switch at [F-RUN]
or [R-RUN].
z Clock accuracy fluctuates between about ± 30 seconds per
month when the power is turned off. If more accurate
timekeeping is required, check the time when the power is
turned on and, if necessary, reset the clock.
The time zone is always recorded, together with the
date and time, as metadata.
See the table at right to set the time zone according to
your local time.
When the GPS unit AJ-GPS910G is installed, and if it
successfully receives time information, the internal clock
keeps accurate (local) time based on the received time
(Greenwich Mean Time) and the time zone. If the date and
time differ from the actual local time, the time zone may not
be set correctly. Check again, to see if the time zone is set
correctly. (The date and time need not be set again.)
z The built-in clock operates for several years on a lithium
battery built into the camera-recorder. When the lithium
battery is exhausted, the viewfinder indicates the message
“BACKUP BATT EMPTY” when the power is turned on.
>[Maintenance] (page 148)
11 Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN]
to accept the time zone.
‹Notes
z When using the camera-recorder for the first time, be
sure to perform this setting beforehand. Do not
change the setting during use of the camera-
recorder.
z When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET],
thumbnails cannot be manipulated.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
66
Setting the Time Code
Regeneration function using REC REVIEW
1
2
3
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].
Position the TCG switch at [SET].
If the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to PRESET, if the
time code has been set or reset, or if the time code has been
switched from free run to Rec run, it is possible to
regenerate the time code as the last time code of a clip
recorded on the P2 card.
Set the menu option TC MODE to “DF” or
“NDF”.
This action requires you to preset the RET SW menu option
to “R. REVIEW” and the REC REVIEW REGEN menu option
to “ON”. The menu item RET SW is found in the <SW
MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page, and the
menu item REC REVIEW REGEN is found in the <TC/UB>
screen on the MAIN OPERATIONpage.
“DF” steps the time code in drop frame mode, and
“NDF” steps it in non-drop frame mode. However, the
camera always operates in “NDF” for 24P, 24PA and
24PN (Native) modes. The menu item TC MODE is
found in the <TC/UB> screen on the MAIN
OPERATION page.
‹Note
1
Make sure the P2 card to record the data.
To regenerate the time code of the last recorded clip
when more than one P2 card is inserted, press the
Thumbnail button to open the thumbnail screen.
Switching between DF and NDF is operative only when
the system frequency of the camera-recorder is set to
59.94 Hz.
4
5
Use the CURSOR buttons to set the time code.
The time code setting range extends from 00:00:00:00
to 23:59:59:29 (59.94 Hz), 23:59:59:23 (24PN) or to
23:59:59:24 (50 Hz).
2
Be sure a P2 card is inserted for recording the
clip displayed at the end of the screen, and
then switch the slot with the USER button
assigned the SLOT SEL function so that data
will be recorded on the P2 card.
! button:Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.
" button:Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.
# button:Advances the blinking number by one digit.
$ button:Winds back the blinking number by one digit.
3
Press the RET button on the lens.
z The message “TC REGEN” is displayed in the
viewfinder.
z During the next recording, the time code of the last
recorded clip on the card will be regenerated.
Change the position of the TCG switch.
[F-RUN] steps the time code in free run mode, and [R-
RUN] set it in recording run mode.
‹Notes
z When a card with recorded data is changed, the time
code of the last recorded clip on the changed P2 card
will be regenerated.
‹Notes
z When the unit is in the 24P or 24PA mode, time code
settings are adjusted to the five-frame unit. For 24PN
(Native) mode, it is adjusted for counting by the four-
frame unit. The time code cannot be set when recording
in the 24P, 24PA, and 24PN (Native) formats.
z When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET],
thumbnails cannot be manipulated.
z This function is disabled during recording or free-run.
Time code function during battery replacement
Even during battery replacement, the backup mechanism
functions, allowing the camera-recorder to operate
continuously.
Regeneration of Time Code
If SYSTEM MODE is changed, a free-run time code may
shift. After turning on the power again, confirm the time code
and reset if necessary.
When the TGC switch is positioned to R-RUN, the time code
recorded on the last frame of the last recorded clip (with the
latest recording date) on the P2 card is read, and this time
code can be used again.
‹Note
When the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to REGEN and
a P2 card is removed or inserted or the target recording card
is changed with the USER button for the SLOT SEL function,
the same time code is added to the last recorded clip on the
target P2 card. When there is no recorded clip, the time code
is recorded on the new recording target P2 card, from the
value generated by the TC generator built into the camera-
recorder. The menu item FIRST TC REC is found in the
<TC/UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
When the POWER switch has been switched ON # OFF #
ON, the backup accuracy of the time code in free run mode
is about ±2 frames.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
67
Externally Locking the Time Code
The unit’s internal time code generator can be locked to an
external generator. In addition, the external time code
generator can be locked to the unit’s internal generator.
In the unit, there is a video signal delay in the camera, which
is required or the process of converting video images taken
with the image-shooting element from the progressive
signals to the interlace signals. Since time is required for
making the 2:3 pull-down from the 24P frame, there is a
video signal delay in the camera. When recording from a
device that can record images without a delay and the unit is
connected in parallel, it is necessary to synchronize the time
code. To set this timing, set it in the TC VIDEO SYNCHRO
item. The menu item TC VIDEO SYNCHRO is found in the
<TC UB> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
Example of connections for external locking
As the figure shows, connect both the reference video signal
and reference time code.
For more information about the reference video signal and
GENLOCK, see [Setting External Reference Signal and
GENLOCK] (page 61).
Set by referring to the connection example.
Example 1: When locking onto an external signal
Setting of the TC VIDEO SYNCHRO item
Variable
range
Reference time
code
Item
Remarks
TC VIDEO
SYNCHRO
0
1
2
3
For setting to correct the time code
according to the delay of video signals.
0: Do not correct.
1: To delay the time code to be input
according to the timing of the
video images.
TC IN
2: To forward the time code to be
output according to the timing of
the video images.
GENLOCK IN
3: To delay the time code to be input
and forward the time code to be
output, respectively, according to
the timing of the video images.
SDI IN
Reference video
signal
‹Note
This setting is enabled during progressive shooting (when
CAMERA MODE is 24P, 30P, 25P), and when the Scan Reverse
function is operating. This setting is unnecessary during
normal recording (when CAMERA MODE is 60i, 50i).
Example 2: When connecting a multiple number of units
and using one of them as the reference unit
Reference video signal
TC OUT
Reference unit
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
or
SDI IN
Reference video signal
TC OUT
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
or
SDI IN
Reference video signal
TC OUT
To the next camera
‹Note
If you make a system with more than one unit, use the same
settings for all cameras for input and output. When different
settings are mixed, the image timing will not match.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
68
Example 4:
When the unit and an external device are locked to the
Example 3:
When the unit and an external device are locked to the
external time code generator and when several units of
the camera are connected in a cascade configuration.
external time code generator, which is connected
externally, and when simultaneous recording is made by
using the TC OUT output signals.
Reference video signal
Reference video signal
External time code generator
TCG
External time code generator
TCG
TC OUT
TC OUT
Device that records images without a delay
Device that records images without a
delay
TC IN
DAT
TC IN
DAT
1st unit
AJ-HPX3100
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
AJ-HPX3100
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 1
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
TC IN
or
SDI IN
GENLOCK IN
or
SDI IN
TC OUT
2nd unit and later
AJ-HPX3100
TC OUT
TC IN
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
MON OUT
SDI OUT
VTR etc.
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
or
SDI IN
VIDEO IN
SDI IN
HD SDI IN
TC OUT
AJ-HPX3100
REF IN
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
or
SDI IN
TC OUT
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
69
Example 5:
When an external device is locked to the time code
Example 6:
When an external device is locked to the time code
generator of the unit.
generator of camera-recorder, which is connected in a
cascade configuration.
Reference video signal
Reference video signal
To be connected if necessary
To be connected if necessary
TCG
TC OUT
TCG
TC OUT
AJ-HPX3100
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
1st unit
AJ-HPX3100
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
TC IN
item: 3
GENLOCK IN
TC IN
or
GENLOCK IN
SDI IN
or
SDI IN
TC OUT
TC OUT
A device that synchronizes with the TC
IN input and capable to record without
delay (DAT etc.)
From the 2nd unit to the (n-1)-th unit
Settings of the TC
AJ-HPX3100
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
TC IN
DAT
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
or
SDI IN
TC OUT
n-th unit
AJ-HPX3100
Settings of the TC
VIDEO SYNCHRO
item: 3
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
or
SDI IN
TC OUT
A device that synchronizes with the TC IN
input and capable to record without delay
(such as DAT or a camera-recorder)
TC IN
DAT
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
70
To externally lock the time code
Follow the steps below.
Cautions in switching the power source from
battery to external power supply
Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply
before removing the battery pack, in order to keep the time
code generator energised. If the battery pack is removed
first, there is no guarantee that the time code will stay
externally locked.
1
2
3
4
Turn on the POWER switch.
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN].
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].
External synchronisation of the camera when the
time code is externally locked
Set the menu option GENLOCK to “GL IN” or
“SDI IN”.
This option can be found in the <GENLOCK> screen,
which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.
When the time code is externally locked, the reference video
signals input through the GENLOCK IN or SDI IN connector
gen-lock the camera.
5
Supply a phase-relationship reference time
code (that conforms to the time code
requirements) and reference video signals to
the GENLOCK IN or SDI IN connectors,
respectively.
‹Notes
z To externally lock the unit, as the master device, with more
than one unit, the mode must be the same as that of the
camera. Note that in a system using both interlaced and
progressive scanning, there may be breaks in the video and
time code.
z When this unit’s MON OUT connector and SDI OUT
connector are used as reference video signals, set the
MONITOR OUT MODE menu option or the SDI OUT MODE
menu option to “CAM”. These menu items are found in the
<OUTPUT SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Now the built-in time code generator is locked with the
reference time code.
From about 10 seconds after locking the time code
generator stays locked even if the supply of external
reference time code is discontinued.
Superimpose of time codes
‹Notes
To display the time code in the viewfinder or the LCD monitor
when recording or during playback, set TC in <VF
INDICATOR3/3> to “TCG”, “TCR”, or “TCG/TCR”.
To display these time code displays in MONITOR OUT and
SDI OUT output, set the MON OUT CHARACTER switch on
the side panel to [ON], set the MONI OUT CHARA menu
option to “ON”, and set the SDI OUT CHARACTER switch to
[ON]. You can select the MONI OUT CHARA menu option
from the <OUTPUT SEL> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
z When the time code generator is externally locked, the time
code instantly becomes locked with the external time code,
and the counter displays the external time code value. Do
not put the unit in recording mode before the sync generator
stabilises. Additionally, time codes lock on TC IN connector
signals. Time codes of HD SDI signals input from the SDI IN
connector are not locked.
z Be sure to enter the non-drop-frame time code to externally
lock the time code in the 24P, 24PA or 24PN (Native) mode.
Externally locking the drop-frame time code is not permitted.
Video quality may be degraded momentarily while externally
locking to adjust the 5-frame cycle. This is not abnormal.
z While recording data in the 24P, 24PA, or Native modes, it is
impossible to lock the time code externally. Lock it before
recording.
Additionally, to display time codes while displaying the color
bar, set the TC ON COLOR BAR menu option to “ON”. You
can select the TC ON COLOR BAR menu option from the
<VF INDICATOR> screen of the VF page.
When the unit PRE REC MODE is set to [ON] in these modes,
corrupt images or stopped time codes may be recorded if the
time code is switched from REC RUN to FREE RUN
immediately before recording or when using slave lock.
Setting the user bits when the time code is
externally locked
When the TCG switch is positioned to F-RUN, only the time
code is locked to an external time code. To lock the user bits
to an externally input value, the UB MODE and VITC UB
MODE menu options must be set to “EXT” and “USER/
EXIT”, respectively.
These menu items are found in the <TC/UB> screen on the
MAIN OPERATION page.
To unlock the externally locked time code
Discontinue external time code supply, then position the
TCG switch at [R-RUN].
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
71
Providing an ID to the Camera
The camera ID is specified through the <CAMERA ID>
screen. The ID can include up to 10 alphanumeric
characters, symbols, and/or spaces.
‹Notes
z When the menu option CAMERA ID is set to “BAR”, the
camera ID is recorded together with color bar signals.
The menu item CAMERA ID is found in the <VF
INDICATOR> screen on the VF page.
‹Note
When the settings menu is displayed, outputting color bar
signals does not indicate the camera ID.
z The ID POSITION menu option can be used to select a
position where the camera ID is superimposed on the
color bar. The menu item ID POSITION is found in the
<VF INDICATOR> screen on the VF page.
z When the TIME/DATE menu option is set to ON, the
camera ID along with the data and time information are
superimposed on the color bar. The menu item TIME/
DATE is found in the <VF INDICATOR> screen on the VF
page.
z When the TC ON COLOR BAR is turned ON, the time
code is displayed when the color bar is output, but the
time code is not recorded. The menu item TC ON
COLOR BAR is found in the <VF INDICATOR> screen on
the VF page.
1
Go to the <CAMERA ID> screen from the CAM
OPERATION page and turn the JOG dial
button to move the cursor to options [ID1:] -
[ID3:].
# < CAMERA ID >
ID1 : ABCDEFGHIJ
ID2 : ABCDEFGHIJ
ID3 : ABCDEFGHIJ
2
3
Press the JOG dial button.
The cursor moves to the ID entry area, allowing you to
enter an ID.
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired
character appears.
The characters that appear are switched in the
following order:
Space:
†
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z
Ð
Numerals:
Ð
0 to 9
Symbols:
', >, <, /, -
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired
character.
Turn the JOG dial button to move cursor to the
next digit (clockwise), and repeat Steps 3 - 4 to
set characters.
z To change an input character, turn the JOG dial
button to move the arrow (cursor) to the appropriate
character and carry out steps 3 and 4.
z When all the characters are set, turn the JOG dial
button to move the cursor to [:].
z Pressing the JOG dial button brings the cursor back
to the options [ID1:] - [ID3:].
6
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
72
Setting UMID Information
The unit supports UMID (Unique Material Identifier)
metadata. You need to specify as UMID information the
country where you live (using up to three characters),
organisation or company (up to four characters) and user
name (up to four characters). For the country name, you
must use abbreviations prescribed in the ISO3166 Country
6
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
*1
Code .
Here are some examples of the correct method for
specifying a user name:
*1 Examples: China
U.S.A.
CHN
USA
Canada CAN
Japan
JPN
< UMID SET/INFO >
--OWNER--
COUNTRY
ORGANIZATION :****
USER :****
:***
#
**DEVICE NODE**
1
Go to the <UMID SET/ INFO> screen from the
MAIN OPERATION page and turn the JOG dial
button to move the cursor to the option
[USER].
2
3
Press the JOG dial button.
The cursor moves to the user entry area, allowing you
to enter a user name.
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired
character appears.
The characters appear in the following order:
Space:
†
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z
Ð
Numerals:
Ð
0 to 9
Symbols:
', >, <, /, -
‹ Note
The COUNTRY entry can only include alphabetical
characters and spaces.
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired
character.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the next digit (clockwise), and repeat Steps 3
to 4 to set characters.
z To change an input character, go back to step 2.
z When the last character is set, press the JOG dial
button to bring the cursor back to the option [USER].
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
73
CTL Count Setting and Display
By setting the DISPLAY switch to “CTL”, CTL count is
displayed on the time count indication of the LCD display
window.
The CTL count is displayed in ±12 hours with non-drop-
frame.
The playback order of clips recorded on a P2 card is not
linear as for VTRs. It is organized according to thumbnail
operations or exchanging P2 cards, and the priority of
recorded clips will be altered. Therefore, different CTL
counts are displayed for recording mode and playback
mode, respectively.
The playback order of clips is altered when either of the
following occurs:
z Clips are deleted, copied or restored, or the P2 card is
formatted.
z The thumbnail display is switched (for more information,
see [Switching the Thumbnail Display] (page 122)).
z A P2 card is inserted or removed.
The reference value (value of the first frame of the first clip)
is changed when either of the following occurs:
z The power is turned on, the first frame becomes 0.
z When the playback CTL count is reset, the current
playback position is set as 0, and the previous reference
value becomes a negative value.
CTL count for recording mode (recording CTL)
Recording CTL count is displayed during recording mode
(REC, REC/PAUSE, STOP and REC REVIEW), and the
count continues from the end point of the previous
recording. Recording CTL count is retained even if the
power is turned off. When the power is next turned on, the
count continues from the previous value.
Example:
First frame
Current value
Clip 3
Clip 2
00:02:00:00
Clip 1
00:00:00:00
00:01:00:00
00:03:00:00
Reset
First frame
‹ Notes
z If the RESET button is pressed while the recording CTL
count is being displayed, only the recording CTL count is
reset. Note that reset is disabled during the REC REVIEW
operation.
Clip 2
Clip 1
–00:02:00:00
Clip 3
–00:03:00:00
–00:01:00:00
00:00:00:00
z 24 frames are counted in the 24PN (Native) mode.
‹ Notes
z If the RESET button is pressed while the playback CTL
count is being displayed, only the playback CTL count is
reset.
CTL count for the playback mode
(playback CTL)
z For playback in 24PN (Native) mode, 30 frames are
counted in accordance with the pull-down images.
During playback mode (PLAY, FF, REW, PLAY/PAUSE),
playback CTL count is displayed.
Whenever the playback order of clips is altered (clips are
sorted by shooting dates), previous playback CTL count is
disabled. The first frame of the first clip is used as a
reference value for recalculation, and the new playback CTL
count is displayed.
Example:
First frame
Clip 1
Current value
Clip 2
00:02:00:00
Delete Clip 2.
Current value
Clip 3
00:02:00:00
Clip 3
00:00:00:00
00:01:00:00
00:03:00:00
Clip 1
00:01:00:00
00:00:00:00
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Setting Time Data
74
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
In addition to video images, the viewfinder displays lamps and text that indicate the settings and operating status of the unit,
together with messages, a center marker, a safety zone marker and the camera ID.
Lamps in the Viewfinder Screen
2. Abnormal Operating Status Warning Lamp
1
This lamp comes on when the unit is in any of the
abnormal operating statuses specified through the
menu sub-option !LED.
>For statuses that activate the lamp, see the options in
the <!LED> screen in [!LED] (page 180).
3. BATT (battery) Lamp
This lamp starts blinking a few minutes before the
battery charge starts to run out, and stays illuminated
after the battery is completely flat. The battery should be
replaced before it is nearly flat, so that operation will not
be interrupted.
>[Warning System] (page 153)
2
4
The above viewfinder is the AJ-HVF21KG (for further
information on your optional viewfinder model, see the relevant
instruction manual).
4. SAVE Lamp
In the normal setting:
The lamp stays OFF.
1. TALLY/REC (recording) Lamp
This lamp stays illuminated during recording, and starts
blinking if any abnormal action occurs.
>[Warning System] (page 153)
When the menu option SAVE LED is set to “P2
CARD”:
The lamp starts blinking when the P2 card remaining
free space is getting low.
The menu item SAVE LED is found in the <VF
INDICATOR> screen on the VF page.
>[Warning System] (page 153)
Mode Check Screen Displays (MODE CHK function)
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to check
the settings and status of the unit.
When you pull the MARKER SEL or MODE CHK/MENU
CANCEL switch of this unit toward you, 6 screen displays
switch.
# < MODE CHECK IND >
STATUS
! LED
FUNCTION
AUDIO
CAC
:ON
:ON
:ON
:ON
:ON
USER SW STATUS :ON
P.ON IND :ON
STATUS screen > !LED screen > FUNCTION screen >
AUDIO screen > CAC screen > USER SW STATUS
screen > No indication
Each screen is displayed for about five seconds. When you
pull the MARKER SEL or MODE CHK/MENU CANCEL
switch toward you while displaying a screen, it moves to the
next screen.
Whether or not to display each screen is specified through
the <MODE CHECK IND> screen, which is accessible from
the VF page.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
75
Selecting Viewfinder Display Information
To select the information items you want to have displayed in
the viewfinder screen, go to the <VF INDICATOR> screens
from the VF page, and turn on or off the appropriate options,
or specify desired values.
#
:< VF INDICATOR2/3 >
COLOR TEMP
:ON
CAC
GAMMA MODE
:OFF
:ON
DRS
:ON
>For directions on setting the options, see [Setting Menu
Options] (page 160).
;
#
< VF INDICATOR1/3 >
EXTENDER
SHUTTER
FILTER
WHITE
:ON
:ON
:ON
:ON
GAIN
:ON
IRIS
CAMERA ID
:S+IRIS
:BAR
#
:< VF INDICATOR3/3 >
ID POSITION :UPPER L
P2CARD REMAIN
BATTERY
AUDIO LVL
TC ON COLOR BAR
TC
SYSTEM INFO
SAVE LED
REC STATUS
P-REC/i-REC
:TOTAL
:ON
:ON
:OFF
:OFF
:NORMAL
:OFF
:OFF
:ON
DATE/TIME
ZOOM LVL
:OFF
:ON
SYSTEM MODE :ON
REC FORMAT :ON
CAMERA MODE :ON
;
Viewfinder Status Indication Layout
The indications are arranged as illustrated below.
4
3
6
5
7
9
8
2
1
15
10
33
13
14
32
11
12
34
16
17
18
31
30
29
28
m
d
B
23
19
21
24 26 27
25
22
20
For more information, see the following pages:
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
76
Information Item
1. System mode
Indication
Status
This indicates the mode that the unit operates in.
1080-59.94 interlace mode
1080-50 interlace mode
1080-59.9i
1080-50i
480-59.9i
576-50i
480-59.94 interlace mode
576-50 interlace mode
2. Camera mode
This indicates the video system when signals output from CCD are recorded
on a P2 card or output as video signals.
1080-59.94i or 480-59.94i
60i
30P
24P
24PA
50i
1080-29.97P or 480-29.97P
1080-23.98P or 480-23.98P (2-3 Pull-down)
1080-23.98P or 480-23.98P (2-3-3-2 Pull-down)
1080-50i or 576-50i
25P
1080-25P or 576-25P
‹Note
In AVC-Intra format, it becomes Native recording for 30P, 24P, and 25P.
3. REC FORMAT
This indicates the recording mode.
AVC-I 100
AVC-I 50
DVCPRO HD
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
4. Shutter speed/mode 11/¢¢.¢/1¢¢¢.¢d
1/60 (1/100) - 1/2000, HALF,
¢¢¢.¢d
This indicates that the shutter speed is set to SYNCHRO SCAN.
This indicates that a fixed shutter speed has been set.
5. P2 card remaining
free space
¢¢¢min
The indication “¢¢¢min” stays illuminated under normal conditions or blinks
when the remaining level is near zero.
END
WP
When the card space is used up, “END” blinks.
The P2 card is write-protected.
LOOP
The camera-recorder is in LOOP REC mode. When loop recording cannot be
performed, for example because the P2 card has no free space, the indication
blinks.
INFO P2
P2 card being recognised.
¢/¢
Total free space/capacities of the P2 cards (when MODE CHECK is being
performed).
‹Note
When the menu item P2 CARD REMAIN is set to “ONE CARD”, the number of
the P2 card slot that contains the target card is indicated, together with the
remaining space. The menu item P2 CARD REMAIN is found in the <VF
INDICATOR> screen on the VF page.
> [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity Indication] (page 83).
6. P2 card remaining
free space
¢¢¢min
The number of the P2 card slot that contains the target card and the remaining
free space (when MODE CHECK is being performed) are indicated. This item
displays the estimated recording time (Refer to [Loop Recording] (page 39))
when in LOOP REC mode. This indication also appears when the target P2
card has been switched with a user button.
[1]
(MODE CHECK)
7. Camera-recorderREC REC
This is displayed when the menu item REC TALLY of the is set to “CHAR”.
The menu item REC TALLY is found in the <OPTION MODE> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page.
indication
This is displayed when the menu item REC STATUS is set to “ON”. The
menu item REC TALLY is found in the <VF INDICATOR> screen on the VF
page.
8. Battery type
(MODE CHECK)
DIONIC90 - AC ADPT
Battery type, selected through a menu option. “AC ADPT” indicates when an
external DC power supply has been input.
Battery remaining level in tenths of a volt
9. Battery remaining
level/voltage
¢¢.¢V
¢¢¢%
EMP
The remaining battery level is indicated in percentage.
This indicates that the battery level is empty.
This indicates the battery is fully charged.
X
MA
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
77
Information Item
Indication
Status
10. GAIN switch
assignment
LOW/MID/HIGH
Value set for the master gain
Example: LOW: 0
–6 to 30
information (during
MODE CHECK)
S.GAIN
DS.GAIN
30/36/42
Gain value to which S.GAIN and DS.GAIN are assigned
These are displayed only during MODE CHCK.
6:/10:/12:/
15:/20:/24:/
28:/34:
11. Camera Warning and AWB A ACTIVE
Report Area AWB B ACTIVE
(related to AWB, ABB AWB A OK ¢.¢K
AWB being performed on Ch A.
AWB being performed on Ch B.
AWB successful on Ch A.
AWB B OK ¢.¢K
AWB BREAK ¢.¢K
AWB NG
COLOR TEMP LOW
COLOR TEMP HIGH
LEVEL OVER
AWB successful on Ch B.
AWB action aborted by user.
AWB action failed. The second line indicates the status.
Color temperature too low.
Color temperature too high.
and switch settings)
Brightness too high.
LOW LIGHT
Brightness too low.
TIME OVER
Action timed-out.
ATW MODE
This is indicated when AWB cannot be executed since ATW is being
operated.
AWB PRESET ¢.¢K
AWB UNABLE
S.GAIN MODE
AWB cannot operate because the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
AWB cannot operate. The status is displayed on the second line.
Super gain is operating.
CHECK FILTER
Recheck the location of the filter switching tab when turning the power on and
operating AWB.
ABB ACTIVE
ABB OK
ABB being performed.
ABB action successful.
ABB BREAK
ABB NG
ABB action aborted by user.
ABB action failed.
B-SHD READY
Black shading accepted (by holding down the AUTO W/B BAL switch during
ABB adjustment).
B-SHD ACTIVE
B-SHD OK
B-SHD BREAK
B-SHD NG
Black shading being adjusted.
Black shading adjustment successful.
Black shading adjustment aborted by user.
Black shading adjustment failed.
The WHITE BAL switch has been switched. # is replaced with A, B or PRST.
The set color temperature.
(Switch changeover
indication)
WHITE: #
¢.¢K
ATW is set.
ATW MODE
AUTO KNEE: ON/OFF
Displayed when the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch is assigned to ON or OFF
and the AUTO KNEE switch is turned ON/OFF.
Displayed when the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch is assigned to DRS and
the AUTO KNEE switch is turned ON/OFF.
DRS: ON/OFF
dB+¢¢:
Gain has been switched with the GAIN selector switch or a user button. When
DS GAIN is operating, the value is also displayed.
GAIN:¢¢
SS: 1/¢¢¢¢ or ¢¢¢.¢deg
When the shutter speed has been switched, the shutter speed is indicated.
SS: 1 1/¢¢¢¢ or 1¢¢¢.¢d Shutter speed is in SYNCHRO SCAN mode.
CC: ¢¢¢¢ ¢¢K
ND: ¢
EXTENDER: ON/OFF
IRIS: ¢¢ F ¢.¢
This appears when the CC filter setting has been selected.
This appears when the ND filter setting has been selected.
Lens extender has been turned on or off.
Indicated when the iris override correction value is to be changed.
(Low light warning)
LOW LIGHT
Brightness too low.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
78
Information Item
Indication
Status
12. User button functions INH
User buttons disabled.
Selected S.GAIN
Selected DS.GAIN
UM: USER MAIN
button
S.GAIN ¢¢dB/OFF
DS.GAIN ¢¢:/OFF
S.IRIS ON/OFF
I.OVR ON/OFF
S.BLK –¢¢/OFF
Whether S.IRIS is ON or OFF.
U1: USER1 button
U2: USER2 button
U3: SHOT MARK
(USER3) button
U4: TEXT MEMO
(USER4) button
Iris override can be set (the IRIS OVERRIDE setting is ON).
Status of SUPER BLACK (ON or OFF). When it is ON, the set value is also
indicated.
Status of BLACK GAMMA (shade correction for the black level): ON or OFF
Digital zoom magnification.
Indicates whether ATW is ON or OFF.
Indicates ATW lock is ON or OFF.
Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 1 has been switched.
Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 2 has been switched.
USER button acts as REC switch.
B.GAMMA ON/OFF
D.ZOOM a2/a3/a4/OFF
ATW ON/OFF
ATW LOCK ON/OFF
AUD CH1/3
AUD CH2/4
REC SW
Y GET ON
Y GET function ON.
RET SW
USER button acts as RET switch.
SLOT SEL
Switch that changes the target card is set.
PRE REC
Indicates that PRE-RECORDING mode has been switched ON or OFF.
USB action status has been switched.
Indicates whether the dynamic range stretcher function is ON or OFF.
Indicates whether the focus assist function is ON or OFF.
Indicates the mode for changing the color temperature with the JOG dial
button is ON or OFF.
USB HOST/DEVICE/OFF
DRS ON/OFF
ASSIST ON/OFF
C.TEMP ON/OFF
LCD B.L
SHOT MARK
TEXT MEMO
Displayed when intensity of the LCD monitor back light is switched.
Displayed when a shot mark is added/erased.
Displayed when text memos are recorded.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
79
Information Item
Indication
Status
13. System information
and warnings
SYSTEM ERROR-¢¢
Something abnormal is happening to the internal computer communications or
reference signal. No further recording or playback can be performed. ¢¢ is
replaced with an error code. For more information, see [Error Codes] (page 155).
P2 card has been removed while being accessed (recorded, played back, or
formatted), and subsequent operation is disabled.
TURN POWER OFF
CARD ERR ¢
An error has occurred while recording data to or playing data from a P2 card.
In the actual indication the ¢ is replaced by the slot number of the P2 card that
triggered the error.
REC WARNING
OVER MAX# CLIPS
Something abnormal is happening to video and/or audio being recorded.
Displayed when the maximum number of clips (1000) recorded to the P2 card
is exceeded.
TEMPORARY PAUSE
There is a temporary halt in recording due to distortion in reference signals
such as during GENLOCK input.
BACKUP BATT EMPTY
FAN STOP
WIRELESS-RF
EOM
Backup battery needs replacing.
The fan is locked and halted.
RF signal from the wireless receiver is degraded.
P2 card has no free space.
BOS
Playback position is at the start of all the clips.
EOS
Playback position is at the end of all the clips.
CANNOT REC
The P2 card is not recordable. Detailed information is provided on the
FUNCTION screen of MODE CHECK.
> [Displays in mode check only] (page 82)
Clip cannot be played back perhaps because no P2 card is loaded, or the P2
card contains no clips.
Displayed when disconnection between microcomputers continues for a
specified period or longer.
CANNOT PLAY
COMM ERROR
TEXT MEMO
Text memo has been added.
TEXT MEMO INVALID
MARK ON/OFF
Text memo has not been successfully added.
Shot mark been added or deleted. For information on shot marks, see [Shot
Mark Function] (page 46).
SHOT MARK INVALID
UPDATING
USB DEVICE
This is displayed when shot marks cannot be added.
Clip information is being updated. Playback operation disabled.
AJ-HPX3100 is in USB DEVICE mode. When communication is disabled, the
indication blinks.
USB HOST
Indicates that the camera-recorder is set to the USB HOST mode. When the
external hard disk is not successfully recognized, then the indication blinks.
Thumbnail is being manipulated.
THUMBNAIL OPEN
CLIP DISCONTINUED
Displayed when the consistency of the combined clip is disrupted and
subsequent recordings cannot be combined in the clip when recording in ONE
CLIP REC mode.
TC REGEN
The RET button was pressed to regenerate the time code as the time code for
the last clip recorded on a P2 card.
SLOT SELECT
This blinks while the recording slots of P2 cards are switched after pressing
the USER switch where the SLOT SEL function is assigned.
This is displayed if the recording slots of P2 cards cannot be switched when
the USER switch where the SLOT SEL function is assigned is pressed.
This is displayed when the recording starts or completes while a P2 card with
an irregular directory arrangement is inserted or data are recorded after
inserting an irregular P2 card.
SLOT SELECT INVALID
DIR NG CARD
SLOT1/2
RUN DOWN CARD
SLOT1/2
This is displayed when the recording starts or completes with a P2 card on
which the maximum number of overwrites has been exceeded, or when data
is recorded after inserting such a P2 card.
REAR XR AUTO
The AUDIO IN switch is disabled because audio input automatically goes to
the rear XLR connector.
14. Time code indication TCG
12:59:59:20
12:59:59:20
AB CD EF 00
12 34 56 78
–1:59:59:20
TCG (time code generator value)
TCR (time code reader value)
UBG VUBG (User bits generator value)
UBR VUBR (User bits reader value)
Displays CTL count.
TCR
(V)UBG
(V)UBR
CTL
15. Chromatic aberration CAC
compensation
16. Extender
Displayed when chromatic aberration compensation is activated
EX
Lens extender used.
17. Color temperature
¢.¢K
Color temperature assigned to A, B, and PRST of the WHITE BAL switch (this
is a value stored at AWB performance or a value set through the menu
option). The indication is not provided in ATW mode.
18. Filter position
1 - 4
This indicates the position of the ND filter.
A - D
This indicates the position of the CC filter.
(blink)
This indicates that the filter has not been set to a proper position.
19. Dynamic range
stretcher mode
DRS
This appears when the video level of a part with high brightness is
compressed, and the function stretching the dynamic range is selected.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
80
Information Item
Indication
Status
20. WHITE BAL switch
position
A
B
P
T
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [A].
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [B].
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [PRST].
ATW mode is set. However it flashes when intensity and color are outside the
operation range
21. Stored gain indication 6:/10:/12:/15:/20:/24:/ Storage gain (DS.GAIN) value (when active)
28:/34:
22. Gain value
¢¢dB
Current gain value.
23. Audio input channel - - - - „- - - - +
Selected channel together with its audio level.
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at FRONT.
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at W.L.(WIRELESS)
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at REAR.
and level meter
F
W
R
24. Super iris ON
S
Super iris ON.
25. Iris override
indication
+ +
+
– –
–
Correction phase of the iris override (when active)
+ + : On the open side by 1
– – : On the closed side by 1
No indication : Standard status
+: On the open side by 0.5
–: On the closed side by 0.5
(No indication)
26. Super black ON
27. Iris, F value
B
Super black ON.
‹Note
This is displayed when “S+IRIS” or “S” is selected in the IRIS menu option.
You can select the IRIS menu option from the <VF INDICATOR> screen of the
VF page.
NC
Lens cable is not connected.
OPEN
F1.7 - F16
CLOSE
Lens iris is at maximum.
Lens iris value
Lens iris closed.
‹Note
These indications are provided when the lens is capable of indicating the iris
value. When the iris is being overridden, they blink.
28. Zoom indication
Z00 - Z99
Zoom degree is indicated. This indication is not provided for a lens that does
not return the zoom position, even if the indication is set to ON.
29. INTERVAL REC/PRE
RECORDING
Displayed before and after operation during INTERVAL REC mode.
Displayed during INTERVAL REC operation.
[i]
(blink)
information display
(blink) ¢¢h¢¢m/¢¢s Displays the pause time before the next recording during INTERVAL REC.
P-REC (blink)
Displayed until images/audio are completely recorded to the P2 card after
stopping recording. Do not remove the P2 card or turn the power off until the
flashing display completely turns off.
‹Note
“P-REC” flashes regardless of the PRE RECORDING function settings.
P-REC (lit)
When the PRE RECORDING function is set to ON, lights when you pull the
MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU CANCEL switch toward you. In addition,
this displays when the mode switches to PRE RECORDING mode by pressing
the PRE REC assigned USER switch.
1-CLIP
Displayed when a recording is about to be recorded to a new clip while ONE
CLIP REC mode is on.
1¢CLIP
Displayed when a recording can be compiled and recorded to the previous clip
while ONE CLIP REC mode is ON.
‹Note
If the P2 card is removed or the clip is deleted, subsequent recordings are
recorded to a new clip when the previous combined clip does not exist. In
this case, “1¢CLIP” may remain displayed.
START 1¢CLIP
Displayed when recording of a new clip has started in ONE CLIP REC mode.
Displayed when a combined clip is complete in ONE CLIP REC mode.
END 1-CLIP
30. Gamma mode display HD/SD/FLK1/FLK2/FLK3/
Gamma mode selected with the GAMMA MODE SEL menu option.
You can select the GAMMA MODE SEL menu option from the <GAMMA>
screen of the PAINT page.
FREC/VREC
31. ATW lock status
ATW LOCK
Displayed when the color temperature is fixed by pressing the USER switch to
which the ATW LOCK function is assigned while ATW is operating.
32. Types of markers
33. Y GET value
MKR: A/B/OFF
Types of markers currently displayed.
¢¢¢.¢%
While Y GET is ON, displays output intensity level adjacent to the center
marker as a percentage.
34. Digital zoom
DZa2/a3/a4
During digital zoom mode, displays the magnification.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
81
Displays in mode check only
Display screens and menu options
Status when displayed
Displays menu options that become !LED lighting factors.
!LED screen
z Indications selected through the menu option !LED are marked with [ ! ].
z Indications which may activate the !LED are marked with [ ].
GAIN (0 dB)
DS.GAIN
Gain status
DS. GAIN value
SHUTTER
WHITE PRE.
EXTENDER
B.GAMMA
MATRIX
Shutter status
White balance status
Extender status (EX2 or OFF)
BLACK GAMMA status (ON or OFF)
MATRIX status (A, B, or OFF)
Color correction status (ON or OFF)
Filter status
COLOR COR.
FILTER
ATW
ATW status
FUNCTION screen
Displays video output status and recording media information.
Displays status of signals output from the SDI OUT connector
SDI OUT
OUTPUT
Displays MEM/CAM status displayed with the SDI OUT MODE menu option.
You can select the SDI OUT MODE menu option from the <OUTPUT SEL>
screen of the SYSTEM SETTING page.
TYPE
CHAR
Displays format of signals output from the SDI OUT connector with HD-SDI/SD-SDI.
Displays superimposition status of characters selected with the SDI OUT CHAR
menu option as ON/OFF. You can select the SDI OUT CHAR menu option from
the <OUTPUT SEL> screen of the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Displays status of signals output from the MON OUT connector
Displays status of MEM/CAM selected with the MONITOR OUT MODE menu
option. The MONITOR OUT MODE item can be selected from the <OUTPUT
SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Displays signal format set with the MONITOR OUT menu option as HD-SDI/
SD-SDI/VBS. The MONITOR OUT item can be selected from the <OUTPUT
SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
MON OUT
OUTPUT
SELECT
CHAR
Displays the position of the MON OUT CHARATER switch as ON/OFF.
P2CARD STATUS
Displays the status of a P2 card inserted into the P2 card slot, and total space
and remaining space for recording.
The card status is indicated as:
ACTIVE/ACCESSING/INFO READING/FULL/PROTECTED/
NOT SUPPORTED/FORMAT ERROR/NO CARD
> [P2 CARD ACCESS LED and Status of P2 cards] (page 33).
Displays the total space and remaining space for recording of a P2 card
inserted into the P2 card slot 1 and 2.
Displays the status of a P2 card inserted into the P2 card slot 1, and total space
and remaining space for recording.
TOTAL
SLOT1
SLOT2
Displays the status of a P2 card inserted into the P2 card slot 2, and total space
and remaining space for recording.
AUDIO screen
Displays audio settings and selection status of each recording channel
Displays the number of audio recording bits.
SAMPLE RES
MIC POWER (MENU)
Displays menu setting status for power provided to the microphone.
Displays status of power supplied to the front microphone, selected with the FRONT
MIC POWER menu option, as ON/OFF. You can select the FRONT MIC POWER
menu option from the <MIC/AUDIO> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
Displays whether the rear AUDIO IN connector is set to not supply power to the
microphone with the REAR MIC POWER menu option.
FRONT
REAR
OFF: power is not supplied.
ON: supplies power when the switch is at MIC +48 V ON.
VR SELECT
LEVEL
VR SELECT Displays whether the audio level adjustment knob is selected to enable
either CH1/2 or CH3/4 with the VR SELECT menu option. You can select the VR
SELECT menu option from the <MIC/AUDIO> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
CH1/2/3/4
Displays the recording level adjustment method selected for each channel.
VR:
manual adjustment with the adjustment knob
MENU:manual adjustment with the menu LVL CONTROL CH# menu option
(# is the channel number)
AUTO:automatic adjustment
F.VR
CH1/2/3/4
CH1/2/3/4
Displays with ON/OFF whether the F.AUDIO LEVEL control is enabled for channels
to which VR (manual adjustment with the adjustment knob) is selected above.
R.XLR
Displays with ON/OFF the selection status of the REAR XLR AUTO CH1/2 and
REAR XLR AUTO CH3/4 menu options that automatically select rear input when a
connector is connected to the rear AUDIO IN XLR connector. You can select each
menu option from the <MIC/AUDIO> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.
A. IN
CH1/2/3/4
CH1/2/3/4
Displays the input status of each channel as FRONT (front)/REAR (rear)/W.L. (wireless).
Displays the recording level of each channel.
METER
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
82
Display screen
Indication
Status
Displays the CAC active status and information.
CAC INFO Screen
CAC CONT
Displays the CAC operation mode as ON/STOP/OFF.
ON:
CAC CONTROL in <CAC ADJ> is set to “ON”, and CAC is operating.
STOP: “ON” is selected in the menu, but data or lens conditions stop CAC
from operating.
OFF: “OFF” is selected in the menu, and CAC is not operating.
CAC MODE
Displays the CAC operating mode.
AUTO:
CAC files are selected automatically.
MANUAL:A CAC file number is selected from the menu.
CONNECT LENS TYPE
SELECT FILE TYPE
Displays the lens ID of the connected digital lens.
Displays the file name of the currently operated CAC.
When CAC operation is “OFF”, the file name of the number selected in the CAC
FILE NAME is displayed. The CAC FILE NAME can be selected from the <CAC
ADJ> screen on the MAINTENANCE page.
CAC WARNING
Indicates that the CAC operation is in a stop state.
CAC LENS DATA INVALID:
Displayed when the unit cannot respond to the return data from the lens.
LENS INITIALIZE NOT COMPLETED:
Displayed when initialization of the lens has not yet completed.
Displays the assignment of USER switches.
> [User button functions] (page 79)
USER SW Screen
USER MAIN (UM)
USER1 (U1)
Displays the assignment for USER MAIN (UM).
Displays the assignment for USER1 (U1).
Displays the assignment for USER2 (U2).
Displays the assignment for SHOT MARK (U3).
Displays the assignment for TEXT MEMO (U4).
USER2 (U2)
SHOT MARK (U3)
TEXT MEMO (U4)
P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity Indication
Menu option
Status of
unit
5.P2 card remaining free space
indication
6.P2 card remaining free space
indication (during MODE CHECK)
Recording status
*
P2 CARD REMAIN
Under normal
conditions
Other than LOOP TOTAL
REC mode
The total remaining free space of all Not provided
P2 cards loaded in the P2 card slots is
indicated in minutes.
Example: 30min
ONE CARD
The number of the P2 card slot
holding the target P2 card, together
with that card’s remaining free space
indicated in minutes.
Not provided
Example:
8min
[1]
OFF
LOOP REC mode TOTAL/ONE CARD
OFF
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Indicated as [LOOP]
Not provided
During MODE
CHECK
Other than LOOP TOTAL/ONE CARD/ The total remaining free space and
The number of the P2 card slot
holding the target P2 card, together
with that card’s remaining free space,
indicated in minutes.
REC mode
OFF
capacities of all P2 cards loaded in
the P2 card slots are indicated in
minutes.
Example: 20/40
Example:
8min
[1]
LOOP REC mode
Indicated as [LOOP]
The estimated recording time is
indicated in minutes.
Example: 7min
* The menu option P2CARD REMAIN can be found in the <VF INDICATOR> screen, which is accessible from the VF page.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
83
Indications Available in the Viewfinder Screen
Selectable
Provided when
between on and the appropriate
Provided during
MODE CHECK*
Provided during
playback
Selectable
off through menu
options
status is
encountered.
1. System mode
±
±
±
±
±
–
–
z
z
z
z
z
±
±
±
±
±
–
–
–
–
–
2. Camera mode
3. REC FORMAT
–
4. Shutter speed/mode
5. P2 card remaining free space
±
–
6. P2 card remaining free space
(MODE CHECK)
–
–
z
±
–
7. Camera-recorder REC indication
8. Battery type (MODE CHECK)
9. Battery remaining level/voltage
±
–
±
–
–
±
±
±
–
–
–
z
z
±
–
10. GAIN switch assignment information
(during MODE CHECK)
–
–
±
±
–
11. Camera warning and report area
12. User button functions
13. System information and warnings
14. Time code indication
15. Chromatic aberration compensation
16. Extender
–
±
±
±
–
±
±
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
–
–
–
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
–
±
±
±
–
–
17. Color temperature
–
18. Filter position
–
19. Dynamic range stretcher mode
20. WHITE BAL switch position
21. Stored gain indication
22. Gain value
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
All 4ch input
information
23. Audio input channel and level meter
±
–
±
–
24. Super iris ON
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
–
z
z
z
z
z
±
±
±
±
±
–
–
–
–
–
25. Iris override indication
26. Super black ON
27. Iris, F value
28. Zoom indication
–
29. INTERVAL REC/PRE RECORDING
information display
±
±
z
–
–
30. Gamma mode display
31. ATW lock status
32. Types of markers
33. Y GET value
±
±
–
±
±
–
z
z
z
z
z
±
±
±
±
±
–
–
–
–
–
–
±
±
34. Digital zoom
–
* ±: Not provided when the menu option STATUS is set to OFF, which can be found in the <MODE CHK IND> screen, accessible from the
VF page.
z: Provided regardless of the menu option setting.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
84
Display Modes and Setting Changes/adjustment Result Messages
The messages that appear on the viewfinder screen to
# < VF DISPLAY >
indicate changes to settings and adjustment results may be
DISP CONDITION
DISP MODE
VF OUT
:NORMAL
:3
:Y
limited, or set not to appear, through the menu option DISP
MODE. This menu option can be found in the <VF
DISPLAY> screen, which is accessible from the VF page.
>For directions on navigating the menu, see [Setting Menu
Options] (page 160).
VF DTL
:05
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
LOW LIGHT LVL
RC MENU DISP.
MARKER/CHAR LVL
:070%
:085%
:SPOT
:35%
:OFF
:50%
SYNCHRO SCAN DISP. :sec
Setting change/adjustment result messages and DISP MODE settings
DISP MODE
settings
Message appears when:
Message
1
2
3
CC/ND filter changed.
FILTER: n (n=1, 2, 3, 4), m (m=A, B, C, D)
±
±
z
Gain changed.
GAIN: n dB
±
±
z
(n=–6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30)
WHITE BAL switch re-positioned.
WHITE: n (n=A, B, PRE)
AUTO KNEE: ON (or OFF)
±
±
±
z
z
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch positioned at
[AUTO KNEE] or [OFF].
z
Shutter speed/mode changed.
SS:
1/100 (or 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000, 11/¢¢.¢ or 1¢¢¢.0d)
±
z
z
White balance adjusted (AWB performed).
Black balance adjusted (ABB performed).
Extender selected.
Example: AWB A OK 3.2 K
Example: ABB OK
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
z
z
±
z
±
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Example: EXTENDER ON
Example: UM: S.GAIN 30 dB
Example: MKR: A
USER button selected.
MARKER SELECT function selected
Iris being overridden.
Example: ++ F 5.6
The CAC lens is connected or removed.
Example: CAC LENS DATA INVALID
z: Message appears.
±: Message does not appear.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
85
Setting the Marker Displays
The center, safety zone, safety zone area and frame
markers may be set to ON or OFF, along with specifications
of the marker types. To set and select markers, go to the
<VF MARKER> screen from the VF page and select the
appropriate options.
‹Note
The indication MKR:A at the upper right of the screen shows
the current indication status. To view TABLE B, press the
MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU CANCEL switch on the unit.
This changes the indication to MKR:B, allowing you to view the
set conditions.
>For directions on navigating the menu, see [Setting Menu
Options] (page 160).
# < VF MARKER >
MKR:A
TABLE
:A
CENTER MARK
SAFETY MARK
SAFETY AREA
FRAME MARK
FRAME SIG
FLAME LVL
:1
:2
:90%
:OFF
:4:3
:15
Marker Check Screen Displays (MARKER SELECT button function)
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to view
the marker settings of the unit.
Markers
When you press the MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU
CANCEL switch on the side of this unit, the marker
displayed by the viewfinder changes.
Center marker
Safety zone
Marker A > Marker B > No marker
If the menu item FRAME SIG is set to 16:9 as the
information of Marker A and 4:3 as the information of Marker
B, then the 16:9 and 4:3 view angles can easily be checked
with the button, as required. The menu item FRAME SIG is
found in the <VF MARKER> screen on the VF page.
The view angle specified through the menu option
FRAME SIG is displayed.
MARKER SEL, MODE
CHK / MENU CANCEL
switch
Checking Return Video Signal in the Viewfinder
The viewfinder displays the return video signal input to the
GENLOCK IN or SDI IN connector while the RET button at
the lens is held down. To enable this function, select “CAM
RET” for the menu option RET SW.
In HD (1080i) mode, either the HD SDI signal from the SDI
IN connector, or the HD-Y signal from the GENLOCK IN
connector in the RETURN SIGNAL item can be selected. In
SD mode, only the SD SDI signal from the SDI IN connector
can be viewed.
the menu item RET SW is found in the <SW MODE> screen
on the CAM OPERATION page.
< SW MODE >
#
RET SW
S.BLK LVL
:R.REVIEW
:-10
AUTO KNEE SW
SHD.ABB SW CTL
COLOR BARS
S.GAIN OFF
DS.GAIN OFF
:ON
:ON
:SMPTE
:L/M/H
:DS.GAIN
:ON
D.ZOOM
D.ZOOM
D.ZOOM
a2
a3
a4
:ON
:ON
The menu item RETURN SIGNAL is found in the
<GENLOCK> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page, and
RC CHECK SW
:R.REVIEW
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
86
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor
Using the LCD Monitor
5
Through the menu option VF/LCD CHAR,
specify whether or not the LCD should display
the same characters as the viewfinder.
The menu item VF/LCD CHAR is found in the
<OUTPUT SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING
page.
1
2
Turn on the POWER switch of the unit.
Slide the OPEN button in the arrow 1
direction to open the LCD monitor in the arrow
2 direction.
<OUTPUT SEL>
OUTPUT ITEM
SDI OUT MODE
SDI OUT CHAR
MONITOR OUT
:MENU ONLY
:MEM
:ON
:VBS
MONITOR OUT MODE:MEM
#
VF/LCD CHAR
VF MODE
THUMBNAIL OUT
:ON
:MEM
:OFF
‹Notes
z When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is shut
tight.
z In an environment with sudden temperature changes,
condensation may form on the liquid crystal surface of
the monitor. If this happens, wipe off the moisture with
a soft, dry cloth.
z When the camera-recorder is very cold, the video image
in the LCD monitor will appear slightly darker
immediately after the power is turned on. Once the
interior of the camera-recorder warms up, the LCD
monitor delivers normal brightness.
3
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for most
convenient viewing.
The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards the
lens and up to 90 degrees towards you.
‹Note
To prevent camera-recorder failure, do not allow undue
force to be applied to the monitor (when it is open).
Self-portrait Shooting
When shooting with the LCD display angled 180 degrees
towards the lens, you can set the menu item SELF SHOOT
to “MIRROR”, to horizontally flip the video image on the LCD
display, and allow you to view a mirror image while shooting.
Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor is
horizontally flipped, not the actual video being recorded.
The menu item SELF SHOOT is found in the <LCD
MONITOR> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
‹Note
4
The options BRIGHTNESS, COLOR LEVEL,
and CONTRAST show respectively the
brightness, color level and contrast of the
screen.
When the LCD monitor is angled 180 degrees towards you with
the menu option SELF SHOOT to “MIRROR”, the LCD monitor
does not provide the same status indication as the viewfinder,
regardless of the setting for the menu option VF/LCD CHAR.
These menu items are found in the <LCD MONITOR>
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
# <LCD MONITOR>
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR LEVEL
CONTRAST
:+0
:+0
:+0
BACKLIGHT
SELF SHOOT
:NORMAL
:MIRROR
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor
87
Selection of video output signals
The unit employs the SDI OUT connector and the MON OUT connector as connectors for outputting video signals.
Settings of signals output from SDI OUT connector
The type of output signal from the SDI OUT connector is in
accordance with the SYSTEM MODE item. Additionally, the
signal output from the SDI OUT connector is switched from
the SDI OUT MODE item.
The SYSTEM MODE can be selected from the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page, and the
SDI OUT MODE can be selected from the <OUTPUT SEL>
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Variable
range
Item
Remarks
SDI OUT MODE MEM
CAM
MEM: During EE such as recording,
video images taken by the
camera are output. Meanwhile,
signals on the P2 card are
output during playback.
CAM: Camera images are output at
all times.
Set the characters to be superimposed on the signals output
from the SDI OUT connector in the OUTPUT ITEM and SDI
OUT CHAR items. Items can be selected from the
<OUTPUT SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Variable
range
Item
Remarks
OUTPUT ITEM
MENU
ONLY
TC
Set the characters to be
superimposed on the output signals
from the VIDEO OUT connector.
MENU ONLY:
STATUS
The menu screen is superimposed
only when the menu is accessed.
This normally displays nothing.
TC:
Time codes are superimposed
(when the menu is accessed, the
menu screen is superimposed.)
STATUS:
The characters that are the same
as the characters superimposed in
the viewfinder screen are
superimposed.
(When the menu is accessed, the
menu screen is superimposed.)
SDI OUT CHAR
OFF
ON
Select whether to superimpose
characters on the image output from
the SDI OUT connector.
OFF:Do not superimpose.
ON: Superimpose.
‹Note
The content of the superimposed
characters is the same as that
superimposed on video output from
the MON OUT connector
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Selection of video output signals
88
Settings of signals output from MON OUT connector
The MON OUT connector outputs HD SDI signals, down-
converted SD SDI signals, and analog signals.
In the MONITOR OUT item, set the video signal output from
the MON OUT connector. The MONITOR OUT item can be
selected from the <OUTPUT SEL> screen on the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
Variable
range
Item
Remarks
MONITOR OUT
HD SDI
SD SDI
VBS
Select the output signal format for the
MON OUT connector.
HD SDI:output an HD SDI signal.
(1080i mode only)
SD SDI:output an SD SDI signal.
VBS: output a composite signal.
Set the signals output from the MON OUT connector in the
MONITOR OUT MODE item. The MONITOR OUT MODE
item can be selected from the <OUTPUT SEL> screen on
the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Variable
range
Item
Remarks
MONITOR OUT
MODE
MEM
CAM
Select the output signal for the MON
OUT connector.
MEM: During EE such as recording,
video images taken by the
camera are output. In
playback mode, this is the
playback image.
CAM: always the camera image.
Use the MON OUT CHARACTER switch to set whether to
superimpose characters on the signals output from the MON
OUT connector.
ON:
Superimpose.
OFF:
Do not superimpose.
>[MON OUT CHARACTER switch] (page 22)
MON OUT CHARACTER
switch
However, the OUTPUT ITEM item sets details of the
characters to superimpose both on the output from the SDI
OUT connector, and that from the MON OUT connector. The
OUTPUT ITEM item can be selected from the <OUTPUT
SEL> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Selection of video output signals
89
Handling data
Set data file configuration
The unit employs 6 sets for the file data area.
>For menu items that can be read from or stored in the
respective areas, refer to [Menu] (page 158)
FACTORY data:
The area for storing factory settings.
Data cannot be revised with menu operations.
USER data:
The area for storing the data set by menu operations
The FACTORY data is stored as the factory setting.
CURRENT data:
The area for storing the operating status of the unit
The set value in this area is revised by menu operations.
SCENE file:
‹Notes
z For information about how to navigate through the menu for
this section, see [Setting Menu Options] (page 160).
z Access the respective data settings files after switching the
PC MODE to “OFF”. If the respective data settings files are
accessed when the unit is in USB DEVICE mode, an error
may occur. The menu item PC MODE is found in the
<SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Four sets of scene files are provided.
LENS file:
Eight sets of lens files are provided.
CAC file:
32 chromatic aberration compensation data area sets
are provided.
CAC FILE CARD READ
DELETE
SD memory card
SET UP data
It is possible to write eight
setup files on the SD
memory card.
CAC FILE CARD READ
READ
CAC ADJ
CAC FILE DELETE
SD memory card
No. of files: 8
CAC file
Menu operations
No. of files: 32
SD CARD READ/WRITE
READ
SD CARD READ/WRITE
WRITE
To revise the set
value
CAC
CONTROL
SCENE
WRITE
SCENE file
No. of files: 4
SCENE
READ
CURRENT data
(Operating status of the unit)
No. of files: 1
LENS FILE
READ
WRITE USER READ USER
DATA
DATA
USER data
LENS file
LENS FILE
WRITE
No. of files: 1
No. of files: 8
READ FACTORY
DATA
FACTORY data
(Revision disable)
No. of files: 1
LENS FILE CARD R/W
READ
LENS FILE CARD R/W
WRITE
SD memory card
: Files built in the unit
: Menu operations
Lens file
No. of files: 8a8
It is possible to write eight
titles for eight lens files on the
SD memory card.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
90
Setting Data Using an SD memory card
An SD memory card (optional accessory) can be used as a
setup card that stores up to eight files of settings menu
specifications.
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum state.
><Cautions in using SD memory cards> (page 22).
Handling SD memory cards
An SD memory card may be inserted or removed, either before or after the power is turned on.
To insert an SD memory card
To remove the SD memory card
Open the slot cover, and insert an SD memory card (optional
accessory) into the SD memory card slot with the notch
upward. Close the slot cover.
Open the slot cover, and ensure that the BUSY lamp is not
illuminated. Then, further depress the SD memory card
towards the main unit. This releases the SD memory card
from the insertion slot. Take hold of the SD memory card and
remove it. Close the slot cover.
SD memory cards must not be used or stored in an
environment where they may be
z Exposed to high temperatures/humidities;
z Exposed to water droplets; or
z Electrically charged.
For storage, the SD memory card must be kept inserted into
the unit with the lid closed.
‹Note
An SD memory card must be inserted with the right side facing
the slot. If the card is hard to insert, it may be reversed or
upside down. Do not force it into the slot. Check the card
before re-inserting it.
Formatting, Writing and Reading an SD memory card
To format an SD memory card, write settings data or read
data on an SD memory card, navigate the menu to the <SD
CARD READ/ WRITE> screen from the FILE page.
If an SD memory card that is formatted in a standard other
than the SD standards and SDHC standards, [FORMAT
ERROR] is displayed in the top right section of the window.
In this case, reformat the card as follows. Note that the
indication “FORMAT ERROR” does not disappear if the SD
memory card is replaced with this menu page open. When
the SD memory card is replaced, perform TITLE READ.
# < SD CARD READ/WRITE >
R.SELECT
READ
W.SELECT
WRITE
:1
:1
CARD CONFIG
TITLE READ
TITLE:
1: ******** 5: ********
2: ******** 6: ********
3: ******** 7: ********
4: ******** 8: ********
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
91
To format an SD memory card
4
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
The settings menu disappears and the status of the unit
is indicated at the top and bottom of the viewfinder
screen.
‹Note
SD memory cards may be formatted via the thumbnail screen.
> [Formatting SD memory cards] (page 131).
‹Notes
1
2
3
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/
WRITE> screen.
z Data erased by formatting cannot be restored, so be
sure to perform the format after first confirming the
data.
z If an SD memory card is inserted or removed with the
<SD CARD READ/WRITE> screen open, the data title
cannot be edited.
Move the cursor to the option TITLE READ and press
the JOG dial button. Edit the data title.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the menu option CARD CONFIG.
Press the JOG dial button.
The following message is displayed.
To write set data on an SD memory card
Select the type of the menu to write to the <SD CARD R/W
SELECT> screen in advance, and then perform the writing
to the SD memory card via the following procedure.
1
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/
WRITE> screen.
CONFIG?
YES
#
NO
To select a file number
z To format the SD memory card, turn the JOG dial
button to move the cursor to YES. Then, press the
dial button.
z When the SD memory card has been formatted, the
following message appears:
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option W. SELECT. Then, press the dial
button.
< SD CARD READ/WRITE >
R.SELECT
READ
W.SELECT
WRITE
:1
:1
#
CARD CONFIG
TITLE READ
TITLE:
1: ******** 5: ********
2: ******** 6: ********
3: ******** 7: ********
4: ******** 8: ********
CONFIG OK
3
Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired
number (1 - 8). Then, press the dial button.
The card will not be formatted if the following message
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:
To give the selected file a title
Error message
CONFIG NG
NO CARD
(No SD memory card inserted.)
Remedy
Insert an SD memory card.
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option TITLE:.
CONFIG NG
ERROR
The card may be defective.
Replace the card.
< SD CARD READ/WRITE >
R.SELECT
READ
W.SELECT
WRITE
CARD CONFIG
TITLE READ
:1
:1
(SD memory card cannot be
formatted.)
CONFIG NG
Remove the card and cancel the
protect.
WRITE PROTECT
(SD memory card is write-
protected.)
#
TITLE:
1: ******** 5: ********
2: ******** 6: ********
3: ******** 7: ********
4: ******** 8: ********
CONFIG NG
Example: The SD memory card
is not accessible because it is
being played back.
After the operation in process,
format the card.
CANNOT ACCCESS
(SD memory card not
accessible).
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
92
5
6
Press the JOG dial button.
This moves the cursor to the entry area, putting the unit
in entry mode.
12 Press the JOG dial button to display the
following message:
< SD CARD READ/WRITE >
R.SELECT
READ
W.SELECT
WRITE
:1
:1
CARD CONFIG
TITLE READ
WRITE?
YES
;
TITLE:
#
NO
1: ******** 5: ********
2: ******** 6: ********
3: ******** 7: ********
4: ******** 8: ********
TITLE:
The data will not be written if any of the following messages
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired
character appears.
The characters that appear are switched in the
following order:
Error message
WRITE NG
Remedy
Insert an SD memory card.
NO CARD
Space:
†
(No SD memory card inserted.)
Ð
WRITE NG
The card has not been formatted
using the unit.
Replace the card.
FORMAT ERROR
(SD memory card not properly
formatted.)
Alphabetical characters: A to Z
Ð
Numerals:
Ð
Symbols:
0 to 9
WRITE NG
ERROR
(SD memory card not writable.)
The card may be defective.
Replace the card.
', >, <, /, -
WRITE NG
Remove the card and disable
the protect.
7
8
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired
character.
WRITE PROTECT
(SD memory card write-
protected.)
WRITE NG
Example: The SD memory card
is not accessible because it is
being played back.
After the operation in process,
format the card.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the next digit (clockwise), and repeat Steps 6 -
7 to set characters (up to eight characters).
CANNOT ACCCESS
(SD memory card not
accessible.)
WRITENG
CARD FULL
(SD memory card has no free
space.)
The card is not writable because
it has no free space. Delete
unwanted files or replace the
card with a new one.
To write data on a selected file
9
When the title is set, turn the JOG dial button
to move the cursor to [:].
13 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
When the data has been written, the following message
appears:
< SD CARD READ/WRITE >
R.SELECT
READ
:1
:1
W.SELECT
WRITE
CARD CONFIG
TITLE READ
;
TITLE:
1: ******** 5: ********
2: ******** 6: ********
3: ******** 7: ********
4: ******** 8: ********
WRITE OK
10 Press the JOG dial button to return the cursor
to the option TITLE:.
11 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option WRITE.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
93
14 To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
The settings menu disappears and the status of the unit
is indicated at the top and bottom of the viewfinder
screen.
5
6
Press the JOG dial button to display the
following message:
‹Notes
z It is possible to overwrite the setup file on the unit with a
setup file from another device. Note that if the file is
overwritten, the original setup file from the other device will
be lost.
READ?
YES
z We recommend managing the respective SD memory cards
on the respective devices independently.
#
NO
To read data on an SD memory card
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
When the data has been read, the following message
appears:
Select the type of the menu to read from the <SD CARD R/
W SELECT> screen in advance, and then perform the
reading from the SD memory card via the following
procedure.
1
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/
WRITE> screen.
To select a file number
READ OK
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the menu option R. SELECT. Then, press the
dial button.
The data will not be read if any of the following messages
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:
< SD CARD READ/WRITE >
#
R.SELECT
READ
W.SELECT
WRITE
1
1
Error message
READ NG
Remedy
Insert an SD memory card.
CARD CONFIG
TITLE READ
NO CARD
(No SD memory card inserted.)
TITLE:
READ NG
The card has not been formatted
using the unit.
Replace the card.
1: ******** 5: ********
2: ******** 6: ********
3: ******** 7: ********
4: ******** 8: ********
FORMAT ERROR
(SD memory card not properly
formatted.)
READ NG
NO FILE
(No file found.)
Write file data.
3
Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired
number (1 - 8). Then, press the dial button.
READ NG
ERROR
Only data written with the unit is
readable.
To read data on a selected file
(SD memory card not readable.)
READ NG
Example: The SD memory card
is not accessible because it is
being played back.
After the operation in process,
read data.
CANNOT ACCCESS
(SD memory card not
accessible.)
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option READ.
< SD CARD READ/WRITE >
R.SELECT
READ
W.SELECT
WRITE
CARD CONFIG
TITLE READ
:1
:1
#
7
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
The settings menu will be replaced by status indications
for the unit.
TITLE:
1: ******** 5: ********
2: ******** 6: ********
3: ******** 7: ********
4: ******** 8: ********
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
94
How to Use the User Data
It is possible to transfer settings and other data to the user
area of the internal memory of the unit.
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup
state.
2
3
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option READ USER DATA.
< SCENE >
#
READ USER DATA
SCENE SEL
READ
To write data, go to the <INITIALIZE> screen from the FILE
page. To read the written user data, go to the <SCENE>
screen from the FILE page.
:1
WRITE
RESET
TITLE1 : ********
TITLE2 : ********
TITLE3 : ********
TITLE4 : ********
To write settings data in the user area
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <INITIALIZE>
screen.
Press the JOG dial button to display the
following message:
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option WRITE USER DATA.
< INITIALIZE >
READ FACTORY DATA
#
WRITE USER DATA
READ?
YES
#
NO
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
The data written in the user area of the internal memory
of the unit is read to complete the setting.
3
Press the JOG dial button.
The following message is displayed.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
The set user data may be also read without navigating the
menu.
WRITE?
YES
NO
1
2
Turn off the POWER switch.
#
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].
4
5
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
This writes the settings data into the user area of the
internal memory of the unit.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
To read written user data
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.
WHITE BAL
Switch
3
With the AUTO W/B BAL switch flipped up,
turn on the POWER switch.
This resets all settings for USER menu options to their
defaults.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
95
How to Use Scene File Data
It is possible to write the settings data into the scene file area
of the internal memory of the unit, or to read data written in
this area. Four types of scene files are available. This data
allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup state.
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
This writes the setting data into the scene file area of
the unit internal memory.
To change the settings, go to the <SCENE> screen from the
FILE page.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
To write settings data for scene files
1
2
Navigate the menu to the SCENE screen.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the SCENE SEL option.
3
Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file
numbers. Then, turn the dial button to select a
desired scene file number.
< SCENE >
READ USER DATA
#
SCENE SEL
READ
:1
WRITE
RESET
TITLE1 : ********
TITLE2 : ********
TITLE3 : ********
TITLE4 : ********
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene
file.
Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor
to the option WRITE.
< SCENE >
READ USER DATA
SCENE SEL
READ
:1
#
WRITE
RESET
TITLE1 : ********
TITLE2 : ********
TITLE3 : ********
TITLE4 : ********
6
Press the JOG dial button to display the
following message:
WRITE?
YES
#
NO
TITLE:
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
96
To read settings data for scene files
To return data for scene files to their defaults
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option SCENE SEL.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option SCENE SEL.
3
Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file
numbers. Then, turn the dial button to select a
desired scene file number.
3
Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file
numbers. Then, turn the dial button to select
the scene file that you want to reset.
< SCENE >
< SCENE >
READ USER DATA
READ USER DATA
#
SCENE SEL
READ
:1
#
SCENE SEL
READ
:1
WRITE
WRITE
RESET
RESET
TITLE1 : ********
TITLE2 : ********
TITLE3 : ********
TITLE4 : ********
TITLE1 : ********
TITLE2 : ********
TITLE3 : ********
TITLE4 : ********
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene
file.
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene
file.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the READ option.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option RESET.
< SCENE >
< SCENE >
READ USER DATA
READ USER DATA
SCENE SEL
READ
WRITE
:1
SCENE SEL
READ
WRITE
:1
#
RESET
#
RESET
TITLE1 : ********
TITLE2 : ********
TITLE3 : ********
TITLE4 : ********
TITLE1 : ********
TITLE2 : ********
TITLE3 : ********
TITLE4 : ********
6
Press the JOG dial button to display the
following message:
6
Press the JOG dial button.
The following message is displayed.
RESET?
YES
READ?
YES
#
NO
#
NO
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal
memory of the unit is reset to the defaults.
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal
memory of the unit is read to complete the setting.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
97
To title settings data for scene files
10 Press the JOG dial button.
The following message is displayed.
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the option [TITLE 1 - 4] for the appropriate
scene file.
< SCENE >
WRITE?
YES
NO
READ USER DATA
SCENE SEL
READ
#
:1
TITLE:
WRITE
RESET
#
TITLE1 : ********
TITLE2 : ********
TITLE3 : ********
TITLE4 : ********
11 Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
YES. Then, press the dial button.
This writes the title into the scene file area of the unit
internal memory.
12 To exit the menu, press the MENU button.
3
4
Press the JOG dial button.
The cursor moves to the title entry area, putting the unit
in entry mode.
< SCENE >
READ USER DATA
SCENE SEL
READ
:1
WRITE
RESET
;
TITLE1 : ********
TITLE2 : ********
TITLE3 : ********
TITLE4 : ********
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired
character appears.
The characters that appear are switched in the
following order:
Space:
†
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z
Ð
Numerals:
Ð
0 to 9
Symbols:
', >, <, /, -
5
6
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired
character.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to
the next digit (clockwise), and repeat Steps 4 -
5 to set characters (up to eight characters).
7
8
9
When the title is set, turn the JOG dial button
to move the cursor to [:].
Press the JOG dial button,
The cursor returns to the options TITLE 1 - 4.
Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor
to the option WRITE.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
98
Resetting Menu Option Settings to Defaults
The menu settings can be reset to their defaults.
< INITIALIZE >
To reset the settings to their defaults, select the menu option
READ FACTORY DATA in the <INITIALIZE> screen, which
is accessible from the FILE page.
#
READ FACTORY DATA
WRITE USER DATA
All settings will be reset to their defaults.
‹Note
This operation does not delete the scene file, lens file, and
the information stored as the user data.
Lens file
The built-in memory of the unit stores eight sets of lens files.
On the SD memory card, eight titles for eight sets of lens
files in a table (total 64 sets) can be written.
z Title name
z White shading correction value
z Flare compensation value
The following data are recorded on the lens file.
z RB gain offset correction value
How to provide lens files
Adjustment of white shading
Adjustment of gain offset
For the white shading adjustment, refer to [Adjusting the
Lens White Shading] (page 112)
For correcting changes in white balance that may occur
when replacing the lens.
1
2
Mount the lens to memory the lens file on the
unit.
Adjustment of the flare
Using the menu operations, adjust the flare in the LENS R
FLARE item, the LENS G FLARE item and the LENS B
FLARE item. These menu items are found in the <LENS
FILE ADJ> screen on the MAINTENANCE page.
Shoot the grayscale chart with appropriate
lighting (2000 lx, 3200 K are preferable).
3
4
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the “A” position.
#
< LENS FILE ADJ >
LENS FILE ADJ MODE:ON
LENS R GAIN OFFSET:+000
LENS B GAIN OFFSET:+000
Adjust the lens aperture so that the white
window at the center of the grayscale chart is
about 80%.
LENS R FLARE
LENS G FLARE
LENS B FLARE
:000
:000
:000
5
6
7
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to “AWB” to
adjust the white balance automatically.
Measure the signal level of RGB by using the
waveform monitor (WFM).
Example of the chart for flare adjustment
Adjust the lens aperture so that the signal
level of Gch is the same signal level as the
one obtained in 6 above.
8
Set the LENS FILE ADJ MODE to ON.
The menu item LENS FILE ADJ MODE is found in the
<LENS FILE ADJ> screen on the MAINTENANCE page.
0.1H
H
0.1W
9
Adjust the signal level of Rch to be the same
as Gch in the LENS R GAIN OFFSET item.
10 In the same way, adjust the signal level of Bch
to be the same as Gch in the LENS B GAIN
OFFSET item.
W
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
99
To save the lens file into the built-in memory
Select the file No.
7
Press the JOG dial button again and turn it
until the character to be set is displayed.
When the button is turned, the character displayed is
switched in the following sequence:
1
2
3
Using the menu operations, open the <LENS
FILE> screen from the FILE page.
Space:
†
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to the FILE NO. item.
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z
Ð
Press the JOG dial button and the file number
will flash. Turn the JOG dial button to select
the file (1 to 8) to be recorded.
Numerals:
Ð
0 to 9
Symbols:
', >, <, /, -, . , x
8
9
Press the JOG dial button to enter the
character.
< LENS FILE >
#
FILE NO.
READ
WRITE
:1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to the next position (right), and repeat
steps 7 and 8 to set the characters (maximum
of 12).
RESET ALL
TITLE:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
10 When the title has been input, turn the JOG
dial button to move the arrow (cursor) to the
“:” position.
4
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file
number.
< LENS FILE >
FILE NO.
READ
:1
WRITE
Give a title to the selected file.
RESET ALL
;
TITLE:¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to the TITLE : item.
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
< LENS FILE >
FILE NO.
READ
:1
WRITE
RESET ALL
11 Press the JOG dial button.
The arrow (cursor) returns to the “TITLE : ” item.
#
TITLE:
< LENS FILE >
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
FILE NO.
READ
WRITE
:1
RESET ALL
#
TITLE:¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
6
Press the JOG dial button.
The arrow (cursor) moves to the title input area, and the
input mode is established.
< LENS FILE >
12 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
FILE NO.
READ
WRITE
:1
(cursor) to the WRITE position.
RESET ALL
;
< LENS FILE >
TITLE:
FILE NO.
READ
WRITE
:1
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
#
RESET ALL
TITLE:¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
100
13 Press the JOG dial button.
14 Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial
button.
The following message is displayed.
The current white shading correction value, the flare
compensation value, and the RB gain offset correction
value are stored in the built-in memory of the unit.
‹Note
The values will not be stored in the unit’s internal memory
if another menu screen is selected without executing
WRITE or if the menu is exited.
WRITE?
YES
NO
#
15 Press the MENU button.
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom
of the viewfinder screen.
To read the lens file from the builtin memory
1
2
3
Using menu operations, open the <LENS
FILE> screen from the FILE page.
6
When the JOG dial button is pressed, the
following message appears.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to the FILE NO. item.
Press the JOG dial button and the file number
will flash. Turn the JOG dial button to select
the file (1 to 8) to be read.
READ?
YES
< LENS FILE >
#
NO
#
FILE NO.
READ
:1
WRITE
RESET ALL
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to YES, and press the JOG dial
button.
The recorded correction values for the white shading,
flare, and RB gain offset are read.
TITLE:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Press the MENU button.
The setting menu is cleared, and the displays showing
the unit’s current statuses appear at the top and bottom
of the viewfinder screen.
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file
number.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to the READ item.
< LENS FILE >
FILE NO.
READ
WRITE
:1
#
RESET ALL
TITLE:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
101
To write in and read out the lens file to/from the SD memory card
The contents of the eight lens files stored in the unit’s
internal memory can be saved onto an SD memory card as
Saving lens files on the SD memory card
card files under a single title. A total of eight titles can be
saved on an SD memory card.
Furthermore, the eight lens files saved under one title on an
SD memory card can be loaded into the unit’s internal
Select the card file No.
1
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE
CARD R/W> screen from the FILE page.
When the message “FORMAT ERROR” appears in the
upper right corner, format the SD memory card with the
camera-recorder. SD cards can be formatted through
the CARD CONFIG menu. The menu item CARD
CONFIG is found in the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>
screen on the FILE page.
memory.
The correlation between the lens files stored in the internal
memory and lens files saved on an SD memory card is
shown below.
> [Handling SD memory cards] (page 91).
2
3
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to the CARD FILE SELECT item.
Internal memory
Up to 8 sets of the lens file
can be stored in the built-in
memory.
Press the JOG dial button and the card file
number will flash. Turn the JOG dial button to
select the file (1 to 8) to be recorded.
8 lens files
< LENS FILE CARD R/W >
#
CARD FILE SELECT :1
READ
The contents of 8 lens files
can be saved onto an SD
memory card as card files
under one title or they can be
loaded from the SD memory
WRITE
TITLE READ
TITLE:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Card files
card.
Title 1
Title 2
Title 3
Title 4
4
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file
number.
Give a title to the selected card file.
Title 5
Title 6
Title 7
Title 8
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to the TITLE : item.
< LENS FILE CARD R/W >
CARD FILE SELECT :1
READ
WRITE
TITLE READ
#
TITLE:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
A total of 64 lens files (8 lens files k 8 titles) can be saved
on an SD memory card.
6
Press the JOG dial button.
The arrow (cursor) moves to the title input area, and the
input mode is established.
Now perform step 7 on page 100 through step 15 on page
101.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
102
Loading lens files from the SD memory card
1
2
3
Using menu operations, open the <LENS FILE
CARD R/W> screen from the FILE page.
Turn the JOG dial button to move the arrow
(cursor) to the CARD FILE SELECT item.
Press the JOG dial button and the card file
number will flash. Turn the JOG dial button to
select the file (1 to 8) to be read.
< LENS FILE CARD R/W >
#
CARD FILE SELECT :1
READ
WRITE
TITLE READ
TITLE:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
4
Press the JOG dial button to enter the file
number.
Now perform steps 5 through 8 on page 101.
‹Note
The card file titles on the SD memory card are displayed on the
<LENS FILE CARD R/W> screen, but the titles of the lens files
contained in the card files are not shown on this screen.
To display these titles, load the files, and check the titles on the
<LENS FILE> screen.
The lens files in the unit’s internal memory will be rewritten as
the loaded lens files at this time. For this reason, save the lens
files in the internal memory onto the SD memory card first to
back them up before loading them on the SD memory card.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Handling data
103
Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
CAC is a function that automatically corrects registration errors mainly caused by slight chromatic aberration, which cannot be
corrected with lenses, and minimizes color weepage on the images.
What is the chromatic aberration?
CAC operation
Chromatic aberration means magnification ratio chromatic
aberration. Magnification ratio chromatic aberration is
caused by differences in the in red (R), green (G), and blue
(B) refractive indexes of a lens. The lens itself corrects
chromatic aberration but the astigmatism remains in the
surrounding area in particular. The zooming ratio, iris, and
focal distance involves complicated chromatic aberration
phenomena in a zoom lens. Images have registration errors.
For the four lenses listed on the left
1
2
3
Install the lens on the unit and connect the
lens connector.
Open the CAC ADJ MENU on the
MAINTENANCE MENU screen.
Turn “ON” the CAC CONTROL.
If the lens product number recorded on the unit
coincides with the product number of the connected
lens, the CAC data stored in the unit are read out
automatically.
B
G
R
< CAC ADJ >
#
CAC CONTROL
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE NO.
:ON
:01
:01
TITLE SCROLL
01:HA22X7.8BERM-M58
02:HA16X6.3BERM-M58
03:HJ17EX7.6B IASE
04:HJ22EX7.6B IASE
05:NO FILE
06:NO FILE
07:NO FILE
08:NO FILE
Chromatic aberration compensation function
Confirmation of the CAC operation status
To correct the chromatic aberration, record the chromatic
aberration characteristics of the lens for the zooming ratio,
iris, and focal distance in the main unit of the camera-
recorder and connect a lens suitable for these
characteristics. Then perform the correction in accordance
with the zooming ratio, iris, and focus distance of the lens.
The CAC data for the following four kinds of lenses are
stored in the unit at the time of shipment from the factory.
1
2
When the MENU is not displayed on the VF
screen, pull the MARKER SEL, MODE CHK /
MENU CANCEL switch.
If letters of the CAC are indicated at the left top of the
viewfinder screen, the CAC is operating properly. If the
letters of CAC are not indicated, the CAC is not
operating.
Indication on the unit
Supporting lens model No.
Turn “On” the CAC item.
HA16X 6.3BERM-M58
HA22X 7.8BERM-M58
HJ17EX 7.6B IASE
HJ22EX 7.6B IASE
HA16x 6.3BERM-M58
HA22x 7.8BERM-M58
HJ17ex 7.6B IASE
HJ22ex 7.6B IASE
z The menu item CAC is found in the <VF
INDICATOR> screen on the VF page.
z The letters of CAC are indicated in the left top of the
viewfinder screen.
60I
1080-59.9
CAC
AVC-I 100
‹Note
Visit our Web site at the address given below for details on
additions or changes to lenses supporting CAC.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
3.2K
1A P 0dB
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
104
To read the CAC FILE from an SD memory card
7
Select YES using the JOG dial button and then
press the JOG dial button.
1
Insert the SD memory card with the CAC FILE
downloaded from our support website.
For downloading, refer to the following URL.
The CAC FILE for the lens selected in step 4 is
recorded in memory on the unit.
If “EMPTY” is selected in MEM STORE NO: EMPTY/1/
2 --- at this time, data are recorded in available space of
the CAC FILE numbers on the unit. If “1” is selected,
the data will overwrite the contents of CAC FILE No. 1.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
2
3
Open the <CAC FILE CARD READ> screen
from the FILE page via the menu operation.
If the following messages are displayed when the JOG
dial button is pressed, the data cannot be read out.
Select “TITLE READ” using the JOG dial
button and then press the JOG dial button.
The lens product number is indicated in the TITLE
column.
Error message
Measures
READ NG
Insert an SD memory card.
NO CARD
(No SD memory card is inserted)
#
< CAC FILE CARD READ >
READ NG
NO FILE
(No file is available)
Select a file containing data and
perform the read operation
again.
CARD FILE SELECT:1
READ
DELETE
TITLE READ
READ NG
ERROR
(Data cannot be read out)
Insert an SD memory card
again, and then perform the read
operation again.
TITLE SCROLL
:01
01:HA22X7.8BERM-M58
02:HA16X6.3BERM-M58
03:HJ17EX7.6B IASE
04:HJ22EX7.6B IASE
05:NO FILE
06:NO FILE
07:NO FILE
08:NO FILE
READ NG
It is impossible to access the SD
memory card while the card is in
use. After completion of the
respective operations, perform
the read operation again.
CANNOT ACCESS
(It is impossible to access the
data)
READ NG
FILE DATA INVALID
(File data are abnormal)
The written file data have errors.
Use the proper file data.
4
5
6
Select CARD FILE SELECT using the JOG dial
button and then press the JOG dial button.
READ NG
FILE MEMORY FULL
(Memory is full)
The memory card is full, and
new data cannot be written on it.
Delete unnecessary CAC data
and then perform the read
operation again
Select the TITLE NO to be read and press the
JOG dial button.
Select READ using the JOG dial button and
then press the JOG dial button.
The following screen is displayed.
8
9
To store multiple CAC files in the unit, repeat
Steps 3 to 7.
FILE READ?
To close the menu operation, press the MENU
button.
#
YES
NO(CANCEL)
The setting menu disappears, and the current state of
the unit is displayed.
MEM STORE NO.
TITLE SCROLL
:EMPTY
:01
01:HA22X7.8BERM-M58
02:HA16X6.3BERM-M58
03:HJ17EX7.6B IASE
04:HJ22EX7.6B IASE
05:NO FILE
06:NO FILE
07:NO FILE
08:NO FILE
‹Note
The unit is capable of recording 32 CAC files. When the CAC
FILE is full, delete any of the CAC Files.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
105
To delete the CAC FILE from the unit
To delete the CAC FILE from the SD memory card
1
Open <CAC ADJ> from the MAINTENANCE
page using the menu operation.
The following screen is displayed.
1
Open <CAC FILE CARD READ> from the FILE
page using the menu operation.
The following screen is displayed.
< CAC ADJ >
#
< CAC FILE CARD READ >
#
CAC CONTROL
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE NO
:ON
:01
CARD FILE SELECT:01
READ
DELETE
TITLE READ
TITLE SCROLL
:01
TITLE SCROLL
:01
01:HA22X7.8BERM-M58
02:HA16X6.3BERM-M58
03:HJ17EX7.6B IASE
04:HJ22EX7.6B IASE
05:NO FILE
01:HA22X7.8BERM-M58
02:HA16X6.3BERM-M58
03:HJ17EX7.6B IASE
04:HJ22EX7.6B IASE
05:NO FILE
06:NO FILE
06:NO FILE
07:NO FILE
07:NO FILE
08:NO FILE
08:NO FILE
2
3
Select “OFF” in CAC CONTROL.
2
3
Select “TITLE READ” using the JOG dial
button and then press the JOG dial button.
The lens product number is displayed in the TITLE part.
Select the lens product number to be deleted
in CARD FILE NO using the JOG dial button.
Select “CARD FILE SELECT” using the JOG
dial button and then press the JOG dial
button.
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to fix the selected
operation.
Select “CARD FILE DELETE” using the JOG
dial button and then press the JOG dial
button.
4
5
Select the “TITLE NO” of the CAC FILE to be
deleted, and then press the JOG dial button.
The following screen is displayed.
Select “DELETE” using the JOG dial button
and then press the JOG dial button.
The following screen is displayed.
DELETE?
YES
#
NO
DELETE?
YES
#
NO
6
Move the arrow (cursor) to YES by turning the
JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial
button.
6
Move the arrow (cursor) to YES by turning the
JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial
button.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
106
If the following messages are displayed when the JOG dial
button is pressed, the data cannot be deleted.
When CAC FILE does not operate properly
The following error messages are displayed in the viewfinder
when CAC does not operate properly or CAC files cannot be
read properly.
Error message
DELETE NG
Measures
Insert an SD memory card.
NO CARD
(No SD memory card is inserted)
Error message
Meanings
Measures
DELETE NG
ERROR
(Data cannot be deleted)
It is assumed that the SD
memory card is defective.
Replace the card.
When the CAC FILE is Read the CAC FILE in
read from the SD
memory card to
a mode other than
EMPTY mode.
FILE MEMORY
FULL
DELETE NG
WRITE PROTECT
(The SD card is write protected)
Eject the SD memory card and
release write protection.
memory in the unit in
EMPTY mode, the
built-in memory is full.
DELETE NG
It is impossible to access the SD
memory card while the card is in
use. After completion of the
respective operations, perform
the read operation again.
When the CAC
Read the CAC FILE
that is applicable for
the lens to be used.
CANNOT ACCESS
(It is impossible to access the
data)
function is set to ON
and no CAC FILE
applicable to the
connected lens is
available. This is
displayed when the
power of the unit is
turned on.
CAC FILE DATA
NOT FOUND
DELETE NG
NO FILE
(No file is available)
Select the FILE NO. containing
astigmatism files and perform
the delete operation.
When the unit cannot This lens does not
respond to the return support CAC
data from the lens, or correction. Although it
when any responses cannot execute CAC
7
Move the arrow (cursor) to YES by turning the
JOG dial button and then press the JOG dial
button.
When the write operation is completed, the following
message is displayed.
CAC LENS DATA
INVALID
other than ones as
defined in the CAC
FILE are returned.
correction, using this
lens presents no
problems.
Initialization of the lens Turn the focus/zoom
LENS INITIALIZE position detection
ring to through the
intermediate point of
the operation range.
NOT
(focus/zoom) in the
encoder type is not
completed yet.
COMPLETED
◆Notes
DELETE OK
z When lens optical accessories (converter lens, attachment)
are installed, the CAC may not operate properly due to
changes in the optical characteristics of the lens. In this
case, turn off the CAC function.
z When focus support is used with CANON lenses, data must
be recorded after initialization in the automatic initialization
mode. The state where the focus ring is moving may be
recorded.
z When the CAC does not operate and no error message is
displayed, the version of the software for the lens may be out
of date and invalid. Please contact the lens manufacturer.
Adjustments and Settings for Recording : Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC)
107
Preparation
Power Supply
A battery pack or an external DC power supply can be used as AJ-HPX3100’s power supply.
Using a Battery Pack
Battery packs from the following manufacturers can be used:
• Anton/Bauer
• IDX
The type of the battery can be checked or changed through
the viewfinder or menu screen on the monitor.
z Pull the MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU CANCEL
switch on the camera-recorder to display at the upper right
of the viewfinder screen the currently set battery type.
z Through the BATTERY SELECT menu option, you can
check and change the battery type. The menu item
BATTERY SELECT is found in the <BATTERY/P2CARD>
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
# < BATTERY/P2CARD >
BATTERY SELECT
EXT DC IN SELECT
:DIONIC90
:AC-ADPT
BATT NEAR END ALARM :OFF
BATT NEAR END CANCEL:ON
BATT END ALARM
:ON
BATT REMAIN FULL
:70%
CARD NEAR END ALARM :ON
CARD NEAR END TIME :2min
CARD END ALARM
CARD REMAIN/
:ON
:3min/
„
„
‹Notes
z Other batteries may be used by changing the menu setting
(TYPE A item, TYPE B item, TYPE C item), but system
compatibility is not guaranteed. These menu items are found
in the <BATTERY SETTING> screen on the MAIN OPERATION
page.
z Charge the battery pack with the battery charger before
using it. (Please refer to the battery charger’s instruction
manual for information about charging.)
z When using a light (Ultralight 2), a battery of 90 Wh or higher
is recommended.
z When using studio systems (AG-BS300P/E, AG-CA300G) for
lighting, affix an AG-CA300G to the battery plate, mount the
battery, and supply the light with power from the battery
plate. If the power for lighting is provided from the light
socket on this unit, the excessive current draw from the AG-
BS300P/E and AG-CA300G during lighting may result in this
unit not starting.
Preparation: Power Supply
108
Mounting the Battery and Setting the Battery Type
Using an Anton/Bauer Battery Pack
When using a V-mount type battery pack
1
Mount the Anton/Bauer battery pack.
1
Mount the V-mount adapter plate.
Anton/Bauer
Battery Pack
Insert the battery and slide it in the direction of the
arrow.
Release lever
2
Setting the battery type.
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.
When using another battery which cannot be selected
using the BATTERY SELECT item setting, select TYPE
A, TYPE B or TYPE C, and set the items that
correspond to the characteristics of the battery. These
menu items are found in the <BATTERY SETTING>
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.
<For your information>
Removing the battery pack
Completely push down and hold the release lever on
the battery holder. Then, slide the battery pack in the
opposite direction to the arrow while holding the lever
down.
‹Note
2
Setting the battery type.
For information about the V-mount adapter plate, please
contact the store where you purchased the camera-
recorder.
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.
The menu item BATTERY SELECT is found in the
<BATTERY/P2CARD> screen on the MAIN
OPERATION page.
The following Anton/Bauer batteries can be used:
• HYTRON140
• DIONIC90
• DIONIC160
Preparation: Power Supply
109
Use of the external DC power supply
1
Connect the external DC power supply to the
DC IN socket on the unit.
‹Notes
z If both the battery pack and the external DC power
supply are connected, the electric power is supplied
from the external DC power supply. While the external
DC power supply is used, the battery can be mounted
and removed on/from the unit.
z When the external DC power supply is used, ensure
that the power switch of the external DC power supply
is turned on first and then the POWER switch on the
unit is turned on. In the case of the reverse operation, a
malfunction may occur on the unit since the output
voltage of the external DC power supply is raised
slowly.
z When using a power supply from the DC IN socket, the
light circuitry will not operate. The light circuitry can
only be operated when powered from an Anton/Bauer
battery plate.
DC IN Socket
External DC
power supply
2
3
Turn “ON” the power switch of the external DC
power supply.
(If the power switch is available on the external DC
power supply)
Turn ON the POWER switch on the unit.
Inrush current is generated when the power of the
unit is turned on. Insufficient power supply when
turning on the power may cause a malfunction. We
recommend using an external DC power supply with
double the capacity of the total power consumption
of the unit and any other connected device that is
turned by interlocking with the power on of the unit
(the viewfinder). For the DC cord, please use a dual-
core, balanced type shielded wire of at least AWG18
gauge (nominal cross section 0.824 mm2).
Confirm the pin arrangements of the DC output
connector of the external DC power supply and the
DC IN socket on the unit, and connect the proper
polarities to each other.
If the 12 V power supply is connected to the GND
connector in error, it may cause a fire or failure of
the unit.
Pin No.
Signal
1
2, 3
4
GND
—
4
1
2
3
+12V
DC IN Socket
CASE
FRAME GND
Preparation: Power Supply
110
Mounting the Lens and Performing the Flange Back
and White Shading Adjustments
Mounting the Lens
Adjusting the Lens Flange Back
If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and wide-
angle positions during zoom operations, adjust the flange
back (distance from the lens mounting surface to the image
formation surface).
1
Raise the lens clamping lever and remove the
mount cap.
Once adjusted, the flange back does not need to be re-
adjusted as long as the same lens is mounted on the camera.
Lens Clamping
Lever
‹Note
Please also refer to the lens instruction manual for directions
on adjustment and locations of individual lens parts.
1
2
Mount the lens on the camera.
Make sure you connect the lens cable.
Mount Cap
2
To mount the lens, align the indentation at the
top center of the lens mount with the center
mark of the lens.
Set the lens iris to manual, and fully open the iris.
Mark
Approximately 3m
3
4
Lower the lens clamping lever to clamp the lens.
3
4
Place the flange back adjustment chart about
3 m from the lens and adjust the lighting on
the chart to obtain an appropriate video
output level.
If the video level is too high, use the filters or the
shutter.
Loosen the F.f (Flange focus) ring clamping
screw.
Secure the cable through the cable clamp, and
plug it into the LENS connector.
‹Note
F.b (Flange back) may be indicated on some lenses.
5
6
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position,
either manually or by electric drive.
Aim the lens at the flange back adjustment
chart and turn the distance ring to bring the
chart into focus.
LENS Connector
5
Adjust the lens flange back.
7
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position
and turn the F.f ring to bring the chart into
focus.
‹Notes
z Please refer to the lens instruction manual for guidance
on lens handling.
While focusing, take care not to move the distance ring.
z When the lens is removed, install the mount cap to
protect the device.
Preparation: Mounting the Lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments
111
8
9
Repeat Steps 5 to 7 until the lens is in focus at
both the telephoto and wide-angle positions.
7
Set the lens aperture control to manual, and
adjust it so that the zebra pattern covers the
whole screen.
Firmly tighten the F.f ring clamping screw.
Check that the lens aperture is between F4 and F11.
‹Notes
Adjusting the Lens White Shading
z The zebra pattern will not cover the whole screen if
there is any unevenness in the lighting. In this case,
make adjustments to the position of the lighting, etc.
z Make adjustments to the position of the lighting, etc.
also when the lens aperture is not between F4 and F11.
z Be absolutely sure to leave the electronic shutter at
OFF.
Method to correct the waveform to be more flat by
combining the sawtooth-shaped waveform and the
parabola waveform when watching the respective
waveforms of R, G and B of the video signals.
Adjust the white shading in the following manner after
turning OFF the DS. GAIN and D.ZOOM.
8
9
1Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to “A”
or “B,” and use the AUTO W/B BAL switch
to adjust the white balance automatically
(AWB).
2Use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to adjust the
black balance automatically (ABB).
3Again, use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
adjust the white balance automatically
(AWB).
‹Note
Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near where the lens
aperture is open even when the white shading has been
adjusted. This is something that is inherent to lenses and
optical systems and is therefore not indicative of a failure or
malfunctioning.
1
2
3
4
Attach the lens to the camera.
At this stage, do not forget to connect the lens cable.
Set the electronic shutter to OFF and the gain
to “L (0 dB)”.
Repeat step 7.
10 Using the menu operation, open the <WHITE
SHADING> screen from the MAINTENANCE
page and a range of items from R H SAW item
to B V PARA item, so that the waveform is
more flat.
If the extender is attached to the lens, release
the extender function.
Open the <GAMMA> screen from the PAINT
page using the menu operation to confirm that
GAMMA MODE SEL is set to “HD”. Then, open
<VF DISPLAY> from the VF page to confirm
that ZEBRA1 DETECT and ZEBRA2 DETECT
are the same as shown in the following
illustration. If they are not the same, revise the
settings and close the menu screen.
< WHITE SHADING >
CORRECT
R H SAW
R H PARA
R V SAW
R V PARA
G H SAW
G H PARA
G V SAW
G V PARA
B H SAW
B H PARA
B V SAW
B V PARA
:ON
#
:+000
:+000
:+000
:+000
:+000
:+000
:+000
:+000
:+000
:+000
:+000
:+000
# < VF DISPLAY >
DISP CONDITION
DISP MODE
:NORMAL
:3
VF OUT
:Y
VF DTL
:05
H SAW
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
LOW LIGHT LVL
RC MENU DISP.
50M INDICATOR.
MARKER/CHAR LVL
:070%
:085%
:SPOT
:35%
:OFF
:OFF
:50%
SYNCHRO SCAN DISP. :sec
Before
After
correction
correction
5
6
Set the ZEBRA switch on the viewfinder to
ON.
H PARA
Shoot a white sheet of paper with no
unevenness of color.
‹Note
Since fluorescent lights, mercury lamps and other such
kinds of lighting tend to flicker, use a light source which
is free from flicker such as sunlight or a halogen lamp.
Preparation: Mounting the Lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments
112
11 When the lens has an extender, repeat steps 7
- 9 to enable the extender function.
The camera-recorder stores, as one lens file data item,
two different correction values for the following: a lens
with an extender, a lens with no extender.
When making the white shading correction, make the
adjustment while observing the R, G, and B waveforms in
the horizontal and vertical directions with the waveform
monitor.
This now completes the white shading adjustments.
The adjustment values are now stored in the non-volatile
memory so that even when the unit’s power is turned off,
there will be no further need to perform the white shading
adjustment.
Preparation: Mounting the Lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading Adjustments
113
Preparing for Audio Input
Take the following steps to prepare the camera for connecting audio input devices.
When Using the Front Microphone
AJ-HPX3100 can be equipped with the AJ-MC900G stereo
microphone kit (an extra-cost option).
3
4
Connect the microphone cable to the MIC IN
jack on the camera.
1
Open the microphone holder.
MIC IN Jack
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [FRONT]
depending on the audio channel to be
recorded.
2
Mount the microphone and tighten the
clamping screw.
The microphone must be attached with the UP mark on
the microphone facing up.
AUDIO IN
Switch
Clamping Screw
When Using a Wireless Receiver
When Using the Unislot Wireless Receiver
3
When using a 2-channel wireless receiver,
select “DUAL” in the WIRELESS TYPE menu
item.
The menu item is found in the <MIC/AUDIO> screen
on the MAIN OPERATION page.
1
2
Remove the cover to insert the wireless
receiver and secure it with the screws.
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [W.L.] depending
on the audio channel to be recorded.
Preparation: Preparing for Audio Input
114
When Using Audio Devices
1
2
3
Connect the audio device to the AUDIO IN jack
with the XLR cable.
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [REAR] for the
channel to which the XLR cable is connected.
Set the LINE/MIC selector switch on the rear
panel to [LINE].
LINE/MIC
Selector Switch
‹Note
This can be set to detect when a connector is inserted into the
AUDIO IN terminal, and automatically switch between signals
input to CH1/CH2 and to CH3/CH4.
> [REAR XLR AUTO CH1/2], [REAR XLR AUTO CH3/4] (page
189)
AUDIO IN Jack
AUDIO IN
Switch
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod
When mounting the camera on a tripod, use the tripod adapter supplied with the camera.
1
Mount the tripod adapter on the tripod.
Removing the Camera from the Tripod Adapter
Tripod Adapter
Tripod Adapter
Pan head
Red Lever
Black Lever
While holding the red lever down, move the black lever in the
direction of the arrow, and slide the camera backward to
remove it.
‹Note
‹Note
If the tripod adapter pin does not return to its original position
after the camera has been removed, hold the red lever down
and move the black lever in the direction of the arrow again, in
order to return the pin to its original position.
Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin
remains in the center.
Select an appropriate hole in the adapter, taking into
account the center of gravity of the camera and tripod
adapter combined.
Also, make sure that the diameter of the selected hole
matches the diameter of the pan head screw.
2
Mount the camera on the tripod adapter.
Slide the camera forward along the grooves until you
hear a “click”.
Preparation: Mounting the Camera on a Tripod
115
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
To detach the shoulder strap, first open the hooks, then
detach the strap.
Shoulder Strap
‹Note
Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached.
Press to open
the hook.
Attaching the Rain Cover
When using the SHAN-RC700 Rain Cover
Tighten the cord
Secure with the
surface fastener
Secure with the surface fastener
Preparation: Attaching the Shoulder Strap
116
Attaching the F.AUDIO LEVEL control Knob
If you use the F.Audio Level control frequently, attach the
accessory knob so that it can be easily operated.
F.Audio
LevelControl
Knob
(Accessory)
Remove the screw in the center of the F.Audio Level control,
and attach the accessory knob using the screw (included).
When attaching the knob, be sure to align the marks on the
control with the marks on the knob.
Screw
(Accessory)
Marks
Screw
Î
Connection of the DC OUT connector and the
external REC strat/stop switch
It is possible to draw 1.5 A current from the DC OUT
connector of the unit.
(Reference connection example)
Connector at the cable side
HR10A-7R-4P(73)
(Hirose Denki)
> [Connector Signals]
(page 149)
REC start/stop can be controlled by connecting an external
switch to this connector.
Since a tally lamp can be used by connecting an LED to this
connector, it is useful for shooting video when fixing the
camera on a crane.
4
1
2
3
LED
Resistance
DC OUT connector
REC start/stop
1: GND
2: TALLY OUT
Open collector output on the unit side
TALLY ON:
TALLY OFF:
Low impedance
High impedance
3: REC start/stop switch (DC 11 V - 17 V)
This is connected in parallel to the REC START button on the
unit or the VTR button on the lens
4: 12 V
‹Note
Ensure that polarity is correct before connecting an external
device, as failure to do so may result in damage.
Preparation: Attaching the F.AUDIO LEVEL control Knob
117
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
A clip is a data group that includes the images and voices
created from one shooting session, together with additional
information such as text memos and meta data.
The following manipulations can be performed using the
cursor and SET buttons, while checking the images
displayed on the LCD monitor:
z Playback, delete, copy or restore the clip.
z Add or delete a shot mark and a text memo on the clip
thumbnail.
z Copy part of a clip by using the text memo.
z Change the thumbnail image by using the text memo.
z Format P2 cards and SD memory cards.
z Uploading and editing clip metadata from the SD memory
card
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows:
THUMBNAIL
OPERATION
PROPERTY
DELETE
FORMAT
REPAIR CLIP
RE-CONNECTION
COPY
ALL CLIP
CLIP PROPERTY
SAME FORMAT CLIPS
SELECTED CLIPS
MARKED CLIPS
TEXT MEMO CLIPS
EXCH.THUMBNAIL
EXIT
CARD STATUS
SLOT CLIPS
SETUP
EXIT
INDICATOR
DATA DISPLAY
DATE FORMAT
THUMBNAIL SIZE
PLAYBACK RESUME
THUMBNAIL INIT
EXIT
DEVICES
PROPERTY SETUP
EXIT
HDD
META DATA
EXPORT
LOAD
EXPLORE
SETUP
EXIT
RECORD
USER CLIP NAME
INITIALIZE
PROPERTY
LANGUAGE
EXIT
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
118
UPDATING..:
Indicated when the camera-recorder is
Thumbnail Screen
updating the screen or reading data. When
the screen is being updated, the rotating icon
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail
screen on the LCD monitor. Pressing the THUMBNAIL
button again returns the display to the regular display. When
switching is done from the regular screen display to the
thumbnail screen display, all the clips will be displayed on
the thumbnail screen.
is indicated.
>[Switching the Thumbnail Display] (page 122)
2. Slot numbers and HDD status
This section indicates on which P2 card the pointed clip
is recorded. The number of the slot that contains the
appropriate P2 card is indicated in yellow. If the clip is
recorded on more than one P2 card, then the numbers
of all slots that contain the appropriate cards are
indicated. The numbers of the other slots are shown in
white if they contain P2 cards.
Pressing the MENU button allows you to navigate the
thumbnail menu.
‹Note
When the TCG switch is set to [SET] to set the time code and
user bits or when the camera menu is open, the THUMBNAIL
button does not work.
2
When the following P2 card is inserted, the slot number
is displayed with a pink frame.
1
z RUN DOWN CARD
(A P2 card on which the maximum number of
overwrites has been exceeded.)
16
z DIR ENTRY NG CARD
(A P2 card on which the directory structure is not
supported.)
ꢀ
The USB HDD section is indicated as follows:
z Other than the USB HOST mode: gray
z Not connected in USB HOST mode: gray
z HDD recognized and usable in USB HOST mode:
white
3
z HDD recognized and thumbnails shown in USB
HOST mode: yellow
z HDD recognized and not usable in USB HOST: red
4
6
5
7
Thumbnail screen
10
9
3. Time Display
8
You can set this to display the time code at the start of
clip recording (TC), the user bits at the start of clip
recording (UB), the shooting time (TIME), the shooting
date (DATE), the shooting time date and time (DATE
TIME), or the user clip name (USER CLIP NAME).
11 12 13 14 15
4. Recording mode
1. Display Mode
The recording mode for the clip on which the pointer is
located is indicated.
The type of the thumbnail indicated on the display and
the types of the other information screens are indicated.
ALL:
SAME FORMAT:
Clips in the same format as the system format
Display all clips.
5. System format
The format for the clip on which the pointer is located is
indicated.
(SYSTEM MODE item, REC FORMAT item,
AUDIO SMPL RES item) are shown.
>[Selecting a recording signal and method]
(page 47)
6. Duration
The duration of the clip on which the pointer is located is
indicated.
SELECT:The clips selected with the SET button are
shown.
7. USB HOST mode indicator
Indicated when the mode has been switched to USB
HOST.
MARKER: Display clips with shot marks.
TEXT MEMO:
Display clips with text memo data.
SLOT n: Display clips in the specified P2 card.
(n: 1 or 2, which indicates Slots 1 or 2.)
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
119
8. Clip Number
The numbers set by the camera for all the clips
recognised correctly by the P2 card. These numbers are
allocated in chronological order, by shooting dates and
times.
If clips cannot be played because of different recording
formats, they are displayed in red.
9.
Defective Clip Indicator and
Unknown Clip indicator
This marker is displayed for defective clips, which may
result from a variety of causes, e.g., powering-down
during recording.
Clip with yellow defective clip indicators can be restored
in some cases.
>[Restoring Clips] (page 126)
A clip displayed with a red corrupt marker cannot be
restored and must be deleted. If the clip cannot be
deleted, format the P2 card.
is displayed for clips such as those which differ in
format from the P2 standard.
10. Incomplete Clip Indicator
Indicates that although a clip is recorded across multiple
P2 cards, one of these cards is not inserted into a P2
card slot.
11. Shot Mark Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark
attached.
>[Shot Mark] (page 123)
12. Indicator for clips with proxy
This marker is displayed for clips with proxy attached.
13. Text Memo Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a text memo
attached.
14. Edit Copied Clip Indicator
This marker is displayed on a clip when the model
supports edit copy, such as the AJ-HPM200. For more
information about edit copying, see the instruction
manual for a mode that supports edit copying.
15. Wide Clip Indicator
This marker is displayed for clips recorded with the 16:9
aspect ratio. However, it does not accompany clips in
HD format.
16.Thumbnail Scroll Bar
Indicates which part of the whole thumbnail is currently
being viewed.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
120
Selecting Thumbnails
Playing back Clips
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the
thumbnail screen.
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
1
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer
(yellow frame) to the desired clip and press
the SET button.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer
over the desired clip.
The frame around the selected thumbnail changes to a
blue frame. Press the SET button again to deselect the
clip.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
z The clip under the pointer will be played back on the
LCD monitor.
2
Additional clips can be selected by repeating
Step 1.
z After playback of the clip selected with the cursor has
completed, subsequent clips are played back in
order. After the last clip has been played back, this
returns to the thumbnail screen.
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the
thumbnail screen for playback.
>[Switching the Thumbnail Display] (page 122)
‹Notes
z When playing back clips, it is not necessary to “select”
the clips (blue frames around the thumbnails).
z Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be
played.
‹Notes
z While holding down the SHIFT button, use the cursor
buttons up/down (#/$) to move the pointer to the first or
last clips.
z After selecting the clip, move the pointer to another clip, and
while holding down the SHIFT button, press the SET button.
This will select all clips from the previously set position to
the current position.
z While holding down the SHIFT button, press the EXIT button
to collectively deselect the selected clips.
z During playback, pressing the REW button starts 4a
speed reverse playback, and the FF button starts 4a
speed fast playback. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to
return to normal playback.
z During clip playback, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button
will temporarily stop (pause) the process.
During a pause, pressing the REW button moves the
pause position to the beginning of the clip. Pressing the
REW button again moves the pause position to the
beginning of the previous clip.
During a pause, pressing the FF button moves the pause
position to the beginning of the next clip.
SHIFT
Button
z Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the
playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen.
THUMBNAIL
MENU
LCD Monitor
Button
‹Notes
THUMBNAIL
Button
z When playback is stopped, the position of the pointer moves
to the clip that was being played back, regardless of where
the playback started.
EXIT Button
CURSOR Buttons
z Press the PLAY/PAUSE button again to start playback from
the beginning of the clip under the pointer. To continue
playing from where previously stopped, turn the PLAYBACK
RESUME setting “ON” in [Setting the Thumbnail Display
Mode] (page 132).
SET Button
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
121
Switching the Thumbnail Display
3
Select THUMBNAIL from the thumbnail menu.
Switch the thumbnail display by selecting one of the
following items:
The display can be switched so that only those clips
matching the specified conditions are displayed in the
thumbnail screen.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button.
The thumbnail menu appears.
ALL CLIP:
Display all clips.
SAME FORMAT CLIPS:
Displays clips of the current system format.
SELECTED CLIPS:
Display randomly selected clips.
MARKED CLIPS:
Display clips with shot marks attached. At this time the
thumbnails appear in selected order.
TEXT MEMO CLIPS:
THUMBNAIL
MENU button
Display clips with text memo data attached.
SLOT CLIPS:
Display clips recorded in the P2 card inserted in the
specified slot.
When this item is selected, SLOT1 to SLOT2 are
displayed as a sub-menu. Select the desired slot to
display the clips.
SETUP:
Please refer to [Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode]
(page 132) for information about this item.
EXIT:
Close the sub-menu.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
122
Changing Thumbnails
Shot Mark
It is possible to replace thumbnails with images that include
previously attached text memos while images are recorded
or played back.
A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to distinguish
this clip from the others.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
1
Add text memos to images that you intend to
change.
Refer to [Text Memo Function] (page 45) for the method
to add text memos.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer
over the clip to which you want to attach a
shot mark.
2
3
Select THUMBNAIL > TEXT MEMO CLIPS to
display thumbnails of the clips with text
memos.
3
Press the SHOT MARKER button or button to
which the shot mark function has been
assigned (RET button of the lens).
z This adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the clip at
the pointer position.
z To delete a shot mark, place the pointer on the clip a
second time and press the SHOT MARKER button or
button to which the shot mark function has been
assigned (RET button of the lens).
Place the pointer on the clip of the thumbnail
that you intend to change, and then press
SET. Move the pointer to the text memo
display on the lower row.
4
Select the thumbnail that you intend to
replace, place the pointer on it, and then
select OPERATION > EXCH. THUMBNAIL on
the thumbnail menu.
Shot Marker Button
‹Notes
z A shot mark can be attached during recording.
z Adding shot marks after recording stops, attaches the shot
mark to the most recently recorded clip.
> [Shot Mark Function] (page 46)
z When adding a shot mark to (or deleting the shot mark from)
a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards, do this with all
these P2 cards inserted into P2 card slots.
5
Press SET button. When the YES/NO
confirmation window is displayed, select YES
by using the cursor button and the SET
button.
The menu closes and the thumbnail for the clip is
replaced.
‹Note
Display clip properties by selecting PROPERTY > CLIP
PROPERTY on the thumbnail menu to confirm the position of
the thumbnail (the number of frames from the top of the clip).
Since thumbnails come generally from the top of the clip, [0] is
displayed.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
123
Playing back a clip at the position where a text
memo is recorded
Text Memo
During recording or playback, you can add text memos to
clips. Text memos can be used to play back clips at some
point or break clips into chunks and copy the necessary
portions.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select THUMBNAIL > TEXT MEMO CLIPS
from the thumbnail menu.
Adding a text memo
Text memos can be added in one of the following ways.
The clip thumbnails with text memos attached are
displayed in the upper section of the LCD monitor. The
lower section of the LCD monitor shows information
about the text memo on the clip selected by the pointer.
z Press the TEXT MEMO button or button to which the shot
mark function has been assigned (RET button of the lens)
has been assigned during recording or playback.
This adds text memos where respective button was
pressed.
z Pressing the TEXT MEMO button or button to which the
shot mark function has been assigned (RET button of the
lens) when a thumbnail screen is open, adds a text memo
at the beginning of a clip.
‹Note
One clip can have up to 100 text and voice memos in
combination. Note that camera-recorder is not capable of
adding or showing voice memos.
Thumbnail
Display
Shows the still image that the
text memo is related to.
Selected text memo clips (blue)
and total clips (white)
3
Move the pointer over the clip that contains
the desired text memo to playback and press
the SET button.
The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD monitor.
TEXT MEMO Button
The pointer moves down.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
124
Using a text memo to break a clip and copy the
necessary portion
4
With the pointer located in the lower part,
move the pointer to the desired text memo
number using the cursor right and left buttons
("!). Then, press the PLAY button.
z Playback will start from the time code position of the
text memo where the pointer is located. If the STOP
button is pressed during playback or the playback
has finished at the end of the clip, then the thumbnail
screen appears again with the pointer replaced with
the text memo where the playback started.
z While holding down the SHIFT button, use the cursor
buttons up/down (#/$) to move the pointer to the
first or last text memos.
z Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select EXIT
or press the EXIT button to return the pointer to the
upper part of the thumbnail screen.
1
2
Select a desired text memo in a clip by
carrying out steps 1-3 for [Playing back a clip
at the position where a text memo is recorded]
(page 124).
Move the pointer to the desired text memo,
and then press the SET button.
You can select more than one text memo.
3
4
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
OPERATION > COPY.
User the cursor buttons and SET buttons to
select the destination slot. Then, select YES
z Copying starts.
z The portion between the selected text memo and the
next one is copied.
‹Note
z Pressing the REC button in the text memo screen will not
start recording.
z For AVC-Intra format clips that cannot be played back, text
memo thumbnails cannot be displayed, and may be shown
as a
icon.
If no text memo is found after the selected one, then
all part after the selected text memo is copied.
z If multiple text memos are selected, the selected
sections are copied.
Deleting a text memo
z When the clip is being copied, the camera-recorder
indicates the progress of the copy process and
cancellation status. To discontinue the copy process,
press the SET button. Then, a YES/NO confirmation
screen is displayed. Use the cursor buttons and SET
button to select YES.
1
Select the desired text memo by carrying out
steps 1-3 for [Playing back a clip at the
position where a text memo is recorded] (page
124).
2
3
Move the pointer to the desired text memo,
and then press the SET button.
‹Note
In clip division and copying using the text memo function, the
area copied may be automatically modified depending on the
recording format of the clip.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
OPERATION > DELETE from the thumbnail
menu.
YES and NO appear to confirm deletion. Use the cursor
buttons and the SET button to select YES.
The text memo is deleted.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
125
Deleting Clips
Restoring Clips
Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden
powering-down during recording, or removal of the P2 card
being accessed.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
‹Note
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer
over the clip you want to delete and press the
SET button to select the clip.
Only those clips with yellow corrupt clip markers can be
restored. Delete the clips with red corrupt clip markers. If the
clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective-clip
indicator may change from yellow to red, resulting in inability
to restore the clips.
3
4
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION > DELETE from the
thumbnail menu.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
The following screen appears. Use the cursor
buttons and the SET button to select YES.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer
over the clip you want to restore (defective
clips are indicated by corrupt clip marks) and
press the SET button to select the clip.
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button, and
select OPERATION > REPAIR CLIP from the
thumbnail menu.
When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm that
you want to repair the clip, use a cursor button and the
SET button to select YES if you want to restore the clip.
The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue-green
frames) are deleted by this operation.
‹Note
To interrupt deleting, press the SHIFT and EXIT buttons or the
SET button to cancel the operation. Partially deleted clips
cannot be restored by canceling.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
126
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION > COPY from the
thumbnail menu.
z Select Slot 1-2 or SD memory card as the
destination.
Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded on
multiple P2 cards (connected clips) are separately copied to
different cards. Reconnection function generates one clip
(the original, connected clip) from incomplete clips.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Use the cursor and SET button to select
incomplete clips to reconnect.
Usually, thumbnails of incomplete clips (clips with
marker) are displayed in line.
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION > RE-CONNECTION from
the thumbnail menu.
z When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm that
you want to copy the clip, use a cursor button and the
SET button to select YES if you want to copy the clip.
When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm that
you want to reconnect the clip, use a cursor button and
the SET button to select YES if you want to reconnect
the clip.
‹Notes
Clips that are connected as a group must be grouped together
or they will be displayed as incomplete clips.
Copying Clips
Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card or SD memory
card in the desired slot.
‹Notes
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
z Do not turn off the power or remove a P2 card while data is
being copied. Doing so may cause the P2 card to fail. If you
should accidentally perform one of the above operations,
defective clips will be generated. Delete them, and then copy
them again.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to
the desired clip and press the SET button.
z When clips are copied to P2 cards, all the information on the
clips is copied. However, when they are copied to the SD
memory card *, video and sound information is not copied,
only thumbnails, clip metadata, icons, Voice Memo, proxy,
and real-time metadata.
z When there is insufficient recording capacity on the
destination, the message “LACK OF REC CAPACITY!” is
displayed, and copying will not proceed. When clips to be
copied include some with defects, the message “CANNOT
ACCESS!” is displayed, and copying will not proceed. If
selected clips include any that are already recorded on the
destination P2 card, copying will not proceed.
z To interrupt copying, press the SHIFT button + EXIT button,
or the SET button. Clips currently being copied to the
destination will be deleted.
‹Notes
If recording using the one-clip REC function in which the clip
can be combined with the previous clip (when “1¢CLIP” is
displayed), then copying of clips is not possible. Close the
menu, hold down the STOP button for 2 seconds to end this
connection, and try again.
z When identical clips exist on the destination card, the
“OVERWRITE?” is displayed. Select “YES” or “NO”.
*
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see <Cautions
in using SD memory cards> (page 22).
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
127
Clip Meta Data items
Setting of Clip Meta Data
Clip Meta Data includes the following items: Underlined
items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on the
SD memory card. Other items are set automatically during
shooting. Using the latest update version of P2 viewer,
metadata upload files can be written to SD memory cards
using a PC. Download the latest version of the P2 viewer
from the following URL and install it to your PC.
Information such as the name of person who shot the video,
the name of the reporter, the shooting location, or a text
memo can be read from the SD memory card, and can be
recorded as Clip Meta Data.
Reading Clip Meta Data (metadata upload)
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
1
2
Insert the SD memory card that contains the
Clip Meta Data (metadata upload file).
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see <Cautions in
using SD memory cards> (page 22).
‹Note
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
The file which was edited by except P2 viewer is displayed as
“UNKNOWN DATA”, and may not be read.
‹Note
GLOBAL CLIP ID:
Press the thumbnail button while pulling MARKER SEL,
MODE CHK / MENU CANCEL switch when a thumbnail is
displayed to move to Step 4.
Displays the global clip ID, which indicates the
shooting status of the clip.
USER CLIP NAME:
*1
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
Select META DATA > LOAD from the
thumbnail menu, and press the SET button.
Displays the clip name specified by the user.
VIDEO: Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate of the clip),
[PULL DOWN], and [ASPECT RATIO].
AUDIO: [SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of
recorded sound) and [BITS PER SAMPLE]
(digitized bit[s] of recorded sound).
ACCESS: Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded the
clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the clip was
recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE] (date of the
latest update of the clip), and [LAST UPDATE
PERSON] (person who made the latest update of
the clip).
DEVICE: Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the device
manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial number of
the device) and [MODEL NAME] (model name of
the device).
SHOOT: Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person who
shot the video), [START DATE] (start date of
shooting), [END DATE] (end date of shooting),
and [LOCATION] ALTITUDE/LONGITUDE/
LATITUDE/SOURCE/PLACE NAME (altitude,
longitude, latitude, and source of the information
and name of the location).
4
Names of metadata upload files stored on the
SD memory card are displayed. Select the
desired files using the cursor buttons, and
choose YES.
z Upload starts.
z Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power is
turned off.
z For confirmation of uploaded data, see [Checking
and modifying read metadata] (page 129).
SCENARIO:
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO.], and
[TAKE NO.].
NEWS: Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter),
[PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and
[OBJECT] (object of shooting).
MEMO*2: Displays [NO.] (the number of the text memo),
[OFFSET] (location of the frame where the text
memo is added), [PERSON] (person who
recorded the text memo added to the clip), and
[TEXT] (contents of the text memo).
‹Notes
z During display of names of metadata, press the cursor
buttons (!) to switch to display of file names. Press the
cursor button (") to return to display of metadata names.
z Even if set to display Japanese, other than ASCII characters
in the names of metadata in the file list display will not be
displayed, and will instead be shown as “¢”. However, move
the cursor over the file to display the Japanese on the right.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
128
THUMBNAIL:
Displays the location of the frame (frame offset)
4
While viewing the settings for the metadata,
use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to
the desired option. Then, press the SET
button.
z A software keyboard screen is displayed, allowing
you to modify the setting.
and the size (height and width) of the image
selected as the thumbnail image.
*1 The USER CLIP NAME recording method is
selectable. For details, refer to [Selecting the USER
CLIP NAME recording method] (page 130).
*2 Be sure to enter TEXT when entering MEMO. It is not
possible to record only PERSON or OFFSET.
Checking and modifying read metadata
The camera-recorder allows you to check the details of read
metadata.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
METADATA > PROPERTY from the thumbnail
menu.
z While holding down the SHIFT button, use the cursor
buttons up/down (#/$) to move to the start or end of
the content to change.
The screen like this is displayed:
To set whether or not the uploaded metadata is
recorded
Set ON/OFF in META DATA > RECORD from the
thumbnail menu. The factory setting is OFF.
3
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer.
Then, press the SET button.
This allows you to view the settings of the read
metadata.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
129
Example of recording (DVCPRO HD) a clip on one P2 card:
Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording
method
REC start
Recording duration = Approx. 7 min.
Recording pause
Select META DATA > USER CLIP NAME from the
thumbnail menu to select the recording method. Two options
are available: TYPE1 and TYPE2.
Clip 1
Clip 2
COUNT value
= 0001
COUNT value
= 0002
z TYPE1 (Factory setting)
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
2 min.
5 min.
If clip metadata has been read in Uploaded data
Example of recording a clip on two P2 cards:
REC start
If no clip metadata has been read
Same as GLOBAL CLIP ID
in or if the setting for recording
(UMID data)
Recording pause
clip metadata has been turned off
Clip 1
COUNT value
= 0003
Clip 2
COUNT value
= 0004
z TYPE2
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
2nd card
1st card
Uploaded data + COUNT
value*
If clip metadata has been read in
If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the example
above or their properties are indicated using a P2 device,
the thumbnail and COUNT value of clip 1 will be displayed.
If no clip metadata has been read
in or if the setting for recording Same as CLIP NAME
clip metadata has been turned off
Clear the uploaded metadata
* The COUNT value is indicated as a four-digit number.
The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip is
captured if clip metadata has been read in and TYPE2 has
been selected as the recording method.
Select META DATA > INITIALIZE from the thumbnail menu,
and press the SET button. Select “YES” when the
confirmation screen is displayed.
The COUNT value can be reset using the following
procedure.
‹Notes
z Japanese or Chinese characters indicated in English or other
characters that cannot be indicated in English will not
display properly; they will be indicated as ¢.
z The letters which can be input with AJ-HPX3100 are only the
alphanumeric. AJ-HPX3100 cannot input Japanese and
Chinese.
Select META DATA > PROPERTY from the thumbnail
menu, then select USER CLIP NAME to display the menu
shown below. Select “COUNT RESET” with the cursor and
press the SET button to reset the COUNT value to 1.
‹Note
When a P2 card with a memory capacity of 8 GB or more is
used in camera-recorder and a one-time continuous recording
exceeds the prescribed duration (DVCPRO HD and the AVC-
Intra 100: about 5 minutes; DVCPRO50 and the AVC-Intra 50:
about 10 minutes; DVCPRO or for DV: about 20 minutes) or
when a one-time recording extends over more than one P2
card, the recording concerned will automatically be undertaken
as a separate clip. At this time, each clip will be provided with
its own COUNT value.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
130
Formatting a P2 Card
Formatting SD memory cards
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail
screen. With an SD memory card inserted into the camera-
recorder, perform the following operation:
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION > FORMAT from
thethumbnail menu.
z When the screen shown below appears, select the
slot number of the P2 card you want to format and
press the SET button.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION > FORMAT from the
thumbnail menu.
z Select EXIT if formatting is not required.
z The following screen appears. Select “SD CARD”.
z Select “EXIT” if formatting is not required.
3
The following screen appears. Use the cursor
buttons and the SET button to select YES.
3
The following screen appears. Use the cursor
buttons and the SET button to select YES.
The selected P2 card is formatted.
The SD memory card is formatted.
‹Note
Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
‹Notes
z SD memory cards can also be formatted from the menu
screen.
> [To format an SD memory card] (page 92).
z Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
131
Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode
THUMBNAIL SIZE:
For the size of thumbnails displayed on one screen,
either LARGE (3 a 2 thumbnails displayed) or
NORMAL (4 a 3 thumbnails displayed) can be
selected. The factory default value is NORMAL.
PLAYBACK RESUME:
The thumbnail display mode can be customised to suit your
preferences.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
Selecting a position to restart playback after stopping
playback on the thumbnails screen using the STOP
button.
ON: Playback starts from the stop position.
OFF: Playback starts from the beginning of the clip
indicated by the pointer.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select THUMBNAIL > SETUP from
thethumbnail menu.
Note that if the pointer is moved after stopping
playback, the playback will restart from the beginning
of the clip indicated by the pointer regardless of this
setting. Also, attempting to play back from the end of
all the available clips will cause the screen to flash
momentarily, indicating that the there are no more
clips which can be played back.
The following screen appears.
THUMBNAIL INIT:
Return the above thumbnail display settings to
default. Move the cursor to this option, and press the
SET button. Select “YES” when the confirmation
screen is displayed.
EXIT:
Returns to the previous menu.
INDICATOR:
Select which indicators you want to show on
thumbnails and which you want to hide.
• ALL HIDE:
ON: All indicators (MARKER, TEXT MEMO,
WIDE, PROXY) are not displayed.
OFF: Indication/No indication will be set
depending on the following menu. The
factory settings are as follows.
• MARKER:
Switches the shot mark marker between indication
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is
ON (indication).
• TEXT MEMO:
Switches the text memo marker between indication
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is
ON (indication).
• WIDE:
Switches the wide marker between indication and
no indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is ON
(indication).
• PROXY:
Switches the proxy marker between indication and
no indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is ON
(indication).
DATA DISPLAY:
The time display field of the clip offers a choice of
Time Code (TC), User Bits (UB), Shooting Time
(TIME), Shooting Date (DATE), Shooting Time and
Date (DATE TIME) or USER CLIP NAME. The
factory setting is Time Code.
DATE FORMAT:
You can specify the display order for the shooting
date as either Year/Month/Day (Y-M-D), Month/Day/
Year (M-D-Y) or Day/Month/Year (D-M-Y). The
factory setting is Month/Day/Year. This setting is
reflected in the recording date shown in the clip
property and the shooting date shown when DATE is
selected under the item DATA DISPLAY.
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
132
Properties
5. Clip Meta Data
Displays more detailed data about the clip. Use the
cursor buttons to move the pointer, and press the SET
button to check the detailed content. The underlined
items are automatically set during shooting.
>[Setting of Clip Meta Data] (page 128)
The clip’s properties and the P2 card’s status are displayed.
It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip metadata while
clip properties are displayed.
Clip Property
Modification of recorded clip metadata
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY > CLIP
PROPERTY. The following screen appears.
1
2
Display the window for detailed clip metadata
that you intend to modify in the clip properties
window.
3
1
2
Place the cursor on the item to be modified
using the cursor button.
The metadata that can be modified are shown like
[CREATOR] in the following figure.
5
4
1. Clip Number
2. Thumbnail
3. Clip Information
Indicates the indicators added to the clip and the
number of text and voice memos added to the clip.
The
mark appears if the clip is recorded on a write-
3
Press the SET button
z The input window (soft keyboard) for modifying
metadata is displayed.
protected P2 card.
‹Note
z Use the keyboard to modify the metadata.
AJ-HPX3100 is not capable of recording or playing back
voice memos.
4. Clip Information
Displays detailed information about the clip.
CLIP NAME:
Display clip names.
START TC:
The time code value at the start of the
recording.
START UB:
The user bit value at the start of the recording.
DATE: The date of the recording.
TIME:
DURATION:
The time length of the clip.
V-FORMAT:
The recording format for the clip.
FRAME RATE:
The frame rate for the playback.
REC RATE:
The recording frame rate is displayed. (Only
The time at the start of the recording.
The keyboard operation is the same as [Checking and
modifying read metadata] (page 129).
4
Press OK on the keyboard to write the
modified metadata on the clip and return to
the metadata window.
displayed when using the VFR function to
record in Native mode)
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
133
‹Notes
Contents of P2 Card Status Display Settings
z Deleting only the respective items of LOCATION
(recording location data) in SHOOT is not possible. By
setting ALTITUDE to empty, other LONGITUDE/
LATITUDE items are collectively deleted.
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY > CARD
STATUS. The following screen appears.
When “REMAIN” is selected:
z The metadata for a clip with the
incomplete clip
1
2
indicator cannot be modified. For the clips recorded on
multiple P2 cards, modify the metadata while all P2 cards
are inserted.
z Any MEMO with 101 characters or more cannot be
modified.
3
5
4
P2 Card Status Display
_P2 Card Status Display Settings
Select PROPERTY > CARD STATUS from the thumbnail
menu to set the desired indication mode (remaining free
space or used memory capacity) for the P2 card status
display.
1. Write-protect Mark
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.
The
mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
2. P2 Card Status (remaining free space)
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is
Press the MENU button and select
PROPERTY > PROPERTY SETUP > P2
CARD CAP from the thumbnail menu.
The following screen appears. Select the P2 card
status display settings from the P2 CARD CAP menu
option.
indicated by a bar graph and percentage. The bar graph
indicator moves to the left as the remaining free space
decreases.
The following indications may appear, depending on the
card status:
FORMAT ERROR:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
NOT SUPPORTED:
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
NO CARD:
P2 cards are not inserted.
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2 card
for data you want to access and press the SET button to
display detailed information about the P2 card to check
individual information such as the serial number and the
user ID.
3. P2 Card Remaining Capacity/Total Capacity
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total
capacity in minutes. The total of the remaining memory
capacity for each P2 card that is displayed may not
match the actual total remaining memory capacity for
the P2 cards because only the figure in minute is
displayed.
REMAIN:
Show remaining free space on the P2 card as the P2
card status display. (Factory setting)
USED:
Show used memory capacity on the P2 card as the P2
card status display.
4. Total remaining free space for the slot
Displays the total remaining free space for all 2 slots.
Please note that the remaining capacity of a write-
protected P2 card is not included in the total remaining
capacity.
5. Warning symbol
When the following P2 card is detected, the symbol is
displayed.
RUN DOWN CARD:
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card
has been exceeded.
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported.
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed
information indication in [2.P2 Card Status (remaining
free space)].
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
134
When “USED” is selected:
SD memory card Status Display
1
2
The status display enables a confirmation of the SD memory
card formatted condition, available memory capacity etc.
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY > DEVICES
> SD CARD.
3
SD STANDARD:
Indicates that an SD memory card is formatted
according to the SD/SDHC standard.
SUPPORTED: Complies with SD/SDHC
NOT SUPPORTED: Does not comply with
SD/SDHC
5
4
USED:
Used capacity (bytes)
BLANK: Free space (bytes)
TOTAL: Total capacity (bytes)
NUMBER OF CLIPS:
The number of clips on an SD memory card when
clips have been copied to an SD memory card.
PROTECT:
Write protected
1. Write-protect Mark
The
mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
2. P2 Card Status (used memory capacity)
The used memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated
by a bar graph and a percentage figure. The bar graph
indicator moves to the right as the used memory
capacity increases.
The following indications may appear, depending on the
card status:
FORMAT ERROR:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
NOT SUPPORTED:
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
NO CARD:
P2 cards are not inserted.
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2 card
for data you want to access and press the SET button to
display detailed information about the P2 card to check
individual information such as the serial number and the
user ID.
3. P2 Card memory capacity/Total Capacity
Displays the used memory capacity on a P2 card and
the total capacity, in minutes. Because fractions are
truncated, the figure shown for used memory capacity
on a P2 card may differ from the figure for total capacity.
The used memory capacity of a write-protected P2 card
is displayed as 100%.
4. Total used memory capacity for all slots
Displays the total used memory capacity for all 2 slots.
5. Warning symbol
When the following P2 card is detected, the symbol is
displayed.
RUN DOWN CARD:
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card
has been exceeded.
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported.
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card detailed
information indication in [2.P2 Card Status (used
memory capacity)].
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails: Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
135
Connection with external device
Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
Connection with a PC in the USB DEVICE mode
By connecting AJ-HPX3100 with an external PC using USB 2.0, the P2 card connected to AJ-HPX3100 can be used as a
mass storage device.
‹Notes
Procedures for establishing a connection with a PC
z A USB driver must be installed on the PC.
z AJ-HPX3100 is only applicable to USB 2.0. Use a
personal computer that supports USB 2.0.
z Only one unit at a time must be connected to the PC via
USB.
z The P2 card must not be removed when it is connected
via USB.
z While a USB connection is established, the P2 card’s
access LED should not be lit except when access is
being carried out.
1
Connect the USB 2.0 cable to the USB 2.0 port.
‹Notes
z The USB 2.0 cable is not included with the camera-
recorder. Please use a commercially available USB 2.0
cable (shield with a ferrite core).
z The camera supports USB 2.0 cable lengths up to 5
meters. However, we recommend use of a USB cable
shorter than 3 meters.
z When a USB device is active, recording, playback, or
navigation through clip thumbnails is disabled.
During a USB connection, the USB LED on the side
panel stays illuminated. Also, “USB DEVICE” is
displayed in the system information/warning area in the
viewfinder.
When the connection is not correctly established, both
of these indications blink.
USB 2.0 port
(DEVICE)
2
Navigate the menu to open the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
Set the PC MODE SELECT menu option to USB DEV.
and the PC MODE option to ON.
USB LED
#
< SYSTEM MODE >
SYSTEM MODE
REC SIGNAL
REC FORMAT
CAMERA MODE
SCAN REVERSE
:1080i-59.94i
:CAM
:AVC-I100/60i
:60i
:OFF
AUDIO SMPL RES :16BIT
PC MODE SEL
PC MODE
:USB HOST
:OFF
#
‹Note
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢂ ꢃ ꢄ ꢁ ꢅ ꢆ ꢇ ꢈ 8 ꢆ
The function of the menu option USB may be assigned to
a desired user button by using any one of the menu
options USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW, USER2 SW, SHOT
MARK (USER3) or TEXT MEMO (USER4). These menu
items are found in the <USER SW> screen on the CAM
OPERATION page.
ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢉ ꢁ ꢁ
ꢊ ꢋ ꢋ ꢋ ꢋ ꢁ ꢋ ꢋ ꢋ ꢌ
ꢁ
ꢄ
ꢐ
ꢊ ꢁ ꢍ ꢁ ꢊ ' ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ
! ꢋ ꢋ ꢋ ꢋ ꢁ ꢋ ꢋ ꢋ ꢌ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢊ # ꢁ ꢎ ꢏ ꢏ
ꢁ
3
Terminating USB mode.
Use one of the following three methods.
z Turn the POWER switch of this unit OFF.
z Set the PC MODE item to “OFF” from the menu
operations.
z Press the USER button to which PC MODE has been
assigned.
To make a USB connection, you must first install the P2
software on the supplied CD-ROM on the computer. Select
the “AJ-HPX3100” driver. This USB driver supports only
the Windows operating system. Refer to the Installation
Manual for the details.
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
136
USB HOST mode
In this mode, it is possible to connect to a hard disk drive (HDD), store card data (EXPORT: Refer to "Writing data on a hard
disk drive" (page 140)), view thumbnails of stored clips (EXPLORE: Refer to "Viewing hard disk drive information" (page
137)), and write data back to P2 cards (IMPORT: Refer to "Writing data back to P2 cards" (page 140)).
Switching to the USB HOST mode
1
By navigating the menu, set the PC MODE
SELECT menu option on the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen to “USB HOST”, then the PC
MODE option to “ON”.
z This will place the camera-recorder in USB HOST
mode.
z When the camera-recorder is in USB HOST mode,
the viewfinder indicates “USB HOST” and the USB
LED on the side panel stays illuminated. If the hard
disk drive is not properly connected, both indications
blink.
z When a user button is assigned the PC MODE on/off
switching capability, you can press that user button to
switch between the normal and USB HOST modes.
>[Assigning Functions to USER Buttons] (page 55)
USB HOST display
‹Notes
z In USB HOST mode, clips on P2 cards can be displayed but
video from the camera or an external device cannot be
recorded. Clips written to a hard disk must be written back to
a P2 card before it can be played back.
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
> [Writing data back to P2 cards] (page 140).
z
Go to the thumbnail screen. Check to see that the
z To return to normal mode from USB HOST mode, turn OFF
the PC MODE item or press the USER button so that the PC
MODE ON/OFF function is assigned to a state where the
thumbnail screen is closed.
screen indicates “USB HOST” in the lower right corner.
z When a hard disk drive is connected, the HDD
indication in the upper right corner stays illuminated.
However, if this indicator illuminates red, it means
that the hard disk drive is not in a usable state.
Using the USB HOST mode
Usable hard disk drives
Viewing hard disk drive information
z Hard disk drives connectable via USB 2.0
z The units compatible with the storage unit that has
Panasonic USB I/F
You can view the information on the hard disk drive
connected via USB with the following steps.
Refer to the support site at the following Website for the
compatible units.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
1
2
3
4
Switch the mode to USB HOST.
> [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 137)
Connect the hard disk drive to the camera-
recorder via USB 2.0.
‹Notes
z While the USB HOST mode supports USB bus power (5V,
0.5 A), some hard disk drives may not activate. If this is
the case, power must be supplied in a different way.
z Do not connect more than one drive even through a hub or
any other device.
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen is displayed.
Even with devices other than a hard disk drive, do not
connect to the drive together with the hard disk drive
through a hub.
z The unit does not support a hard disk drive of 2 TB (2048
GB) or more.
Press the MENU button and select HDD >
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu.
The screen provides the information about the hard
disk drive.
z To prevent copying or formatting problems from occurring
during connection to a hard disk drive, be sure that the
camera’s battery is sufficiently charged or use the AC
adapter.
z Versions 2.¢¢ and later of the P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G)
support USB host mode for this unit.
Versions 1.¢¢ cannot connect. Please upgrade.
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
137
For Type S or P2 STORE
1. PARTITION
This section indicates the type of the hard disk drive.
The available functions depend on the type of hard disk
drive.
7
8
9
HDD type
Feature
Available functions
1
2
TYPE S
A special format that
Thumbnail viewing,
allows high-speed writ- writing and writing back
ing and writing back on on a card basis, writing
a card-by-card basis. A back on a clip basis, and
drive formatted with the formatting
camera-recorder uses
3
4
5
6
this format.
P2 STORE P2 STORE (AJ-
PCS060G). No writing
Thumbnail viewing,
writing back on a card
basis, and writing back
on a clip basis
can be performed.
Press the EXIT button.: ;Press the SET button.
FAT
For a hard disk drive
with the first primary
partition formatted in
FAT 16 or 32, as seen
Thumbnail viewing,
reading on a clip basis,
and formatting
* Once formatted, the
on personal computers, hard disk drive can be
etc., which requires a treated as a TYPE-S
CONTENTS directory at HDD.
its root.
OTHER
Hard disk drives not
described above.
Formatting
10
* Once formatted, they
can be treated as a
TYPE-S HDD.
* They are hard disk
drives that have no
CONTENTS directory or
use the NTFS and any
other file system instead
of FAT 16 or 32.
11
12
For the FAT
2. VENDOR
This section indicates the vendor for the hard disk drive.
1
2
3. MODEL
3
4
This section indicates the model of the hard disk drive.
4. SIZE
This section indicates the total storage on the hard disk
drive.
Press the EXIT button.: ;Press the SET button.
5. USED
This section indicates the used space on the hard disk
drive (in GB) and the number of P2 cards in use.
6. FREE CAP.
This section indicates the remaining free space on the
hard disk drive in GB.
7. PARTITION #
This section indicates the partition number (one P2 card
is used as a unit) on the hard disk drive.
‹Note
The screen indicates up to 10 partitions. When the
number of partitions exceeds 10, scroll down the
indication with the cursor button ($) to view the hidden
partitions.
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
138
8. MODEL
This section indicates the model of the P2 card that
originally contained data on the partition.
‹Note
Press the cursor button (!) to switch to the PARTITION
NAME. Press the cursor button (") button to return to the
original model name display.
9. DATE/TIME
This section indicates the date and time the data on the
partition was recorded.
Formatting a hard disk drive
10.SERIAL
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST.
> [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 137)
This section indicates the serial number of the P2 card
that originally contained the data on the partition.
2
3
Connect the hard disk drive via USB.
11.VERIFY
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the
thumbnail screen.
This section indicates the verification setting and results
at the time the data on the partition was recorded.
ON:FINISHED :
Verification was performed and the results agreed.
ON:FAILED :
Verification was performed and the results did not
4
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select HDD > EXPLORE from the thumbnail
menu.
The display provides a screen that shows the
information about the hard disk drive.
agree.
OFF :
No verification was performed.
- - - :
5
From the menu, select OPERATION >
FORMAT (HDD) and select YES using the
cursor buttons and SET button. Then, the
confirmation message is displayed again.
Select YES.
No verification information is available.
‹Notes
z Even for a FAT-type hard disk drive, the 1001st or later
clips are not shown.
z For a FAT-formatted hard disk drive, the information
about only the first partition is shown.
z For a P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G) that has an invalid
partition, that partition information is shown in gray.
The camera-recorder starts formatting the hard disk
drive. Once formatted, the hard disk drive can be
treated as a TYPE-S HDD.
‹Notes
12.NAME
z Formatting a hard disk drive erases all contents of it.
Note that you cannot erase the contents of certain
partitions by specifying them.
This section indicates the PARTITION NAME.
Enter the PARTITION NAME from the software
keyboard by selecting [CHANGE PARTITION NAME] in
the OPERATION MENU while the thumbnail of the hard
disk drive is displayed. (Max. 20 characters)
z Operation of the hard disk drive with this unit, and the
data in the hard disk drive are not guaranteed if a hard
disk drive formatted by this unit is rewritten using
another PC or similar.
z Data erased by formatting cannot be restored, so be
sure to perform the format after first confirming the
data.
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
139
Writing data on a hard disk drive
Writing data back to P2 cards
You can select clips on the hard disk drive to be written back
to P2 cards.
1
2
Switch the mode to USB HOST.
> [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 137)
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST.
> [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 137)
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
A hard disk drive that has not been formatted with the
camera-recorder must be formatted as directed in
[Formatting a hard disk drive] (page 139).
2
3
4
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
Insert the target P2 card in a slot.
3
4
Insert a P2 card.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select HDD > EXPLORE from the thumbnail
menu. Move to the appropriate partition and
select it with the SET button.
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen is displayed.
5
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select HDD > EXPORT from the thumbnail
menu.
Specify the slot that contains the P2 card bearing the
data to be written to the hard disk drive.
5
6
From among the thumbnails, select the clips
to be written to the P2 card.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION > COPY. Then, specify the
slot that contains the target P2 card.
6
Select YES.
z This starts the write process.
z When the data is being written, a progress bar is
displayed. To diskontinue writing, press the SET
button and select YES instead of cancellation
confirmation.
z When the writing is completed, the message “COPY
COMPLETED!” is displayed.
7
Select YES.
z This starts the data write to the P2 card.
z When the writing is completed, the message “COPY
COMPLETED!” is displayed.
‹Notes
z When only selected files are written, no verification is
performed.
‹Notes
z To disable verification at the time of writing, select HDD
> SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the option
VERIFY to OFF. This speeds up writing without
verifying data writing.
z Import data in clip units from cards with a different model
number as data cannot be imported by the partition between
such cards.
z Select “ALL SLOT” to write data collectively onto all P2
cards currently inserted in the unit to the hard disk
drive.
For a Type-S or P2 STORE hard disk drive, you can write
data back to a P2 card with the same model number on a
card basis. The target P2 cards must be preformatted.
‹Notes
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST.
> [Switching to the USB HOST mode] (page 137)
z For a Type-S hard disk drive, data can be written on a card
basis. The data on up to 23 P2 cards can be stored on the
hard disk drive. The data set on each P2 card is recognized
as a separate drive by the PC.
2
3
4
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
Insert the target P2 cards in slots.
z If data on a P2 card that contains a defective clip must be
written to a hard disk drive, then we recommend fixing that
clip before writing the data.
z When the process is diskontinued during verification, the
data on the P2 card has been written to the hard disk drive.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select HDD > EXPLORE. Then, move to the
appropriate partition and select it with the SET
button.
5
From the thumbnail menu, select OPERATION
> IMPORT. Then, specify the slots that
contain the empty target P2 cards.
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
140
6
Select YES.
z This starts the write process.
z When the writing is completed, the message “COPY
COMPLETED!” is displayed.
<For your information>
To disable verification during writing, select HDD >
SETUP from the thumbnail menu and set the option
VERIFY to OFF. This speeds up writing without
verifying data writing.
‹Note
If a clip is written back to a P2 card different from the original
card that contained that clip, then the clip may be incomplete. If
this is the case, reconnect the clip.
> [Reconnection of Incomplete Clips] (page 127).
Direction for using a hard disk drive
z A hard disk drive (including the P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G))
must be used under the following conditions:
Š It must meet the operating requirements (e.g.
temperature).
Š It must not be placed in an instable place or a place
exposed to vibrations.
z Some hard disk drives and cables do not operate properly.
z Some hard disk drives with the SATA (Serial ATA)
interface or the PATA (Parallel ATA) interface connected
by a USB conversion cable may not be recognized.
z When copying data, a hard disk drive must have sufficient
free space.
z Do not remove the cable or the target P2 card or turn off
the camera-recorder or hard disk drive during formatting
or copying. Doing so requires the camera-recorder and
the hard disk drive to be reactivated. Furthermore, ensure
that the unit is fully charged, or use an external DC power
source.
z Since hard disk drives are high precision devices, there is
a high possibility that they may become incapable of
writing data depending on the conditions of use.
z Take note that we will not be liable for loss of data
caused by failed hard disk drives or any other
problem as well as direct or indirect damages
resulting from the loss of data.
z We do not guarantee that hard disk drives will operate
properly with the camera-recorder or that the data on them
will be properly retained if data copied to them from the
camera-recorder has been replaced with other data using
a PC.
z By using the drive mount converter distributed on the
following URL, the hard disk drive can be mounted in the
designated folder when connected.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Connection with external device: Connection with external devices using the USB 2.0 port
141
Connection using the SDI IN connector
1
2
Confirm that the connected device has the
same signal format as camera-recorder.
When signals are input from the SDI IN
connector, set the REC SIGNAL in the setting
menu to “SDI”.
The menu item REC SIGNAL is found in the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.
‹Notes
z When nothing is connected to the SDI IN connector or there
is no input signal, images to be recorded will be black and no
sound will be recorded. Input the same signals as the format
set in the SYSTEM MODE item in the setting menu through
the SDI IN connector. If the formats are different, data will not
be properly recorded on the P2 card. The menu item
SYSTEM MODE is found in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on
the SYSTEM SETTING page.
z Note the following points when the REC SIGNAL of the
setting menu is set to “SDI”.
Š Audio signals are input from the SDI IN connector.
Š Audio signals must be input synchronized with video
images. Data will be recorded on the P2 card as 48 kHz/
4CH (16 bit or 24 bit). To record in 24 bit, the REC
FORMAT item must be set to AVC-I 100 or AVC-I 50, and
the AUDIO SMPL RES item to 24BIT. These menu items
are found in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the
SYSTEM SETTING page.
Š When the REC SIGNAL item is set to “SDI”, signals input
from the GENLOCK IN connector are disabled even if
nothing is connected to the SDI IN connector.
z UMID information, time code and user bits cannot be
recorded on a P2 card using the SDI IN connector.
Connection with external device: Connection using the SDI IN connector
142
Connection of the remote control unit
(AJ-RC10G)
It is possible to control some of the functions remotely by
connecting the remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional
accessory).
When AJ-RC10G is connected to the REMOTE connector
on the unit and the power switches of both of the unit and
AJ-RC10G are turned on, the unit automatically enters the
Dedicated cable
remote control mode.
The remote control mode is released when AJ-RC10G is
removed or the power for the AJ-RC10G is turned OFF.
AJ-RC10G
Switch functions in the remote control mode
In the remote control mode, the following switches and
buttons on the unit are disabled.
z SHUTTER switch
z MENU button
z JOG dial button
REMOTE connector
z GAIN switch
z OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch
z WHITE BAL switch
Notes for the remote control unit
z USER MAIN button
z USER 1 button
z USER 2 button
When this unit and AJ-RC10G are connected, the following
functions differ from those described in the operating
instructions that accompany AJ-RC10G.
A. KNEE ON button
Recording and playback Operations in the remote
control mode
When “DRS” has been selected in the AUTO KNEE SW
menu option of this unit, this button can be used to
switch DRS on/off. This button is lit when DRS is on and
not lit when DRS is off.
When the remote control is connected, recording and
playback can be controlled through both the camera-
recorder and the AJ-RC10G.
The menu option AUTO KNEE SW can be found in the
<SW MODE> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.
CHARA ON button
‹Notes
This button is used to select whether to superimpose
characters on the video signal output to the MON OUT
connector of this unit. Note that the MON OUT
CHARACTER switch of this unit does not function when
the AJ-RC10G is connected.
z The state that was adjusted by connecting AJ-RC10G is
stored in the unit. Not to store the adjusted state in the unit,
open the FUNCTION MENU of AJ-RC10G to set the RC DATA
SAVE item to “OFF”.
z When the dedicated cable is connected or removed, ensure
that the POWER switches on both the main unit and AJ-
RC10G are turned “OFF”.
z For software of the AJ-RC10G, use Version 1.20 or higher.
z For instructions on updating of the AJ-RC10G, refer to the
support page on the following website.
Scene file
Scene files created on other types of device cannot be
read. When an attempt is made to read such a file, AJ-
RC10G displays “NG” on the liquid crystal screen.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Connection with external device: Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G)
143
Menu option
GAMMA menu
FUNC menu
z The options available in SELECT of the 4th layer are
as follows.
z The options available in GAMMA-MODE-SEL are as
follows.
HD, SD, F-LIKE1, F-LIKE2, F-LIKE3, FILM-REC,
VIDEO REC
z DYMC-LVL and BSR-LVL are added to the 4th layer.
The variable ranges for these are as follows.
DYMC-LVL: 200% - 600%
INH, S.GAIN, DS.GAIN, S.IRIS, I.OVR, S.BLK,
B.GAMMA, D.ZOOM, ATW, ATW LOCK, Y GET,
DRS, ASSIST, C.TEMP, AUD CH1/3, AUD CH2/4,
REC SW, RET SW, PRE REC, SLOT SEL, PC
MODE, LCD B.L
Note, however, that the C.TEMP function will not work
when assigned to a user button on AJ-RC10G.
z The variable range of BLK-GAMMA of the 5th layer is
–8 - OFF - 8.
BSR-LVL: 00% - 30%
Note, however, that these values can only be changed
when “FILM-REC” has been selected in GAMMA-
MODE-SEL.
z V-KNSLP and V-KNPNT are added to the 5th layer.
The variable ranges for these are as follows.
V-KNSLP: 150% - 500%
z RANGE is added next to BLK-GAMMA of the 5th
layer. The variable range for this is 1 - 3.
V-KNPNT: 30% - 107%
Note, however, that these values can only be changed
when “VIDEO REC” has been selected in GAMMA-
MODE-SEL.
WHITE menu
z The variable range of COLR-TEMP-PRE, TEMP-A
and TEMP-B is 2300Kꢀ - 15000Kꢁ.
KNEE menu
z CHROMA LEVEL is added to the 5th layer.
The variable range for this is OFF/–99% - 40%.
z HI-COLOR-LVL is added to the 6th layer.
The variable range for this is 1 - 32.
z DRS MODE is added to the 7th layer.
The variable range for this is MODE1/MODE2.
z DRS EFFECT DEPTH is added to the 8th layer.
The variable range for this is 1/2/3.
SHUTTER menu
z When “FIX” has been selected in MODE, the options
available in SPED are as follows.
1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000, HALF, 180.0d, 172.8d, 144.0d, 120.0d,
90.0d, 45.0d
The values that can be selected in SPED differ
depending on the settings of the SYSTEM MODE
menu option in this unit. The menu item SYSTEM
MODE is found in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on
the SYSTEM SETTING page.
z SYNCRO SCAN DISP is added to the 2nd layer.
When “S.S” has been selected in MODE, it is possible
to select between SEC and DEG as units for the
values displayed in SPED. The changes to the units
are reflected in this unit.
z When “S.S” has been selected in MODE, the variable
ranges of SPED are as follows.
For SEC: 1/24.7 - 1/7200 (selectable values differ
depending on the settings of this unit)
For DEG: 3.0d - 350.0d
SKIN DTL menu
z The options available in OUTPUT are as follows.
MONI, SDI
z A zebra is added to the colors of the table selected in
SDTL.
z SCORG of the 3rd layer changes to SKIN-DTL-
EFFECT. The variable range for this is 0 - 31.
Connection with external device: Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G)
144
Connection of the extension control unit
(AG-EC4G)
It is possible to control some of the functions remotely by
connecting the extension control unit AG-EC4G (optional
accessory).
When AG-EC4G is connected to the REMOTE connector on
the unit and the power switches of both of the unit and AG-
EC4G are turned on, the unit automatically enters the
remote control mode.
The remote control mode is released when AG-EC4G is
removed or the power for the AG-EC4G is turned OFF.
Switch functions in the remote control mode
In the remote control mode, the following switches and
buttons on the unit are disabled.
z SHUTTER switch
z MENU button
z JOG dial button
z GAIN switch
z OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch
z WHITE BAL switch
z USER MAIN button
z USER 1 button
z USER 2 button
Recording and playback Operations in the remote
control mode
When the remote control is connected, recording and
playback can be controlled through both the camera-
recorder and the AG-EC4G.
‹Notes
z Turning the AG-EC4G DATA SAVE switch to “ON” enables
recording of the configured status of the AG-EC4G on the
unit. In order to not record this configured status, turn the
AG-EC4G DATA SAVE switch to “OFF”.
z When the dedicated cable is connected or removed, ensure
that the POWER switches on both the main unit and AG-
EC4G are turned “OFF”.
z For details, refer to the operating instructions for the AG-
EC4G.
Dedicated cable
AG-EC4G
REMOTE connector
Connection with external device: Connection of the extension control unit (AG-EC4G)
145
Maintenance and Inspections
Inspections Before Shooting
Make sure you check that the system is operating normally before embarking on a shoot. We recommend using a color video
monitor to check the image.
Preparing for Inspections
1
2
Mount a charged battery pack.
3
Insert a P2 card into the slot cover and close
the slide cover.
Turn the power switch ON and check that 5 or
more BATT indication marks appear.
Confirm that the P2 card access LED for the inserted
card slot lights up in orange. If P2 cards are inserted
into multiple card slots, only the P2 card access LED for
the first-inserted P2 card lights up in orange. Then, the
other P2 card access LEDs light up in green when P2
cards are inserted.
If the access LED for the P2 card slot in which a P2
card is inserted keeps blinking in green, or if there is no
display, recording is not possible on that particular P2
card.
z If fewer than 5 BATT indication marks appear,
replace the battery with a fully-charged battery.
1
2
3
Inspecting the Camera Unit
1
2
3
4
Set the zoom to electric zoom mode and
check the zoom operation.
Check that the image changes to telephoto and wide
angle.
5
While holding down the instant iris automatic
adjustment button, aim the lens at objects
with different degrees of brightness, to check
that the instant iris automatic adjustment
operates properly.
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and
check the zoom operation.
Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the image
changes to telephoto and wide angle.
‹Note
Some lenses do not have an instant iris automatic
adjustment function.
6
7
Return the iris to automatic adjustment mode
and change the GAIN switch setting to L, M,
and H, to check the following items:
Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode and
aim the lens at objects with different degrees
of brightness, to check that the automatic iris
adjustment operates normally.
z The iris is adjusted for objects with the same bright-
ness according to the switch setting.
z The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen
changes according to the switch setting.
Set the iris to manual adjustment mode and
turn the iris ring, to check the manual iris
adjustment.
When a lens with an extender is mounted, set
the extender to the operating position to
check that the extender operates properly.
Maintenance and Inspections: Inspections Before Shooting
146
Inspecting the Memory Recording Functions
Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from
[1. Inspecting the P2 Card Recording] to [4. Inspecting the
Earphone and Speaker].
3
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN
jack at an appropriate sound source. Then,
check that the level displays for both CH1 and
CH2 change according to the sound level.
1. Inspecting the P2 Card Recording
1
Check on the display inside the viewfinder
that the remaining P2 card recording capacity
is sufficient.
3. Inspecting the Audio Level Manual Adjustment
> [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity
Indication] (page 83)
1
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to
[FRONT].
2
3
4
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].
Set the DISPLAY switch to [TC].
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 and CH2/4
switches to [MAN].
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1/3 and CH2/4
controls.
Check that the level display increases when the
controls are turned to the right.
Press the camera’s REC button to check the
following items:
z The P2 access LED blinks in orange.
z The REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights up.
z System warnings do not appear inside the viewfinder.
4. Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker
5
6
Press the camera’s REC button again.
This step confirms that the P2 access LED is on and
showing orange, and the REC lamp in the viewfinder is
turned off.
1
2
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the
speaker volume changes.
Connect an earphone to the PHONES jack.
Check that the speaker is turned off and the
Using the REC button on the handle, repeat
Steps 4 to 5 to check the same operation.
Check the VTR button on the lens in the same
way.
microphone sound can be heard from the earphone.
3
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the
earphone volume changes.
7
8
Press the LIGHT button to check that the
screen brightness in the display window
increases.
5. Inspection for Using an External Microphone
1
2
3
Connect an external microphone to the AUDIO
IN CH1/3 and CH2/4 connectors.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to switch the
thumbnail screen to play back currently
recorded clip from thumbnail.
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to
[REAR].
Check that recording and playback operate properly.
9
When multiple P2 cards are inserted into the
P2 card slots, press the USER MAIN button to
select the P2 card used for recording.
Repeat the operations in Steps 4 to 5 and 8 to check
that recording and playback operate properly.
Set the Microphone input +48V ON/OFF switch
on the rear panel to [OFF] or [+48V],
depending on the power supply type of the
external microphone.
OFF: For a microphone with internal power supply.
+48V: For a microphone with external power supply.
2. Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic Adjustment
1
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1/3 and CH2/4
switches to [AUTO].
4
Aim the microphone at a sound source. Then
check that the audio level meter in the display
window and the audio level display inside the
viewfinder change according to the sound
level.
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to
[FRONT].
The channels can also be checked separately by
connecting a single microphone to each channel.
Maintenance and Inspections: Inspections Before Shooting
147
6. Inspection of the clock, time code, and user bits
6
7
Set the TCG switch to [F-RUN].
Check that the counter display number changes
regardless of recording status.
1
2
Set the user’s bit as required.
> [Setting of the User bits] (page 64)
Set the time code.
> [Setting the Time Code] (page 67)
Set the DISPLAY switch to [UB].
Each time the HOLD button is pressed, make sure that
the displayed value changes in the following sequence:
VTCG > DATE > TIME > No display (time zone) >
TCG; and also verify that the displayed value is correct.
If DATE, TIME, or time zone is not correct, refer to
[Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time] (page 66)
for guidance on setting the correct values.
3
4
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].
Press the REC button.
Check that the counter display number changes as
recording progresses.
‹Note
5
Press the REC button again.
Check that recording stops and the counter display
number stops changing.
Note that date and time data set for DATE, TIME, and time
zone is recorded in clips, and affects the playback
sequence, etc. at the time of thumbnail manipulations.
Maintenance
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder
z Do not use thinner or other solvents to remove dirt.
z Wipe the lens with a commercially available lens cleaner.
z Do not wipe the mirror. If dirt or rubbish is sticking on the
mirror, remove it with a commercially available air blower.
‹Note
When outdoors, never carry or set up the camera with the
eyepiece facing up to prevent sunlight, which could damage
the camera, from entering.
Phenomenon Inherent to CCD Cameras
Smears
Smears may appear when shooting an object with very high brightness.
This phenomenon becomes more obvious as the electronic shutter speed becomes faster.
Replacing the Backup Battery
The camera is shipped from the factory with a backup bat-
tery already mounted.
When the battery runs out, the [BACK UP BATT EMPTY]
display appears on the viewfinder screen for 5 seconds after
the power switch is turned ON.
The internal clock stops operating when the battery runs out.
Also, the TCG time code value returns to [00:00:00:00], and
the time code backup is disabled. The battery must be
replaced.
Please consult your distributor for replacement with a new
battery (CR2032).
The backup battery is visible when the panel on the LCD
monitor side is removed (right side when viewed from the
front).
‹Note
Please contact the store where you purchased the camera
when replacing the battery.
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
148
Connector Signals
Panasonic part number K1AY104J0001
Panasonic part number K1AA104H0038
DC IN
DC OUT
Maker part number
HR10A-7R-4SC(73)
(Hirose Denki)
Maker part number
HA16RX-4P (SW1)
(Hirose Denki)
1
2
3
4
GND
NC
1
2
3
GND
R TALLY
(Open collector)
Connector at the cable side
NC
Maker part number
HR10A-7P-4P(73)
(Hirose Denki)
REC START SW
12V
4
1
12V OUT
2
3
4
DC (11 V - 17 V)
(Max. 1.5 A)
1
2
4
3
‹Note
Ensure that the polarities are used correctly for a power sup-
ply from an external source.
Panasonic part number K1AB105B0002
FRONT MIC IN
Maker part number
NC5FBH
1
2
3
4
5
GND
(NEUTRIK)
L CH IN (H)
L CH IN (C)
R CH IN (H)
R CH IN (C)
PUSH
5
1
2
4
3
Panasonic part number K1AB103A0011
AUDIO IN
Maker part number
HA16PRM-3SG
(Hirose Denki)
1
2
3
GND
AUDIO IN(H)
AUDIO IN(C)
PUSH
2
1
3
Panasonic part number K1AA105H0016
AUDIO OUT
Maker part number
HA16RD-5P(76)
(Hirose Denki)
1
2
3
4
5
GND
L CH OUT (H)
L CH OUT (C)
R CH OUT (H)
R CH OUT (C)
1
2
5
4
3
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
149
Panasonic part number K1AY110JA001
Maker part number HR10A-10R-10SC(71)
(Hirose Denki)
REMOTE
1
2
3
4
5
CAM DATA (H)
Data from the camera to the remote control (H)
CAM DATA (C)
CAM CONT (H)
CAM CONT (C)
RC-ON
Data from the camera to the remote control (C)
Connector at the cable side
Control signals from the remote control to the camera (H)
Control signals from the remote control to the camera (C)
Maker part number
HR10A-10P-10P(73)
(Hirose Denki)
Identification signals of the remote control
Low: ON
8
1
2
7
6
7
8
9
RC VIDEO OUT
RC VIDEO GND
NC
Video signals output to the remote control
GND of the video signals to the remote control
Not used
10
9
3
6
4
5
UNREG 12V
DC 12 V power supply (AJ-RC10G: Max. 0.75 A)
GND
10 GND
Panasonic part number K1AB120H0001
VF
Maker part number
HR12-14RA-20SC
(Hirose Denki)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UNREG-12V
UNREG-12V
A9.0V
DC 12 V power supply (AJ-HVF21KG: About 0.35 A)
DC 12 V power supply
DC 9 V power supply (not used)
GND for the viewfinder PB signals
GND for the viewfinder PR signals
Viewfinder Y signals output
VF-PB-GND
VF-PR-GND
VF-Y
1
6
2
7
3
8
13
18
4
9
14
19
5
10
15
20
11
16
12
17
VF-Y-GND
VF-CLK
GND for the viewfinder Y signals
Serial data clock pulse signals
Pulse signals for reading serial-parallel conversion data
Serial data signals for serial-parallel conversion
GND
VF-WR
10 VF-DATA
11 UNREG-GND
12 ZEBRA-SW
13 PEAKING
14 SPARE
ON/OFF of the zebra signals
Control of the peaking (not used)
Standby (not used)
15 VF-PR
Viewfinder PR signal output
16 VF-PB
Viewfinder PB signal output
17 MARKER-SW
18 FRONT-VR
19 VR-GND
ON/OFF of the marker (not used)
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL adjustment (not used)
GND for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (not used)
GND
20 UNREG-GND
‹Caution
Total amount of current from the respective connectors for DC OUT, REMOTE,
VF, and LENS should not exceed 2.5 A.
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
150
Panasonic part number K1AY112JA001
Maker part number HR10A-10R-12SC(71)
LENS
1
RET-SW
ON/OFF of the return video
RETURN ON: GND
(Hirose Denki)
RETURN OFF: OPEN
9
1
2
2
REC-START/STOP
Control for recording start/stop
10
5
8
+5 V
11
3
12
7
6
0 V
4
START STOP START
3
4
GND
GND
IRIS-AUTO
ON/OFF of the forced iris servo
SERVO ON: 5V 0.5V
SERVO OFF: OPEN
5
IRIS-CONT
Control output for the lens iris
F2.8: –6.2 V, F16: 3.4 V, CLOSE: 2.5 V
6
7
UNREG-12V
IRIS-POSI
+12V power supply for the lens (Max. 1.5 A)
Iris position signals
3.4 V (F16) to 6.2 V (F2.8)
8
9
IRIS-G-MAX
EXT-POSI
IRIS REMOTE/LOCAL (AUTO) signals
REMOTE:
5V 0.5V
LOCAL (AUTO): GND
ON/OFF of the built-in extender
EXTENDER ON: GND
EXTENDER OFF: OPEN
10 ZOOM-POSI
11 FOCUS-POSI
12 SPARE
Zoom position signals
Focus position signal
Standby (not used)
Panasonic part number K1AY106J0001
GPS
Maker part number
HR10A-7R-6SC(73)
(Hirose Denki)
1
2
3
GPS TXA
GPS RXA
GPS VBAT
Transmission data from the GPS unit to the camera
Transmission data from the camera to the GPS unit
Backup power supply connector for the GPS unit
(DC 3.3 V)
6
4
1
2
3
5
4
5
6
REC START SW
GPS VCC
Control signals of REC start/stop
Power supply connector for the GPS unit (DC 3.3 V)
GND
GPS GND
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
151
Panasonic part number K1GB25A00010
Unislot
Maker part number
HDBB-25S(05)
(Hirose Denki)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CH-1 SHIELD
GND
CH-1 HOT
CH-1 COLD
GND
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH1 HOT
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH1 COLD
13
25
1
GND
14
12V UNREG
RX ON
Power supply to the wireless receiver
Power supply remote output to the wireless receiver
RF WARN
RM5
RF warning input from the wireless receiver
Not used
RM4
Not used
10 SPARE 1
Not used
11 SPARE 2
Not used
12 EXT CLK
Not used
13 CLK SHIELD
14 CH-2 SHIELD
15 CH-2 HOT
16 CH-2 COLD
17 5.6V
Not used
GND
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH2 HOT
Audio input from the wireless receiver: CH2 COLD
Power supply to the wireless receiver
18 VIDEO OUT
19 VIDEO RET
20 VIDEO EN
21 RM 1 (RM CLK)
22 RM 2 (RM DATA)
23 RM 3 (RM WR)
24 RM 5V
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
25 RM GND
Panasonic part number VJS4444
LIGHT
1
2
12 V UNREG
GND
Power supply for the light, etc. (supplied from the battery)
GND
2
1
Maintenance and Inspections: Maintenance
152
Warning System
Warning Description Tables
If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on, or during operation, this will be indicated by the WARNING
lamp, lamps inside the viewfinder and a warning tone.
‹Note
The WARNING lamp has the highest priority, followed by the tally lamp, and then the warning tone. When multiple errors occur
simultaneously a higher priority indication will be triggered. The [9. Low Wireless Signal Reception], however, may not be
indicated, depending on the menu setting.
1. System Errors
3. Battery Empty
Display window
indication
Display window All 7 bar indicators for battery remaining
The error code lights up.
capacity start blinking.
indication
WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second.
WARNING lamp Lights up.
Tally lamp
Blinks 4 times per second.
Tally lamp
Blinks once per second.
The SYSTEM ERROR indication and the error
code light up.
Viewfinder
Warning tone
The BATT LED lights up.
Beeps continuously.
Viewfinder
Warning tone
Beeps continuously.
Warning
description
The battery has run out.
The operation stops.
Warning
description
An error in the reference signal or the
communication.
Recording/
playback
operation
Recording/
playback
operation
The operation stops.
Countermeasures Replace the battery.
Please confirm [Error Codes] (page 155) and
consult your distributor.
Countermeasures
2. Card removal error
4. P2 Card Fully Recorded
Display window
indication
Display window All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA
Error code E-30 blinks.
indication
capacity start blinking.
This lamp will illuminate continuously until an
operation is made after recording.
WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second.
WARNING lamp
Tally lamp
Blinks 4 times per second.
This lamp will flash 4 times every second until
an operation is made after recording.
Tally lamp
Viewfinder
Warning tone
The “TURN POWER OFF” indicator lights up.
Continues to beep.
Viewfinder
Warning tone
The END indicator blinks.
This tone will sound continuously until an
operation is made after recording.
The P2 card being accessed has been
removed, resulting in an error in the internal
memory of the camera-recorder.
Warning
description
Warning
description
The P2 cards are recorded to maximum
capacity.
Recording/
playback
Cannot be performed.
Recording/
playback
operation
The recording stops.
operation
Turn off the power to the camera-recorder. If
Countermeasures there is an error in a clip on the removed P2
Delete the clips in the P2 card or insert a new
P2 card.
Countermeasures
card, repair the clip.
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
153
5. Image Sequence Error
8. Number of Clips Exceeded
“E-40” appears in the time code display field.
“00:00:00:11” appears in the time code display
Display window field. Even after recording is stopped, this
Display window
indication
display continues to blink until the next
indication
Blinks 4 times per second.
WARNING lamp
Tally lamp
operation is performed.
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
WARNING lamp
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Viewfinder
The REC WARNING indicator lights up.
Beeps 4 times per second.
Tally lamp
Warning tone
Viewfinder
Warning tone
The OVER MAX# CLIPS indicator lights up.
Warning
description
There are abnormal conditions in the image
sequence of the 24P, 30P, or 25P mode.
Beeps 4 times per second while recording
continues.
This is displayed when attempting to record
clips where the total quantity exceeds the
upper limit (1000 pieces) for a single P2 card.
Recording/
playback
operation
Images can be recorded and played back,
but some frames may be dropped or the
sequences of TC and UB may shift.
Warning
description
Recording/
playback
operation
Confirm the recording/playback operation
after turning OFF the power supply once and
Countermeasures then turning it on again. If the error is not
corrected after executing this procedure,
contact the dealer.
Cannot record. Stops while recording.
Insert a new P2 card or delete the unwanted
clips in the P2 card.
Countermeasures
6. Corruption of Standard Signal
9. Low Wireless Signal Reception
“E-40” appears in the time code display field.
Display window
indication
Display window
No display.
indication
Blinks 4 times per second.
WARNING lamp
Blinks 4 times per second. (During pause and
recording)
WARNING lamp
Tally lamp
Blinks 4 times per second.
Tally lamp
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
The TEMPORARY PAUSE indicator lights up.
Viewfinder
The WIRELESS RF indicator lights up while
recording continues.
Beeps 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Viewfinder
Warning tone
Beeps 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Corruption in the input signals from the
standard GENLOCK IN and SDI IN
Warning tone
Warning
connectors means correct recording is not
description
Warning
description
This error indicates poor wireless audio
reception conditions.
possible, and this has stopped. The clip will
be divided.
Recording/
playback
operation
When the signal returns to normal, recording
Recording/
Continues to operate without receiving the
wireless microphone signal.
will automatically start again. However, this
playback
will not automatically start when in
operation
INTERVAL REC mode or LOOP REC mode.
Check the microphone power supply and the
reception status of the wireless receiver.
Countermeasures
Please check the input signal from the
Countermeasures GENLOCK IN connector or SDI IN connector.
If errors continue, please contact your dealer.
10. Battery Nearly Empty
Display window One of the bars in the battery remaining
7. Recording Error
indication
indicator starts blinking.
“00:00:00:11” appears in the time code display
Display window field. Even after recording is stopped, this
WARNING lamp Blinks once per second.
display continues to blink until the next
operation is performed.
indication
Tally lamp
Blinks once per second.
The BATT LED blinks.
Beeps 4 times per second.
Viewfinder
Warning tone
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
WARNING lamp
Blinks 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Tally lamp
Warning
description
The battery is about to run out.
Continues to operate.
Viewfinder
Warning tone
The REC WARNING indicator lights up.
Recording/
playback
operation
Beeps 4 times per second while recording
continues.
Warning
description
This indicates a failure either in the P2 card
recording or the recording circuit.
Countermeasures Replace the battery as required.
Recording/
playback
The recording may stop or continue.
operation
Restart recording. Or, turn the power OFF and
turn it ON again, before starting recording. If
the recording cannot be performed normally,
change the P2 card.
Countermeasures
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
154
11. P2 Card Nearly Full
13. FAN STOP
Display window One of the bars for remaining MEDIA capacity
Display window
indication
No display.
indication
starts blinking.
Blinks once per second while recording
continues.
WARNING lamp Blinks 4 times per second.
WARNING lamp
Tally lamp
No display.
Blinks once per second while recording
continues.
Tally lamp
The FAN STOP indicator blinks while
recording continues.
Viewfinder
Warning tone
Viewfinder
Warning tone
The P2 card remaining capacity indicator blinks.
It does not sound.
Beeps once per second while recording
continues.
The fan is at rest because something is wrong
with it. Alternatively, the FAN MODE item is
set to “OFF”. The menu item FAN MODE is
found in the <OPTION> screen on the
OPTION MENU page.
Warning
description
The total remaining capacity of all the P2
cards is two minutes or less.
Warning
description
Recording/
playback
operation
Continues to operate.
If the camera-recorder operates with the fan
stopped, then the temperature inside rises.
While the camera-recorder continues to
operate, clips may not be recorded or played
back properly.
Recording/
playback
operation
Replace the cards. If there is an empty card
slot, insert a new card.
Countermeasures
Immediately stop using the camera-recorder
and consult your distributor.
Countermeasures
12. P2 Card Error
Displays “00:00:00:11” in the time code
display. The window continues to flash until
the next operation, even after stopping record
and playback.
Display window
indication
If the error occurs during recording, the lamp
flashes four times per second for a period of
about three seconds. The lamp does not light
if the error occurs during playback.
WARNING lamp
If the error occurs during recording, the lamp
flashes four times per second for a period of
about three seconds. The lamp does not light
if the error occurs during playback.
Tally lamp
A flashing “CARD ERR
¢” appears. In the actual
Viewfinder
Warning tone
indication the is replaced by the slot number of
the P2 card that triggered the error.
¢
If the error occurs during recording, the tone
sounds four times per second for a period of
about three seconds. The tone does not
sound if the error occurs during playback.
Warning
description
An error has occurred while recording data to
or playing data from a P2 card.
Recording/
playback
operation
Stop recording or playback. After recording is
stopped, the P2 card where error occurs is
write protected.
Countermeasures Replace the affected P2 card.
Error Codes
The following error codes are displayed in the display window if an error occurs in the camera:
Confirm the type of warning and refer to the details in the [Warning Description Tables] (page 153) for countermeasures.
Code No.
Description
Type of warnings
E-11
E-27
E-30
E-34
E-38
E-3F
E-40
E-63
E-6F
Video initialisation error
Recording control error
P2 card removal error
LCD microcontroller error
1. System Errors
1. System Errors
2. Card removal error
1. System Errors
1. System Errors
1. System Errors
P2 streaming microcontroller error
Microprocessor error in the camera control circuit.
Image sequence, GENLOCK input signal or SDI input signal error 5. Image Sequence Error, 6. Corruption of Standard Signal
Something is wrong with the system control microprocessor.
Reference signal error.
1. System Errors
1. System Errors
00:00:00:11 Errors such as recording to P2 card error
7. Recording Error, 8. Number of Clips Exceeded,
12. P2 Card Error
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
155
Card Warning Code
Indication in display
window
Code No.
Description
Recording
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported. ([DIR NG CARD (Slot No.)] is
indicated on the viewfinder.)
Operation continues. However, back up data
on the P2 card as soon as possible, and format
the card before using it again.
E-70
E-71
A warning code blinks once
every 2 seconds on the time
code display section of the
display window.
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 Operation continues. However, recording or
card has been exceeded. ([RUN DOWN CARD playback may not operate correctly. It is
(Slot No.)] is indicated on the viewfinder.)
recommended that you replace the P2 card
with another one.
Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation and USB HOST MODE
Item
Message
Description
Measure
CANNOT ACCESS!
Data cannot be accessed because it is
corrupted or for other reasons.
Restore media and clips to normal state before
access.
CANNOT CHANGE! With the AVC-Intra100 or AVC-Intra50, clips
for which thumbnails cannot be created, and
Please set the SYSTEM MODE item to match the
clip. The menu item SYSTEM MODE is found in the
<SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM
SETTING page.
for which the
mark is displayed cannot
have the thumbnail for their text memo
position changed.
CANNOT COPY!
Images cannot be copied.
Check the conditions for copying.
CANNOT DELETE ! Contents version mismatch prevents deletion. Match devices and contents version.
CANNOT FORMAT! P2 card problem prevents formatting.
Check P2 card.
CANNOT RE-
CONNECT!
A clip that does not span multiple cannot be
reconnected.
Check selected content.
CANNOT REPAIR!
Data cannot be repaired since content that
cannot be repaired is selected.
Check selected content.
LACK OF REC
CAPACITY!
There is not enough recording capacity left on Insert a card with sufficient recording capacity.
the card.
MISSING CLIP!
A shot mark will be added to the clips recorded Insert all P2 cards with recorded clips, and confirm
on multiple P2 cards when all P2 cards are not that the
incomplete clip indicators disappear, and
inserted yet.
then add shot marks.
Thumbnails
NO CARD!
No P2 or SD card is inserted.
Insert compatible media.
NO COPY TO SAME A clip cannot be copied to the card storing the Copy the selected clip to a card that does not
CARD!
original clip.
contain the original clip.
NO FILE!
The designated file is not found.
Check the file.
SAME CLIP IS
SELECTED!
Confirm the selected clip and release either the
source clip or the destination clip and then execute
the copy operation.
Images cannot be copied since the clip has
already been copied from the original clip.
TOO MANY CLIPS!
Too many clips are selected.
Reduce the number of selected clips.
UNKNOWN
CONTENTS
FORMAT!
Warning displayed to indicate contents version
mismatch.
Match devices and contents version.
UNKNOWN DATA!
Use UTF-8 for the metadata character code. Use
the viewer to enter correct characters.
The metadata character code is invalid.
USER CLIP NAME
MODIFIED!
Characters in the clip name had to be deleted The user clip name plus the counter value can only
in adding the counter value.
contain up to 100 bytes. Characters in the clip name
are automatically deleted when the total exceeds
100 bytes.
WRITE
PROTECTED!
The P2 or SD card is write protected.
Insert write-enabled media.
Enter [TEXT] before entering [PERSON].
Change the value.
CANNOT CHANGE!
[PERSON] will be entered while the text
memo is not available.
Soft
keyboard
CANNOT SET!
The entered value is incorrect.
INVALID VALUE!
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
156
Item
Message
Description
Measure
CANNOT ACCESS
CARD!
An error occurred during P2 card access.
Check P2 card.
CANNOT ACCESS
TARGET!
An error occurred during hard disk access.
Check hard disk status and connection.
Connect another hard disk drive.
CANNOT FORMAT! The hard disk cannot be initialized.
CANNOT
RECOGNIZE
HDD!
The destination target cannot be properly
recognized.
Reboot the hard disk or connect a different hard
disk.
CARD IS EMPTY!
CANNOT COPY!
The P2 selected for copying is empty.
Copying is not performed since the card is empty.
FORMAT P2 CARD! This warning indicates that data could not be
imported from a hard disk to a P2 card
You cannot copy to a P2 card that contains data.
Format the card on a P2 device and copy again.
because the P2 card contained recorded data.
HDD
HDD CAPACITY
Not enough space left on the hard disk.
The unit is not connected to a hard disk.
There is not enough space on the connected hard
disk. Use a new hard disk or formatted hard disk.
(USB HOST FULL!
MODE)
HDD
DISCONNECTED!
Reconnect the USB cable. If the hard disk does not
operate normally, turn it off and turn it back on
again.
MISMATCH
Copying is not possible since the model
Use a P2 card with the same model number or
COMPONENT!
number of the destination card does not match import video in clip units.
that of the source card.
TOO MANY
There are too many partitions.
Hard disks can handle up to 23 partitions. Use a
PARTITIONS!
new hard disk or formatted hard disk.
TOO MANY
TARGETS!
Multiple devices are connected.
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and turn it back
on again.
UNKNOWN DEVICE The connected DVD drive is not compatible.
CONNECTED!
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and turn it back
on again.
VERIFICATION
FAILED!
The compare check after copying failed.
Copy the data again.
Maintenance and Inspections: Warning System
157
Menu
Menu Configuration
MENU
USER MENU
MAIN MENU
SYSTEM SETTING
SYSTEM MODE
OPTION MODE
REC FUNCTION
OUTPUT SEL
SDI OUT MARKER
MONI OUT MARKER
DOWNCON SETTING
LCD MONITOR
GENLOCK
PAINT
RB GAIN CONTROL
RGB BLACK CONTROL
MATRIX
OPTION MENU
OPTION
COLOR CORRECTION
LOW SETTING
MID SETTING
AREA SETTING
HIGH SETTING
ADDITIONAL DTL
SKIN TONE DTL
KNEE/LEVEL
GAMMA
CAMERA SETTING
VF
VF DISPLAY
VF MARKER
CAM OPERATION
CAMERA ID
VF USER BOX
VF INDICATOR (1/3 - 3/3)
MODE CHECK IND
! LED
SHUTTER SPEED
SHUTTER SELECT
USER SW
SW MODE
WHITE BALANCE MODE
USER SW GAIN
LENS/IRIS
Opening the Menus
BATTERY/P2CARD
MAIN OPERATION
FILE
USER MENU:
BATTERY SETTING (1/2,2/2)
Displayed when the MENU
button is pressed.
SD CARD READ/WRITE
SD CARD R/W SELECT
CAC FILE CARD READ
LENS FILE
MIC/AUDIO (1/3 - 3/3)
TC/UB
UMID SET/INFO
MAIN MENU:
LENS FILE CARD R/W
SCENE
Displayed when the MENU
button is pressed for at least 3
seconds.
INITIALIZE
MAINTENANCE
SYSTEM CHECK
LENS ADJ
OPTION MENU:
USER MENU SELECT
SYSTEM SETTING
PAINT
BLACK SHADING
WHITE SHADING
LENS FILE ADJ
CAC ADJ
Displayed when the MENU
button is pressed while
pressing the LIGHT button.
VF
CAM OPERATION
MAIN OPERATION
FILE
DIAGNOSTIC (1/3 - 3/3)
HOURS METER
MAINTENANCE
‹Notes
z The items highlighted in grey cannot be selected by <USER MENU SELECT>.
z The underlined items can only be selected by <USER MENU SELECT> as one whole page (with all sub-items). Individual sub-
items cannot be selected separately.
About Menu Description Tables
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
The following letters indicate whether the modified menu
data is saved to or read out from the memory.
The – indicates that the data cannot be saved or read.
Remarks
REC SIGNAL CAM
SDI
Select video input signals.
CAM
:
Record the signal from the
camera
SDI: Records input to the SDI IN
S = Can be saved and read as scene data file.
C = Can be saved or read using SD CARD READ/WRITE.
U = Can be saved and read as user data.
> [SCENE] (page 195) and [INITIALIZE] (page 195)
F = Can be read using READ FACTORY DATA.
Please refer to [INITIALIZE] (page 195).
connector (optional).
– C U F R
This section shows the
adjustable range of the
About the settings available for this
item.
R = Can be saved using RC DATA SAVE.
> [Connection of the remote control unit (AJ-RC10G)]
(page 143) and [Connection of the extension
control unit (AG-EC4G)] (page 145)
set value, and available
options for this item.
Menu: Menu Configuration
158
USER MENU: USER MENU is factory-set. The menu can be
configured to suit your preferences by
specifying each option according to your
purposes and frequency of use, through the
<USER MENU SELECT> screen, which is
accessible from the MAIN MENU page.
>[Selecting Options for USER MENU] (page
161).
LIGHT button
To display USER MENU, press the MENU
button.
MAIN MENU: Allows you to set all options on the settings
menu.
This menu has a category-by-category
structure, layered according to purposes and
frequency of use.
To display MAIN MENU, press the MENU
button for three seconds or longer.
MARKER SEL, MODE CHK/
MENU CANCEL switch
MENU button
JOG dial button
SYSTEM SETTING:
This option is used to specify recording signal,
recording system, etc.
PAINT:
This option is used to fine-adjust images while
monitoring the output waveform of the
camera, using the waveform monitor.
Normally, this adjustment requires assistance
from a video engineer.
This menu option may be set with an external
remote controller, and is useful when using
the unit without a sound recordist.
VF:
Used to select the information items to be
displayed in the viewfinder screen.
CAM OPERATION:
Used to change settings according to the
conditions for the subject.
MAIN OPERATION:
Used to specify recording-related items, such
as audio settings, time code, battery and P2
card remaining amounts.
FILE:
Used to specify file-related items such as SD
memory card reading/writing and lens file
settings.
MAINTENANCE:
Used to specify maintenance-related items.
USER MENU SELECT:
Used to edit USER MENU.
OPTION MENU
:
Provides options which may be needed if
functions are added in the future.
To display OPTION MENU, hold down the
LIGHT button and press the MENU button.
For more information, contact your distributor.
Menu: Menu Configuration
159
Setting Menu Options
The menu options are set with the MENU and JOG dial
buttons.
The menu comprises main menu, sub-menus and options
menus.
The data specified through menu options are written and
saved in the internal memory of the unit.
This section describes how to set options in MAIN MENU.
The other menus can be configured in the same manner (the
method of displaying the menu screen depends on the
particular menu).
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark
(>) to a desired option. Then, press the JOG
dial button.
The value starts blinking.
< USER SW >
#
USER MAIN SW
USER1 SW
:S.GAIN
:S.GAIN
USER2 SW
:DS.GAIN
:SHOT MARK
SHOT MARK SW
(USER3 SW)
TEXT MEMO SW
:TEXT MEMO
(USER4 SW)
‹ Note
When the unit is in thumbnail mode, the viewfinder displays
“THUMBNAIL OPEN”, disabling navigation through the menu.
1
2
3
Press the MENU button for three seconds or
longer.
The MAIN MENU screen appears, together with its
options.
Turn the JOG dial button to change the value.
To increase the value:
Turn the JOG dial button clockwise, as seen from the
front of the camera.
# **** MAIN MENU ****
SYSTEM SETTING
PAINT
VF
CAM OPERATION
MAIN OPERATION
FILE
To decrease the value:
Turn the JOG dial button anti-clockwise, as seen from
the front of the camera.
MAINTENANCE
To return the changed set value to the previous
one:
Pull the MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU CANEL
switch toward you to display the message “PUSH
CANCEL BACK TO PREV”.
Pull the MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU CANEL
switch again toward you to return the set value to the
value before the change.
USER MENU SELECT
Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark
(>) to a desired menu option. Then, press the
JOG dial button.
The sub-menu screen appears.
‹Note
The following menu items cannot be cancelled using the
MARKER SEL, MODE CHK/MENU button.
z Pages on the USER MENU SELECT screen
z Pages on the FILE screen
z CAMERA ID
**** MAIN MENU ****
SYSTEM SETTING
PAINT
VF
#
CAM OPERATION
MAIN OPERATION
FILE
z USER SW GAIN
z Part of the WHITE BALANCE MODE pages
z BATTERY SETTING
MAINTENANCE
USER MENU SELECT
z UMID SET/INFO
Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark
(>) to a desired menu option. Then, press the
JOG dial button.
The options screen appears.
< CAM OPERATION >
CAMERA ID
SHUTTER SPEED
SHUTTER SELECT
#
USER SW
SW MODE
WHITE BALANCE MODE
USER SW GAIN
IRIS
Menu: Menu Configuration
160
6
7
Press the JOG dial button.
z The value stops blinking and is accepted.
z To change the settings for other options on the same
page, repeat Steps 4 - 6.
When the settings are finalised, press the
MENU button.
This terminates the menu option setting mode and
returns the unit to normal operation mode.
Turn the JOG dial button.
◆NOTE:
If the settings menu screen spans more than 4, the top of the
screen: at the bottom of the screen; are displayed. In this
case, turn the JOG dial button, the screen scrolls from the :
item to the previous page, from the ; item to the next page.
Selecting Options for USER MENU
Go to the <USER MENU SELECT> page from MAIN MENU.
Then, open relevant options menu screens to select options
to add to USER MENU.
Only the selected options are displayed as options in USER
MENU.
>[Setting Menu Options] (page 160)
< USER MENU SELECT >
(SELECT MODE)
#
SYSTEM SETTING
PAINT
VF
CAM OPERATION
MAIN OPERATION
FILE
MAINTENANCE
‹ Note
Options with [¢] are effective. The number of options that can
be added to USER MENU is 14 a 3 = 42 (three pages of options)
for camera-related options, and 14 (one page of options) for
memory-related options.
Menu: Menu Configuration
161
Menu Description Tables
SYSTEM SETTING
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
SYSTEM MODE
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
SYSTEM
MODE
1080-59.94i For setting the system frequency and the
CAMERA
MODE
(1080-59.94i
/480-59.94i)
60i
30P
24P
For setting the video system for shooting.
‹Note
In AVC-Intra mode, 24PA cannot be
selected.
1080-50i
480-59.94i
576-50i
recording format of the unit.
When this item is switched, turn “OFF” the
POWER switch on the unit and then turn
it “ON” again.
‹Notes
24PA
z When the remote control unit (AJ-
RC10G) or the extension control unit
(AG-EC4G) is connected, this item is
not displayed.
(1080-50i
/576-50i)
50i
25P
– C U F R
To switch this item, operate the main
unit independently.
ASPECT
16:9
4:3
Select the aspect ratio for recording. (In
SD mode only.
z When the time code is in free run mode
and a change is made to the SYSTEM
MODE menu option, the time may not
be correctly recorded. After turning on
the camera-recorder, check the time
code and make a change to the setting
if required.
16:9: Record in <16:9> aspect ratio.
4:3: Record in <4:3> aspect ratio.
– C U F R
SCAN
REVERSE
OFF
ON
Specify whether image correction is used
or not, when an anamorphic lens or a
lens for film applications is used.
OFF: Images are not corrected.
ON: Images are corrected. The vertical
and horizontal orientations are
inverted.
z When USB DEVICE mode is selected,
no change can be made to this option.
– C U F –
– C U F R
REC SIGNAL CAM
SDI
Select video input signals.
SETUP
0%
7.5%A
Switch the setup. (For 480-59.94i only）
0%: Setup is switched to 0% for both the
camera output and the recording.
7.5%A: Setup is switched to 7.5% for the
camera output and 0% for the
recording.
CAM Record the signal from the camera
:
SDI: Records input to the SDI IN
connector.
‹Notes
z After the power has been turned OFF,
this setting defaults to CAM when the
power is turned ON again.
z If “SDI” is selected, then this will be
recorded at 60i or 50i regardless of
settings in the REC FORMAT item.
– C U F R
AUDIO SMPL 16BIT
RES
Select the bit-rate for the recorded audio.
(Only when using the AVC-Intra codec)
16BIT: Records in 16-bit.
24BIT
24BIT: Records in 24-bit.
– C U F –
‹Notes
REC FORMAT 1080-59.94i: Select the recording codec and recording
DVCPROHD/60i mode.
z Playback clips recorded in 24 bits on a
24 bit compatible P2 device or with a
P2 Viewer. Clip number is displayed in
red and cannot be played on P2
devices that are not 24 bit compatible.
Audio is not played back correctly on
P2 Viewers that are not 24 bit
compatible. Please use the latest
version of the P2 Viewer.
z For the latest information on 24 bit
compatible P2 devices and the P2
Viewer, see the support page for P2 at
the following Website.
AVC-I100/60i DVCPRO HD:
AVC-I100/30PN
AVC-I100/24PN
AVC-I50/60i
AVC-I50/30PN
AVC-I50/24PN
1080-50i:
DVCPROHD/50i
AVC-I100/50i
AVC-I100/25PN
AVC-I50/50i
AVC-I50/25PN
480-59.94i:
DVCPRO50/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
Recorded using the DVCPRO HD
codec. In the CAMERA MODE item,
further shooting modes can be
selected.
AVC-I 100:
AVC-I 50:
Recorded using the AVC-Intra100 or
AVC-Intra50 codecs. With these
AVC-Intra codecs, recording from
60i, 50i, 30PN, 24PN, and 25PN
(Native recording) can be selected.
DVCPRO50:
DVCPRO:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
– C U F R
DV:
These are the codecs that can be
selected in SD mode. In the
CAMERA MODE item, further
shooting modes can be selected.
576-50i:
DVCPRO50/50i
DVCPRO/50i
DV/50i
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
162
Items/
Data Saved Range
Adjustable
Items/
Data Saved Range
Adjustable
Remarks
Remarks
AUTO REC
OFF
TYPE1
TYPE2
Select the method for detecting REC
START/STOP marks from the frame rate
information in the user bits added through
HD SD IN in HD mode in order to
automatically start or stop recording.
OFF: No automatic recording is
performed.
PC MODE
SELECT
USB HOST Specify the operation mode of the
USB DEV.
camera-recorder when an external device
is connected via USB.
USB HOST:
Sets the camera-recorder to the mode
that allows an external hard disk drive
to be connected.
USB DEV.:
TYPE1:REC START/STOP marks are
detected from LTC input through
HD SDI for automatic recording.
TYPE2:REC START/STOP marks are
detected from VITC input through
HD SDI for automatic recording.
‹Note
Set the menu option REC SIGNAL to SDI
to input HD SDI signals to the SDI IN
connector. For information about user bits
frame rate information, see [Setting of the
User bits] (page 64).
Sets the camera-recorder to the USB
device mode, which allows a PC to be
connected via USB 2.0 for use with P2
cards as mass storage.
‹Note
When the PC MODE menu option is set to
ON, no change can be made to this option.
– – – F –
PC MODE
ON
Used to enable or disable the mode that
allows the camera-recorder to be
connected to a PC or an external hard
disk drive via USB 2.0.
ON: Sets the camera-recorder to the
mode selected through the PC
MODE SELECT menu option.
OFF: Disables the PC MODE for normal
operation.
OFF
In INTERVAL REC mode and the LOOP
REC mode, the AUTO REC function is
not available.
– C U F –
START TEXT ON
MEMO
Select the function that automatically
adds a text memo to the start of the
recording before each recording.
ON: Add a text memo before each
recording.
OFF
‹Note
Once the power is turned off, the option is
always set to OFF when the power is
turned on next time.
– – – F –
OFF: Do not add a text memo.
‹Note
When this item is ON, the added text
indicates the start of the recording. Refer
to [Setting of Clip Meta Data] (page 128)
to record a text memo as textual
information.
OPTION MODE
Items/
Adjustable
Remarks
– C U F –
Data Saved Range
SEEK SELECT CLIP
CLIP&T
Press the FF/REW buttons while
playback is paused to move to the
location.
REC TALLY
RED
Select the method for displaying the
recording status of camera-recorder.
RED: The red tally lamp lights up.
GREEN:The green tally lamp lights up.
CHAR: The VF displays [REC] in
characters.
GREEN
CHAR
CLIP:
Cue to the start of the clip
CLIP&T: Cue to the start of the clip
and add a text memo
– C U F –
‹Note
Setting to “GREEN” or “CHAR” means
that the front tally lamp, back tally lamp,
and rear tally lamp on the unit’s
viewfinder will not light up during
recording.
– C U F –
ACCESS LED OFF
Specify whether or not to enable the P2
card access LEDs.
ON
OFF: The LEDs stay OFF.
ON: The LEDs light up.
– C U F –
P.OFF GPS
DATA
HOLD
CLEAR
Select whether or not to hold the UMID
GPS position information while the power
is turned off, thereby keeping this
information as status data holding the
previous value until the power is turned
on again, which enables a new
measurement to start.
HOLD
:
Hold and save the data.
CLEAR: Clear the data when the power is
turned off, and save zero (No-
Info) from the next power-on until
a new measurement is
completed.
– C U F –
SDI
METADATA
ON
OFF
Used to specify whether or not to output
metadata (UMID) to SDI.
– C U F –
SDI EDH
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to add an error
detection flag to the SD SDI output.
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
163
REC FUNCTION
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
INTERVAL
REC MODE
OFF
ON
ONE SHOT
Sets INTERVAL REC function.
OFF: INTERVAL REC is not performed.
ON: Uses internal memory to perform
interval recording.
PRE REC
TIME
1SEC
:
8SEC
:
Set PRE RECORDING.
1-15SEC:
Set the length of time that can be
retrospectively recorded before the
REC button is pressed.
ONE SHOT:
15SEC
Performs “one-shot” recording for the
duration specified under REC TIME,
and then stops.
‹Note
When the SYSTEM MODE menu option
on the SYSTEM MODE screen is set to
1080-59.94i or 1080-50i, or when it is set
to 480-59.94i or 576-50i and the REC
MODE menu option is set to DVCPRO50,
the upper limit of the above recording
time is 8 seconds.
‹Note
This item cannot be changed when “ON”
is selected for the LOOP REC MODE
item or for the ONE CLIP REC MODE
item.
In addition, this does not work in Native
mode or in 24P and 24PA modes.
– C U F –
– C U F –
LOOP REC
MODE
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to enable LOOP REC.
This setting can be used with PRE-
RECORDING features.
ON: Enable LOOP REC.
OFF:Disable LOOP REC.
‹Notes
z After the power is turned off, this item
will default to OFF the next time the
power is turned on.
z This item cannot be changed in the
following cases.
ŠWhen “ON” or “ONE SHOT” is
selected for the INTERVAL REC
MODE item
ŠWhen “ON” is selected for the ONE
CLIP REC MODE item
INTERVAL
REC HOLD
ON
OFF
Selects whether INTERVAL REC MODE
settings are retained or not when the
power is turned off once.
ON: Retain
OFF: Do not retain. The INTERVAL REC
MODE is OFF whenever the power
is turned on again.
– C U F –
REC TIME *
00s01f
:
59s29f
Set REC TIME (1 cut).
‹Note
However, the settings can be made frame
by frame, and the numbers of the cut-off
unit frames for the shortest time period
and the set time on the actual operation
may vary with the recording method. For
details, refer to [Interval Recording] (page
39).
z This does not work in Native mode or
in 24P and 24PA modes.
– C U F –
– – – F –
PAUSE TIME * 00h00m00s01f Specify PAUSE time for recording.
‹Note
00h04m59s29f However the settings can be made frame
REC START
ALL
NORMAL
Select operating modes that allow
recording to start.
ALL: Allow recording to start during stop,
recording pause, and playback.
NORMAL:
Allow recording to start during stop
and recording pause.
‹Note
Even if this is set to “ALL”, the operation
is “NORMAL”, when “ON” or “ONE
SHOT” is selected in INTERVAL REC
MODE.
Select the recording order of the slot
when the power is turned on.
HOLD:
:
:
by frame, and the numbers of the cut-off
unit frames for the shortest time period
and the set time on the actual operation
may vary with the recording method. For
details, refer to [Interval Recording] (page
39).
23h59m59s29f
– C U F –
TAKE TOTAL NONE
TIME
Specify the time needed for shooting.
Select from NONE (continue until
operation is manually stopped) to 5 days.
:
– C U F –
5day
– C U F –
P.ON REC
SLOT SEL
HOLD
SLOT1
TOTAL REC
TIME *
00m00s01f
:
99m59s29f
OVER100min
NONE
Display total recorded time. The setting
cannot be changed using this option.
Displays the recording time (recording
time needed for the P2 card) calculated
using REC TIME, PAUSE TIME, and
TAKE TOTAL TIME.
The recording order starts with the
card previously selected when the
power was turned off.
SLOT1:
‹Note
The recording order starts with the
card that is inserted in Slot 1 when the
power is turned on.
A value based on actual processing is
displayed.
Set the delay after pressing REC button
to start recording in INTERVAL REC.
– – – – –
– C U F –
START DELAY 0SEC
:
10SEC
– C U F –
◆Note
Displayed REC TIME, PAUSE TIME and TOTAL REC TIME are
translated into either drop-frame or non-drop-frame according
to the mode of operation.
PRE REC
MODE
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to enable PRE-
RECORDING.
ON: PRE-RECORDING enabled.
OFF:PRE-RECORDING disabled.
‹Note
TAKE TOTAL TIME is actual time. Therefore, TOTAL REC TIME
may incorporate fractions, depending on the settings.
Specify the PRE-RECORDING time by
using the menu option PRE REC TIME.
Example of drop-frame
– C U F –
REC TIME
02s00f
* This variable range is the numerical values for 59.94 Hz. For 50
Hz, the frame rate is up to 24f.
PAUSE TIME
02s00f
TAKE TOTAL TIME
TOTAL REC TIME
40min
19m59s06f
Menu: Menu Description Tables
164
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
ONE CLIP
REC MODE
ON
OFF
Select the ONE CLIP REC mode.
ON: Operate in ONE CLIP REC mode.
OFF: Do not operate in ONE CLIP REC
mode.
MONITOR
OUT MODE
MEM
CAM
Select the output signal for the MON OUT
connector. This operates separately from
SDI OUT.
MEM: in playback mode, this is the
playback image.
‹Note
This item cannot be changed in the
following cases.
CAM: always the camera image.
‹Note
z When “ON” or “ONE SHOT” is selected
for the INTERVAL REC MODE item.
z When “ON” is selected for the LOOP
REC MODE item.
This item is effective if “CAM” is set for
the REC SIGNAL item in the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen. If “SDI”, then in playback
mode, this will be the playback video
regardless of this setting.
– C U F –
– C U F –
VF/LCD CHAR VF-OFF
Select whether to superimpose
characters on the video displayed on the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
VF-OFF: do not superimpose in the
viewfinder, instead
LCD-OFF
ON
OUTPUT SEL
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
superimpose on the LCD
monitor.
LCD-OFF: do not superimpose on the
LCD monitor, instead
OUTPUT ITEM MENU ONLY Set the character contents superimposed
TC
STATUS
onto the output signals for the SDI OUT
connector and MON OUT connector.
MENU ONLY:
superimpose in the
viewfinder.
superimpose in both the
viewfinder, and on the LCD
monitor.
Displays only when the menu
characters are superimposed. No
display appears when other characters
are superimposed.
TC:Display the time code. (Displays the
menu when menu characters are
superimposed.)
ON:
– C U F –
VF MODE
MEM
CAM
Select the viewfinder image.
MEM: in playback mode, this is the
playback image.
‹Note
CAM: always the camera image.
The TC display position moves up
and down depending on the camera
ID position.
‹Note
This item is effective if “CAM” is set for
the REC SIGNAL item in the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen. If “SDI”, then in playback
mode, this will be the playback video
regardless of this setting.
STATUS:
Display the same characters
superimposed on the viewfinder
signal. (Displays the menu when menu
characters are superimposed.)
– C U F –
– C U F –
THUMBNAIL ON
OUT
Select whether or not to output clip
thumbnails displayed on the LCD monitor
to the video output and monitor output
signals.
SDI OUT
MODE
MEM
CAM
Select the output signal for the SDI OUT
connector.
OFF
MEM: in playback mode, this is the
playback image.
ON: Enable output.
CAM: always the camera image.
OFF:Disable output.
‹Note
‹Note
HD SDI signals are being output,
thumbnails are not output.
This item is effective if “CAM” is set for
the REC SIGNAL item in the <SYSTEM
MODE> screen. If “SDI”, then in playback
mode, this will be the playback video
regardless of this setting.
– C U F –
– C U F –
SDI OUT MARKER
SDI OUT
CHAR
OFF
ON
Select whether to superimpose
characters on the image output from the
SDI OUT connector.
OFF:Do not superimpose.
ON: Superimpose.
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
MARKER SW OFF
ON
Switches the marker on and off.
OFF: The characters are not
superimposed.
‹Note
The content of the superimposed
characters is the same as that
superimposed on video output from the
MON OUT connector
ON:
The characters are
superimposed.
– C U F R
– C U F –
CENTER
MARK
OFF
Switch the center mark.
OFF: Do not display center mark.
1:
2:
3:
4:
MONITOR
OUT
HD (1080i): Select the output signal format for the
1
2
3
4
HD SDI
SD SDI
VBS
MON OUT connector.
+ (large)
HD SDI:output an HD SDI signal.
SD SDI:output an SD SDI signal.
VBS: output a composite signal.
‹Note
Hollow (large)
+ (small)
Hollow (small)
– C U F R
SD
(480i/576i): Settings values for HD and SD are stored
SD SDI
VBS
separately.
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
165
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
SAFETY MARK OFF
Select the frame type for the safety zone
marker.
OFF:Do not display frame.
SAFETY AREA 80%
For setting the size of the safety marker.
It is possible to set the size by units of 1%
with a fixed ratio between of width and
height.
:
1
2
90%
:
1:
Box
– C U F R 100%
FRAME MARK ON
OFF
Set the frame marker to “ON” or “OFF”.
2:
Corner frame
– C U F R
FRAME SIG
4:3
13:9
14:9
VISTA
CNSCO
Set the frame marker.
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65.
The CNSCO ratio is 16:6.81.
– C U F R
SAFETY AREA 80%
For setting the size of the safety marker.
It is possible to set the size by units of 1%
with a fixed ratio between of width and
height.
:
90%
:
– C U F R
– C U F R 100%
USER BOX
ON
OFF
For setting whether to include the user
box in the signal from the MON OUT
connector.
FRAME MARK ON
OFF
Set the frame marker to “ON” or “OFF”.
– C U F R
USER BOX
WIDTH
001
For setting the width of the user box.
– C U F R
:
013
FRAME SIG
4:3
Set the frame marker.
:
13:9
14:9
VISTA
CNSCO
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65.
The CNSCO ratio is 16:6.81.
– C U F R 100
USER BOX
HEIGHT
001
For setting the height of the user box.
:
– C U F R
013
:
USER BOX
ON
OFF
For setting whether to include the user
box in the signal from the SDI connector.
– C U F R 100
USER BOX H -50
For setting the horizontal position of the
user box center.
– C U F R
:
POS
+00
USER BOX
WIDTH
001
For setting the width of the user box.
:
:
– C U F R +50
013
:
USER BOX V -50
For setting the vertical position of the user
box center.
– C U F R 100
:
POS
+00
USER BOX
HEIGHT
001
For setting the height of the user box.
:
:
– C U F R +50
013
:
– C U F R 100
USER BOX H -50
For setting the horizontal position of the
user box center.
◆Note
:
POS
In HD mode, the safety zone marker and the safety zone area
are not displayed on the SD SDI output and VBS output from
the MON OUT connector if “LT-BOX” or “S-CROP” is selected
in DOWNCON MODE.
+00
:
– C U F R +50
USER BOX V -50
For setting the vertical position of the user
box center.
:
POS
+00
:
– C U F R +50
MON OUT MARKER
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
CENTER
MARK
OFF
Switch the center mark.
OFF: Do not display center mark.
1
2
3
4
1:
2:
3:
4:
+ (large)
Hollow (large)
+ (small)
Hollow (small)
– C U F R
SAFETY MARK OFF
Select the frame type for the safety zone
marker.
OFF:Do not display frame.
1
2
1:
Box
2:
Corner frame
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
166
DOWNCON SETTING
LCD MONITOR
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
DOWNCON
MODE
SQUEEZE
LT-BOX
S-CROP
For setting the mode of the down
converter output signals.
‹Note
BRIGHTNESS –7
Adjust the LCD monitor brightness.
:
+0
:
Part of the down converter output image
at the top or bottom may be disrupted
when “LT-BOX” is selected in this menu
option, but this is not a malfunction.
– C U F – +7
COLOR LEVEL –7
Adjust the LCD monitor chroma level.
Adjust the LCD monitor contrast.
:
+0
:
– C U F R
DETAIL
ON
OFF
For setting the detail function for the
down converter output signals ON/OFF.
The down converter output signals
contain detailed components that are set
during HD signal processing. In this
setting, these signals overlap the detailed
components dedicated to the down
converter outputs.
Even if this setting is turned off, it is
impossible to turn off the detailed
components set during HD signal
processing.
– C U F – +7
CONTRAST
–7
:
+0
:
– C U F – +7
BACKLIGHT
OFF
Turn the backlight off, or adjust its
brightness.
LOW
NORMAL
HIGH
OFF:
LOW:
turns the backlight OFF.
turns the backlight to lower
than NORMAL.
NORMAL
HIGH:
:
Mode normally used
This is brighter than
NORMAL
– C U F R
H.DTL LEVEL 00
For setting the horizontal detail correction
level for the down converter output
signals.
– C U F –
:
08
SELF SHOOT NORMAL
MIRROR
Select whether or not to change the LCD
monitor to mirror image.
NORMAL: Do not change to mirror
image.
:
– C U F R 31
V.DTL LEVEL 00
For setting the vertical detail correction
level for the down converter output
signals.
:
MIRROR: Change to mirror image.
04
– C U F –
:
– C U F R 31
DTL CORING 00
For setting the noise elimination level of
the details.
01
:
15
– C U F R
H.DTL FREQ.
1
For selecting the horizontal detail
frequencies.
1:2.5 MHz 4:4 MHz
2:3 MHz 5:4.5 MHz
3:3.5 MHz
:
3
:
5
– C U F R
2D LPF
ON
OFF
For setting the 2-D low path filter reducing
cross colors.
ON: Cross colors are reduced.
OFF: Cross colors are not reduced.
– C U F R
SETUP
0%
7.5%
For setting the setup level for the down
converter output signals.
(Only for 1080-59.94i)
‹Note
When the system frequency is set to 50
Hz, the setup level will be 0%.
– C U F R
◆Note
The <DOWNCON SETTING> screen is displayed when SYSTEM
MODE is set to 1080-59.94i, 1080-50i (HD mode).
Menu: Menu Description Tables
167
GENLOCK
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
GENLOCK
INT
Switch the camera synchronising signal.
GL IN
SDI IN
INT:
Synchronise with the internal
reference signal regardless of the
reference signal input to the
GENLOCK IN or SDI IN
connector.
GL IN: synchronizes with the reference
signal input into the GENLOCK
IN connector.
SDI IN: synchronizes with the reference
signal input into the SDI IN
connector.
‹Note
If “SDI is set for the REC SIGNAL item in
the <SYSTEM MODE> screen, then this
will synchronize with the reference signal
input into the SDI IN connector
regardless of this setting.
– C U F R
GL PHASE
HD SDI
For selecting the output signals that lock
COMPOSIT phases to the signals that are input in the
GENLOCK IN connector. (Only for 1080-
59.94i, 1080-50i)
HD SDI:
For locking the HD SDI signals to the
GENLOCK input.
For the down converter output signals,
the start position of the video delays by
about 90 lines.
COMPOSIT:
For locking the down converter output
signals to the GENLOCK input.
For the HD SDI output signals, the start
position of the video gains by about 90
lines.
– C U F R
H PHASE
COARSE
–100
:
+000
:
Perform coarse phase adjustment for
horizontal hold when configuring a
system.
– – – – – +100
H PHASE FINE –100
Perform fine phase adjustment for
horizontal hold when configuring a
system.
:
+000
:
– – – – – +100
RETURN
SIGNAL
HD SDI
HD-Y
Select the return video displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during HD
mode.
HD SDI:
Displays the HD SDI input signal input
to the SDI IN connector.
HD-Y:
Displays the HD-Y signal input to the
GENLOCK IN connector.
‹Note
– C U F R
In SD mode, this item is not displayed.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
168
PAINT
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
RB GAIN CONTROL
RGB BLACK CONTROL
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
R GAIN AWB
PRE *
–200
For setting the Rch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the PRST
position.
MASTER PED * –200
For setting the level of the master
pedestal.
:
:
+000
+015
:
:
S C U F R +200
S C U F R +200
B GAIN AWB
PRE *
–200
For setting the Bch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the PRST
position.
R PEDESTAL * –100
For setting the pedestal level of the Rch.
For setting the pedestal level of the Gch.
For setting the pedestal level of the Bch.
:
:
+000
+000
:
:
S C U F R +200
S C U F R +100
R GAIN AWB A –200
*
For setting the Rch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the A position.
G PEDESTAL * –100
:
:
+000
+000
:
:
S C U F R +200
S C U F R +100
B GAIN AWB A * –200
For setting the Bch gain when the
B PEDESTAL * –100
:
:
WHITE BAL switch is in the A position.
+000
+000
:
:
S C U F R +200
+100
S C U F R
R GAIN AWB B –200
For setting the Rch gain when the
:
*
WHITE BAL switch is in the B position.
PEDESTAL
OFFSET *
ON
OFF
For setting the pedestal levels of the
Rch, the Gch and the Bch when the auto
black balance is adjusted.
+000
:
S C U F R +200
ON: To retain the values set in the
respective items of R PEDESTAL,
G PEDESTAL, and B PEDESTAL
OFF: The pedestal levels of the Rch, the
Gch and the Bch are set to ”0”.
B GAIN AWB B * –200
For setting the Bch gain when the
WHITE BAL switch is in the B position.
:
+000
:
S C U F R +200
AWB A GAIN
OFFSET *
ON
OFF
For setting the values of the Rch gain
and the Bch gain when the auto white
balance is executed as the WHITE BAL
switch is in the A position.
ON: To retain the values set in the
items of R GAIN AWB A and B
GAIN AWB A
S C U F –
R FLARE *
–100
For adjusting the flare level of the Rch.
Adjustment values in this item are added
to the flare adjustment value that is
adjusted on <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.
:
+000
:
S C U F R +100
G FLARE *
–100
For adjusting the flare level of the Gch.
Adjustment values in this item are added
to the flare adjustment value that is
adjusted on <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.
:
OFF: The values of the Rch gain and the
Bch gain is set to “0”.
+000
S C U F R
:
S C U F R +100
AWB B GAIN
OFFSET *
ON
OFF
For setting the values of the Rch gain
and the Bch gain when the auto white
balance is executed as the WHITE BAL
switch is in the B position.
ON: To retain the values set in the
items of R GAIN AWB B and B
GAIN AWB B
B FLARE *
–100
For adjusting the flare level of the Bch.
Adjustment values in this item are added
to the flare adjustment value that is
adjusted on <LENS FILE ADJ> screen.
:
+000
:
S C U F R +100
*
If the remote control unit or the extension controlunit is
connected, settings made from the menu are disabled. (The set
value is displayed.)
OFF: The values of the Rch gain and the
Bch gain is set to “0”.
S C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
169
MATRIX
COLOR CORRECTION
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
„
TABLE
MATRIX
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
for the linear matrix.
R
(SAT)
–63
:
+50
:
For performing the color saturation
correction of red.
S C U F R
S C U F R +63
MATRIX R-G
A
B
For performing the linear matrix
–63 –63 adjustment. (red/green)
R-Mg
(SAT)
–63
:
+25
:
For performing the color
saturationcorrection between red and
magenta.
:
:
+31
+24
:
:
S C U F R +63 +63
S C U F R +63
MATRIX R-B
–63 –63 For performing the linear matrix
Mg
(SAT)
–63
:
+08
For performing the color
saturationcorrection of magenta.
:
:
adjustment. (red/blue)
–04
+09
:
:
:
S C U F R +63 +63
S C U F R +63
MATRIX G-R
–63 –63 For performing the linear matrix
Mg-B
(SAT)
–63
:
+00
For performing the color saturation
correction between magenta and blue.
:
:
adjustment. (green/red)
–01
+03
:
:
:
S C U F R +63 +63
S C U F R +63
MATRIX G-B
–63 –63 For performing the linear matrix
B
(SAT)
–63
:
+00
For performing the color saturation
correction of blue.
:
:
adjustment. (green/blue)
+04
+14
:
:
:
S C U F R +63 +63
S C U F R +63
MATRIX B-R
–63 –63 For performing the linear matrix
B-Cy
(SAT)
–63
:
+00
For performing the color saturation
correction between blue and cyan.
:
:
adjustment. (blue/red)
+01
+05
:
:
:
S C U F R +63 +63
S C U F R +63
MATRIX B-G
–63 –63 For performing the linear matrix
Cy
(SAT)
–63
:
–10
For performing the color saturation
correction of cyan.
:
:
adjustment. (blue/green)
–01
+18
:
:
:
S C U F R +63 +63
S C U F R +63
„
TABLE
L MATRIX
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
when the GAIN switch is in the L position.
Cy-G
(SAT)
–63
:
–10
:
For performing the color saturation
correction between cyan and green.
S C U F R
S C U F R +63
„
TABLE
M MATRIX
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
when the GAIN switch is in the M
position.
G
(SAT)
–63
:
+00
For performing the color saturation
correction of green.
S C U F –
„
TABLE
H MATRIX
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table
when the GAIN switch is in the H
position.
:
S C U F R +63
G-Yl
(SAT)
–63
:
+00
For performing the color saturation
correction between green and yellow.
S C U F –
:
‹Note
S C U F R +63
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU
SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen. The items
without „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.
> [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 193)
Yl
(SAT)
–63
:
+19
:
For performing the color saturation
correction of yellow.
S C U F R +63
Yl-R
(SAT)
–63
:
+34
For performing the color saturation
correction between yellow and red.
:
S C U F R +63
Menu: Menu Description Tables
170
LOW SETTING
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
„
GAIN
MASTER
–6dB
:
0dB
:
Select the master gain from –6, –3, 0, 3,
6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30dB.
R
–63
:
–01
:
For performing the hue correction for red.
(PHASE)
S C U F R 30dB
S C U F R +63
H.DTL LEVEL 00
For performing the horizontal detail
correction level setting.
R-Mg
(PHASE)
–63
:
+00
:
For performing the hue correction
between red and magenta.
:
10
:
S C U F R 63
S C U F R +63
V.DTL LEVEL 00
For performing the vertical detail
correction level setting.
Mg
(PHASE)
–63
:
–06
:
For performing the hue correction for
magenta.
:
15
:
S C U F R 31
S C U F R +63
DTL CORING 00
For performing the noise elimination level
setting for detail.
Mg-B
(PHASE)
–63
:
+00
:
For performing the hue correction
between magenta and blue.
:
04
:
S C U F R 15
S C U F R +63
H.DTL FREQ. 00
For performing the horizontal detail
frequency selection.
B
–63
:
+00
:
For performing the hue correction for
blue.
:
(PHASE)
18
:
S C U F R 31
S C U F R +63
LEVEL
DEPEND.
0
1
:
5
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details
of dark sections are compressed.
If the numerical value is larger, details of
bright sections are also compressed.
B-Cy
(PHASE)
–63
:
+00
:
For performing the hue correction
between blue and cyan.
S C U F R +63
S C U F R
Cy
(PHASE)
–63
:
+06
:
For performing the hue correction for
cyan.
MASTER
GAMMA
0.30
:
0.45
:
For setting the master gamma. (0.01
step)
S C U F R +63
S C U F R 0.75
Cy-G
(PHASE)
–63
:
+06
:
For performing the hue correction
between cyan and green.
BLACK
GAMMA
–8
:
OFF
:
For setting the gamma curve for the dark
portion.
–
8 to
The dark portion is compressed.
OFF:
Standard state
+1 to +8:
The dark portion is extended.
–1:
S C U F R +63
+8
G
–63
:
+09
:
For performing the hue correction for
green.
(PHASE)
S C U F R +63
S C U F R
G-Yl
(PHASE)
–63
:
+13
:
For performing the hue correction
between green and yellow.
B.GAMMA
RANGE
1
2
3
Select the limits for compression and
extension.
1: ~20%
2: ~30%
3: ~40%
S C U F R +63
Yl
–63
:
+09
:
For performing the hue correction for
yellow.
S C U F R
(PHASE)
„MATRIX
OFF
A
B
For selecting the color correction table for
the linear matrix.
TABLE
S C U F R +63
S C U F R
Yl-R
(PHASE)
–63
:
+13
For performing the hue correction
between yellow and red.
„COLOR
ON
OFF
For switching ON/OFF of the 12-axis
independent color correction.
CORRECT
:
S C U F R
S C U F R +63
„
COLOR
ON
OFF
For switching ON/OFF of the 12-axis
independent color correction of the
position selected with the GAIN switch
(L, M, H).
‹Notes
CORRECT
z The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen.
The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU
LEVEL R/W.
S C U F R
> [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 193) for more information.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
171
z When shooting with the MASTER GAIN set to “–6dB” or
“–3dB”, coloring phenomena may occur in portions of the
video with high brightness.
MID SETTING
The coloring phenomena can be reduced by switching the
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch to [CAM/AUTO KNEE OFF],
setting the MANUAL KNEE menu option of the <KNEE/
LEVEL> screen to “ON”, and then changing the following
menu options.
Š When “HD”, “SD”, “FILMLIKE1”, “FILMLIKE2” or
“FILMLIKE3” has been selected in the GAMMA MODE
SEL menu option of the <GAMMA> screen, reduce the
value in the KNEE MASTER SLOPE menu option of the
<KNEE/LEVEL> screen.
Š When “FILM-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA
MODE SEL menu option of the <GAMMA> screen,
reduce the value in the F-REC DYNAMIC LVL menu
option of the <GAMMA> screen.
Š When “VIDEO-REC” has been selected in the GAMMA
MODE SEL menu option of the <GAMMA> screen,
reduce the value in the V-REC KNEE SLOPE menu
option of the <GAMMA> screen.
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
„
MASTER
GAIN
–6dB
Select the master gain from –6, –3, 0, 3,
6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30dB.
:
6dB
:
S C U F – 30dB
H.DTL LEVEL 00
For performing the horizontal detail
correction level setting.
:
08
:
S C U F – 63
V.DTL LEVEL
00
For performing the vertical detail
correction level setting.
:
12
:
S C U F – 31
DTL CORING
00
For performing the noise elimination level
setting for detail.
:
08
:
S C U F – 60
H.DTL FREQ. 00
For performing the horizontal detail
frequency selection.
:
18
:
S C U F – 31
LEVEL
DEPEND.
0
1
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details
of dark sections are compressed.
If the numerical value is larger, details of
bright sections are also compressed.
:
5
S C U F –
MASTER
GAMMA
0.30
For setting the master gamma. (0.01
step)
:
0.45
:
S C U F – 0.75
BLACK GAMMA –8
For setting the gamma curve for the dark
portion.
:
OFF
:
+8
–
8 to
The dark portion is compressed.
OFF:
Standard state
+1 to +8:
The dark portion is extended.
–1:
S C U F –
B.GAMMA
RANGE
1
2
3
Select the limits for compression and
extension.
1: ~20%
2: ~30%
3: ~40%
S C U F R
„
TABLE
MATRIX
OFF
A
For selecting the color correction table
for the linear matrix.
B
S C U F –
„
COLOR
ON
OFF
For switching ON/OFF of the 12-axis
independent color correction.
CORRECT
S C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
172
HIGH SETTING
ADDITIONAL DTL
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
„
GAIN
MASTER
–6dB
Select the master gain from –6, –3, 0, 3,
6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30dB.
KNEE APE LVL OFF
For changing the detail level of the high
brightness portion.
:
1
:
12dB
:
5
S C U F – 30dB
S C U F R
H.DTL LEVEL 00
For performing the horizontal detail
correction level setting.
DTL GAIN(+) –31
Adjust the detail level toward +
(upwards).
:
:
06
+00
:
:
S C U F – 63
S C U F R +31
V.DTL LEVEL
00
For performing the vertical detail
correction level setting.
DTL GAIN(–) –31
Adjust the detail level toward the –
(downwards).
:
:
10
+00
:
:
S C U F – 31
S C U F R +31
DTL CORING
00
For performing the noise elimination level
setting for detail.
DTL CLIP
00
:
63
For setting the level for clipping the detail
signals.
:
12
S C U F R
:
S C U F – 60
DTL SOURCE (R+G)/2
(G+B)/2
For setting the proportion of the RGB
signal components that provide the detail.
H.DTL FREQ.
00
For performing the horizontal detail
frequency selection.
:
2G+R+B /4
(3G+R)/4
R
G
18
:
S C U F – 31
S C U F R
LEVEL
0
For setting the LEVEL DEPEND.
:
DEPEND.
When the Y-detail is emphasized, details
of dark sections are compressed.
If the numerical value is larger, details of
bright sections are also compressed.
MASTER DTL –31
For revising the master detail level.
3
:
:
+00
:
5
S C U F R +31
S C U F –
MASTER
GAMMA
0.30
For setting the master gamma. (0.01
step)
:
0.55
:
S C U F – 0.75
BLACK GAMMA –8
For setting the gamma curve for the dark
portion.
:
OFF
:
+8
–
8 to
The dark portion is compressed.
OFF:
Standard state
+1 to +8:
The dark portion is extended.
–1:
S C U F –
B.GAMMA
RANGE
1
2
3
Select the limits for compression and
extension.
1: ~20%
2: ~30%
3: ~40%
S C U F R
„
TABLE
MATRIX
OFF
A
For selecting the color correction table
for the linear matrix.
B
S C U F –
„
COLOR
ON
OFF
For switching ON/OFF of the 12-axis
independent color correction.
CORRECT
S C U F –
‹Note
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU
SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen. The items
without „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.
> [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 193)
Menu: Menu Description Tables
173
SKIN TONE DTL
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
Q WIDTH
00
:
10
:
For setting the area width for enabling the
skin tone on the Q-axis of which the
center is the I CENTER.
„
DTL
SKIN TONE OFF
For selecting the skin color table for
enabling the skin tone detail.
The skin color table is provided in the
DETECT TABLE item.
A
B
AB
S C U F R 90
By enabling the skin tone detail, it is
possible to shoot human skin more
accurately.
Q PHASE –180
For setting phases of the area for
enabling skin tone as setting the standard
to the Q-axis.
:
+000
:
S C U F R
„
ZEBRA VF ON
For the setting to display the zebra
pattern in the skin tone area displayed in
the viewfinder screen.
S C U F R +179
OFF
Y
R-Y
The zebra pattern is displayed when this
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN TONE
DTL> screen is opened.
Q-WIDTH
I-WIDTH
Y-MAX
The zebra pattern indicates the area
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL
item.
+ direction
I-CENTER
S C U F R
– direction
„
ZEBRA SDI ON
For setting to include the skin tone zebra
in the SDI OUT signal.
Q-PHASE
B-Y
Y-MIN
0
OUT
OFF
The zebra pattern is displayed when this
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN TONE
DTL> screen is opened.
= SKIN TONE AREA
The zebra pattern indicates the area
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL
item.
‹Note
z The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen.
The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU
LEVEL R/W.
S C U F R
„ZEBRA
ON
OFF
For setting to include the skin tone zebra
in the MON OUT signal.
The zebra pattern is displayed when this
item is turned “ON” and the <SKIN TONE
DTL> screen is opened.
The zebra pattern indicates the area
which is selected in the SKIN TONE DTL
item.
MONI
> [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 193)
z The „ SKIN TONE DTL item operates separately from the
details set in the LOW SETTING, MID SETTING, HIGH
SETTING, ADDITION DTL, and CAMERA SETTING items.
S C U F R
DETECT
TABLE
A
B
For selecting the skin color table for
subjects to which the skin tone table
applies.
KNEE/LEVEL
S C U F R
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
SKIN TONE
GET
For fetching the color information of A or
B, which is selected in the DETECT
TABLE item, near the center marker.
When this function is executed, data from
I CENTER to Q PHASE are fetched
automatically.
Remarks
MASTER PED –200
Set the master pedestal.
:
+015
:
S C U F R +200
The fetched data will be the table data of
A or B, which is selected in the DETECT
TABLE item.
It is impossible to obtain color information
of both A and B at the same time.
„
KNEE
MANUAL
ON
OFF
Set the mode when the AUTO KNEE
switch is OFF. The KNEE MASTER
POINT/SLOPE set value is enabled when
this setting is ON.
S C U F R
– – – – –
KNEE
MASTER
POINT
70.0%
:
93.0%
:
For setting the knee point position in
increments of 0.5% steps.
SKIN DTL
EFFECT
0
:
16
For setting the effect level of the skin tone
detail.
:
S C U F R 107.0%
S C U F R 31
KNEE
MASTER
SLOPE
00
:
85
:
For setting the inclination of the knee.
Y MAX 000
For setting the maximum value of
brightness for enabling the skin tone.
:
190
:
S C U F R 99
S C U F R 255
„
WHITE CLIP ON
Set the WHITE CLIP feature to ON or
OFF. The WHITE CLIP LVL set value is
enabled when this setting is ON.
Y MIN
000
:
For setting the minimum value of
brightness for enabling the skin tone.
OFF
S C U F R
010
:
WHITE CLIP
LVL
90%
:
109%
Set WHITE CLIP LEVEL.
S C U F R 255
I CENTER
000
:
035
:
For setting the center position on the I
axis (for setting an area that enables skin
tone.)
S C U F R
S C U F R 255
I WIDTH
000
:
055
:
For setting the area width for enabling the
skin tone on the I-axis of which the center
is the I CENTER.
S C U F R 255
Menu: Menu Description Tables
174
GAMMA
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
MASTER
GAMMA
0.30
:
0.45
:
Set the master gamma in 0.01% steps.
A.KNEE POINT 80%
Set the AUTO KNEE POINT position in
1% steps. This setting is enabled when
the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector
switch is set to CAM/AUTO KNEE ON.
:
93%
:
S C U F R 0.75
S C U F R 107%
R GAMMA
–15
:
+00
:
Set the Rch gamma.
Set the Bch gamma.
A.KNEE LVL
100
:
107
:
Set the AUTO KNEE LEVEL.
S C U F R +15
S C U F R 109
B GAMMA
–15
:
+00
:
A.KNEE
RESPONSE
1
:
4
:
Set the AUTO KNEE response speed.
The smaller the setting value, the faster
the response speed.
S C U F R +15
S C U F R
8
GAMMA
MODE SEL
HD
SD
For selecting the gamma mode.
HD: Video gamma characteristics for HD
(High Definition)
SD: The gain in the dark section is
higher than the HD gamma.
FILMLIKE1:
In this setting gradations in highlit
areas can be expressed better than
the HD gamma.
CHROMA
LEVEL
OFF
–99%
For setting the chroma level of the PR
signals and the PB signals.
If this is set to OFF, the color elements of
video signals are eliminated.
FILMLIKE1
FILMLIKE2
FILMLIKE3
FILM-REC
VIDEO-REC
:
+00%
:
S C U F R +40%
DRS MODE
MODE1
MODE2
For setting the effectiveness of DRS
color preservation.
MODE1: Set to make the colors of
bright areas more natural.
MODE2: Set to make the colors of
bright areas more vibrant.
FILMLIKE2:
In this setting gradations in highlit
areas can be expressed better than
when FILMLIKE1 is selected.
FILMLIKE3:
In this setting gradations in highlit
areas can be expressed better than
when FILMLIKE2 is selected.
FILM-REC:
The cinema gamma characteristics for
film applications.
VIDEO-REC:
The cinema gamma characteristics for
video applications.
S C U F R
DRS EFFECT
DEPTH
1
2
3
Set the compression level of the high-
brightness component of DRS. If the
numerical value is larger, the
compression level of the high-brightness
component increases.
S C U F R
„
HI-COLOR
ON
OFF
For switching the mode on/off which
enables the dynamic color range to be
expanded.
SW
S C U F R
HI-COLOR LVL
S C U F R
1
:
32
For selecting the level of the dynamic
color range when in the mode which
allows expansion of the dynamic color
range.
FILMLIKE1
S C U F R
‹Notes
FILM-REC
z The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen.
The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU
LEVEL R/W.
FILMLIKE3
VIDEO-REC
SD
FILMLIKE2
Please refer to [SD CARD R/W SELECT] (page 193) for more
information.
z Setting of the KNEE MASTER SLOPE menu item and the
KNEE MASTER POINT menu item is disabled when the
GAMMA MODE SEL menu item of the <GAMMA> screen is
set to “FILM-REC” or “VIDEO-REC”.
HD
Luminance
z When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is used for FILM
LIKE3, the following settings are recommended.
MANUAL KNEE
: ON
KNEE MASTER POINT : 85.0%
KNEE MASTER SLOPE: 50
z AUTO KNEE is not performed when the GAMMA MODE
SEL menu option is set to “FILM-REC” or “VIDEO-REC”.
AUTO KNEE is not performed when AJ-RC10G is
connected, but the LED of the AJ-RC10G button is lit by
pressing the A.KNEE ON button.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
175
„CAMERA SETTING
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
DETAIL
ON
OFF
For switching ON/OFF of the detail
signals.
F-REC
DYNAMIC LVL 300%
200%
For setting the dynamic range when
GAMMA MODE SEL has been set to
“FILM-REC”.
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been
set to “FILM-REC”, this setting cannot be
changed.
S C U F R
400%
500%
600%
2D LPF
ON
OFF
For specifying whether or not to enable or
disable the 2-dimension LPF, which
reduce the cross color.
S C U F R
‹Note
F-REC BLACK 00%
For setting the amount of black stretch
when GAMMA MODE SEL has been set
to “FILM-REC”.
In 480-59.94i, the 2-dimension LPF is
enable.
:
STR LVL
30%
– C U F R
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been
set to “FILM-REC”, this setting cannot be
changed.
GAMMA
ON
OFF
For switching on/off of the gamma
correction.
S C U F R
S C U F R
V-REC KNEE 150%
For setting the amount of knee-slope
when GAMMA MODE SEL has been set
to “VIDEO-REC”.
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been
set to “VIDEO-REC”, this setting cannot
be changed.
TEST SAW
ON
OFF
Switch the test signal ON or OFF.
SLOPE
200%
250%
300%
350%
400%
450%
500%
S C U F R
FLARE
ON
OFF
Set the flare correction to ON or OFF.
S C U F R
H-F COMPE. ON
OFF
For switching ON/OFF of the aperture
correction.
S C U F R
V-REC KNEE 30%
For setting knee point when GAMMA
MODE SEL has been set to “VIDEO-
REC”.
When GAMMA MODE SEL has not been
set to “VIDEO-REC”, this setting cannot
be changed.
S C U F R
:
POINT
107%
DNR
ON
OFF
For switching ON/OFF of the DNR (Digital
Noise Reduction).
S C U F R
S C U F R
‹Note
All items in CAMERA SETTING are setting targets of the item
PAINT MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>
screen.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
176
VF
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
ZEBRA Pattern Display
Video Level
VF DISPLAY
ZEBRA 2
ON
OFF
SPOT
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
109%
DISP
CONDITION
NORMAL
HOLD
NORMAL: Display status constantly.
HOLD:
Display status only when the
MARKER SEL, MODE CHK /
MENU CANCEL switch is
pulled.
– C U F R
DISP MODE
1
2
3
Set the DISP MODE.
ZEBRA 2
DETECT
Switch the camera’s Warning/Message
indication. Please refer to [Display Modes
and Setting Changes/adjustment Result
Messages] (page 85) for more
information.
ZEBRA 1
DETECT
– C U F R
VF OUT
Y
NAM
R
For selecting the video signals to display
in the viewfinder screen.
Y:
Brightness signal
G
B
NAM: Output signal with the highest level
0%
among R, G, and B signals.
R:
G:
B:
Rch signal
Gch signal
Bch signal
– C U F R
VF DTL
00
:
05
:
For setting the detail level of the
viewfinder screen.
The details of the signals for the
viewfinder are further enhanced. If 00 is
selected, then the detail is the same as
that for the main line.
10
– C U F R
ZEBRA1
DETECT
0%
:
70%
Set the ZEBRA1 detection level (IRE
value).
:
– C U F R 109%
ZEBRA2
DETECT
0%
:
85%
Set the ZEBRA2 detection level (IRE
value).
:
– C U F R 109%
ZEBRA2
ON
Set the ZEBRA2 to ON, OFF, or SPOT.
SPOT
OFF
– C U F R
LOW LIGHT
LVL
OFF
10%
15%
20%
25%
30%
35%
Set the camera incoming light volume at
which to display LOW LIGHT.
– C U F R
RC MENU
DISP.
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the menu in the
viewfinder screen when the remote
control unit or the extension control unit is
connected to the unit.
– C U F R
MARKER
CHAR LVL
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
Adjust the brightness of markers and
characters displayed on the VF.
– C U F R
SYNCHRO
SCAN DISP.
sec
deg
For setting the unit to indicate SYNCHRO
SCAN mode.
sec: indicates time
deg: indicates the opening angle of the
shutter.
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
177
VF MARKER
VF USER BOX
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
TABLE
A
B
Select the VF MARKER setting table.
First, select table A or B, then set the
items below for each table.
USER BOX
ON
OFF
For setting whether the user box is
displayed in the viewfinder or not.
– C U F R
– C U F R
CENTER
MARK
OFF
Switch the center mark.
OFF:Do not display center mark.
USER BOX
WIDTH
001
:
013
:
For setting the horizontal width of the
user box.
1
2
3
4
1:
2:
3:
4:
+ (large)
Hollow (large)
+ (small)
– C U F R 100
USER BOX
HEIGHT
001
:
013
:
For setting the vertical height of the user
box.
Hollow (small)
– C U F R
SAFETY
MARK
OFF
1
2
Select the frame type for the safety zone
marker.
OFF:Do not display frame.
– C U F R 100
USER BOX H –50
POS
For setting the horizontal position of the
user box center.
1:
Box
:
+00
:
– C U F R +50
2:
Corner frame
USER BOX V –50
For setting the vertical position of the user
box center.
:
POS
+00
– C U F R
:
– C U F R +50
SAFETY AREA 80%
For setting the size of the safety zone
marker.
It is possible to set the size by units of 1%
with a fixed ratio between of width and
height.
:
90%
:
100%
z The user box can be displayed in any position as a
boxtype cursor.
– C U F R
FRAME MARK ON
OFF
Set the frame marker to ON or OFF.
– C U F R
FRAME SIG
4:3
Set the frame marker.
13:9
14:9
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65. (1.85:1)
The CNSCO ratio is 16:6.81 (2.35:1).
VISTA
CNSCO
– C U F R
FRAME LVL
0
:
15
Set the level outside the frame marker.
0: Equivalent to signal OFF. （Blanking
status）
15: Same brightness as center area.
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
178
VF INDICATOR (1/3)
VF INDICATOR (2/3)
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
EXTENDER
ON
OFF
For selecting ON or OFF for the extender
display.
COLOR TEMP ON
OFF
Set the color temperature indication to
ON or OFF.
– C U F R
– C U F R
SHUTTER
ON
OFF
Set the shutter speed indication to ON or
OFF.
CAC
ON
OFF
For selecting ON or OFF for the color
astigmatism correction display
– C U F R
– C U F R
FILTER
ON
OFF
Set the filter No. indication to ON or OFF.
GAMMA MODE ON
OFF
Select whether the gamma mode is to be
displayed or not.
– C U F R
– C U F R
WHITE
ON
OFF
Set the AWB PRE/A/B indication to ON or
OFF.
DRS
ON
OFF
For selecting “ON” or “OFF” for the
dynamic range stretcher function display.
– C U F R
– C U F R
GAIN
ON
OFF
For selecting ON/OFF of the gain
currently selected, S.GAIN and DS. GAIN
displays.
– C U F R
VF INDICATOR (3/3)
IRIS
OFF
IRIS
S+IRIS
S
OFF: Disable indications of the super
iris ON status, super black ON
status and the iris value.
IRIS: Enable only the iris value
indication.
S+IRIS: Enables indications of the super
iris ON status, super black ON
status and the iris value.
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
P2CARD
REMAIN
OFF
Select the indication mode for the P2
ONE-CARD card’s remaining capacity.
TOTAL
OFF: Disable the remaining capacity
indication.
ONE-CARD:
S:
Enable indication of the super iris
ON status and super black ON
status.
Display the remaining capacity of the
P2 card currently used for recording.
TOTAL:Display the total remaining
capacity of all P2 cards in slots.
z The display of the aperture value and
the display of the iris override are
interlinked. When the iris override is
changed, it is forcibly displayed for 3
seconds.
– C U F R
BATTERY
ON
OFF
Set the battery voltage indication to ON or
OFF.
– C U F R
– C U F R
CAMERA ID
BAR
OFF
For setting to record the camera ID.
BAR:The camera ID is recorded when
the color bar signals are recorded.
OFF:Disable ID mix.
AUDIO LVL
ON
OFF
Set the audio lever meter indication to ON
or OFF.
– C U F R
– C U F R
TC ON COLOR ON
BAR
Select whether the time code is to be
displayed or not on the color bar.
‹Note
The time code is displayed on the color
bar but it is not recorded.
ID POSITION UPPER R
UPPER L
For setting the position to display the
camera ID.
UPPER R: Upper right.
OFF
LOWER R
LOWER L
UPPER L
:
Upper left.
– C U F R
LOWER R: Lower right.
LOWER L: Lower left.
TC
OFF
TCG
TCR
TCG/TCR
Select the time code to display.
OFF: Disable the time code display.
TCG: Display the time code generator
value in recording mode.
TCR: Display the time code reader value
in playback mode.
– C U F R
DATE/TIME
ON
OFF
For selecting an option to display year/
month/day and hour/minute/second
simultaneously when the camera ID is
displayed.
– C U F R
TCG/TCR:
ZOOM LVL
ON
OFF
Set the zoom position indication to ON or
OFF.
Display the time code generator value
in recording mode, and the time code
reader value in playback mode.
– C U F R
– C U F R
SYSTEM
MODE
ON
OFF
For selecting ON or OFF for the SYSTEM
MODE display.
SYSTEM INFO OFF
ALWAYS
NORMAL
Select the method of displaying system
information and warnings.
OFF:Display no warnings other than
“TURN POWER OFF” and
“SYSTEM ERROR”.
– C U F R
REC FORMAT ON
OFF
For selecting ON or OFF for the REC
FORMAT display.
– C U F R
ALWAYS:
Always display warnings.
NORMAL:
Display warnings for 3 seconds only
when problems occur.
CAMERA
MODE
ON
OFF
For selecting ON or OFF of the CAMERA
MODE display.
– C U F R
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
179
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
SAVE LED
OFF
P2CARD
Set the SAVE lamp function.
OFF:
The lamp always stays off and not
used.
P2CARD:
The lamp blinks in synch with the
warning message when the P2 card’s
remaining recording capacity is getting
low.
USER SW
STATUS
ON
OFF
Set whether to display the functions
assigned to each user switch when the
MARKER SEL, MODE CHK / MENU
CANCEL switch is pulled.
– C U F R
P.ON IND
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the status
screen immediately after turning on the
power of the unit.
‹Note
– C U F R
Even if it is set to “ON” in this item, the
status screen is not displayed
immediately after turning on the power of
the unit when the STATUS item is set to
OFF.
REC STATUS ON
OFF
Select whether or not to enable “REC”
indication in the viewfinder and on the
LCD monitor during recording.
ON: REC indication enabled.
OFF:REC indication not enabled.
‹Note
– C U F R
Even if this item is “OFF”, the “REC”
indicator will be shown if “CHA” is
selected in the REC TALLY item in the
<OPTION MODE> screen
!LED
– C U F R
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
P-REC/i-REC ON
OFF
Switches the display ON/OFF for
INTERVAL REC and PRE RECORDING.
ON: Flash the status of i-REC
(INTERVAL REC), 1-CLIP (ONE
CLIP REC) and P-REC (access
connection status).
GAIN(0dB)
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the GAIN is set to a
value other than 0 dB.
– C U F R
DS.GAIN
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the DS. GAIN
(cumulative gain) is activated.
OFF: Do not flash the status of i-REC, 1-
CLIP, and P-REC. Pull the
– C U F R
MARKER SEL, MODE CHK /
MENU CANCEL switch to check
the status of i-REC and 1-CLIP.
‹Note
PRE RECORDING switch information
and START/END information of ONE
CLIP REC are displayed without being
configured in the menu settings.
SHUTTER
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
viewfinder on when the electronic shutter
is activated.
lamp on the
– C U F R
WHITE
PRESET
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the WHITE BAL
switch is set to the PRST position.
– C U F R
EXTENDER
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
viewfinder on when the lens extender is
activated.
lamp on the
– C U F R
– C U F R
B.GAMMA
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
viewfinder on when the BLACK GAMMA
is activated.
lamp on the
MODE CHECK IND
– C U F R
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
MATRIX
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
viewfinder on when the color correction
table for the linear matrix is selected.
lamp on the
Remarks
STATUS
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the status
screen when the MARKER SEL, MODE
CHK / MENU CANCEL switch is pulled.
– C U F R
COLOR
CORRECTION OFF
ON
For the setting to turn the
viewfinder on when the 12-axis
lamp on the
– C U F R
!LED
ON
OFF
For the setting to indicate causes for
turning on the lamp on the viewfinder is
displayed when the MARKER SEL,
MODE CHK / MENU CANCEL switch is
pulled.
independent color correction is selected.
– C U F R
FILTER
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
viewfinder on when the filter combination
is anyone other than 3200K and CLEAR.
– C U F R
The causes for turning on the lamp are
ATW
ON
OFF
For the setting to turn the
lamp on the
!
displayed with
.
– C U F R
viewfinder on when the ATW (Auto
tracking white balance) is activated.
FUNCTION
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the FUNCTION
screen when the MARKER SEL, MODE
CHK / MENU CANCEL switch is pulled.
– C U F R
– C U F R
AUDIO
ON
OFF
For the setting to display the AUDIO
screen when the MARKER SEL, MODE
CHK / MENU CANCEL switch is pulled.
– C U F R
CAC
ON
OFF
The setting to display the CAC screen
when the MARKER SEL, MODE CHK /
MENU CANCEL switch is pulled.
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
180
CAM OPERATION
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
CAMERA ID
SHUTTER SPEED
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
ID1
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Setting 1 for the CAMERA ID recorded on
SYNCHRO
SCAN
ON
OFF
Allocate SYNCHRO SCAN as a shutter
speed selectable by the shutter switch.
¢¢¢
color bars. Up to 10 characters are
allowed for this setting.
– C U F –
– C U F –
ID2
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Setting 2 for the CAMERA ID recorded on
POSITION1
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION1 SELECT in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
¢¢¢
color bars. Up to 10 characters are
allowed for this setting.
– C U F –
– C U F –
ID3
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Setting 3 for the CAMERA ID recorded on
¢¢¢
color bars. Up to 10 characters are
allowed for this setting.
POSITION2
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION2 SELECT in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
– C U F –
– C U F –
‹Note
POSITION3
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION3 SELECT in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
This setting is canceled when READ FACTORY DATA is
selected.
– C U F –
POSITION4
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION4 SELECT in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
– C U F –
POSITION5
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION5 SELECT in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
– C U F –
POSITION6
ON
OFF
Allocate the shutter speed set by
POSITION6 SELECT in the <SHUTTER
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed
selectable by the shutter switch.
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
181
SHUTTER SELECT
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
POSITION1
SEL
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION 1.
POSITION5
SEL
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION 5.
1/100 *
1/120
1/100 *
1/120
1/250
1/250
1/500
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
45.0deg
– C U F –
– C U F –
POSITION2
SEL
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION 2.
POSITION6
SEL
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION 6.
1/100 *
1/120
1/100 *
1/120
1/250
1/250
1/500
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
45.0deg
– C U F –
– C U F –
POSITION3
SEL
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION 3.
‹Note
1/100 *
1/120
In remote control mode when the remote cotrol unit (AJ-
RC10G) or the extension control unit (AG-EC4G) is connected,
the settings for the shutter are set to the value recorded on the
AJ-RC10G or AG-EC4G.
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
* 1/100 is set when the settings value for the system frequency is
59.94 Hz. When the system frequency is 50 Hz, this is set to 1/60.
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
– C U F –
POSITION4
SEL
For setting the shutter speed for
POSITION 4.
1/100 *
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
HALF
180.0deg
172.8deg
144.0deg
120.0deg
90.0deg
45.0deg
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
182
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
USER SW
Remarks
SHOT MARK INH
Allocate the SHOT MARK button. For
descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to USER Buttons]
(page 55).
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
SW
Y GET
(USER3 SW) ASSIST
REC SW
USER MAIN
SW
INH
S.GAIN
DS.GAIN
S.IRIS
I.OVR
Allocate the USER MAIN button. For
descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to USER Buttons]
(page 55).
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
LCD B.L
S.BLK
B.GAMMA
D.ZOOM
ATW
ATW LOCK
Y GET
SHOT MARK
– C U F R
TEXT MEMO INH
Allocate the TEXT MEMO button. For
descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to USER Buttons]
(page 55).
SW
Y GET
(USER4 SW) ASSIST
REC SW
DRS
RET SW
ASSIST
C.TEMP
AUD CH1/3
AUD CH2/4
REC SW
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
LCD B.L
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
LCD B.L
TEXT MEMO
– C U F R
SW MODE
– C U F R
USER1 SW
INH
Allocate the USER1 button. For
descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to USER Buttons]
(page 55).
S.GAIN
DS.GAIN
S.IRIS
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
RET SW
INH
For setting the function when the USER
I.OVR
S.BLK
B.GAMMA
D.ZOOM
ATW
R.REVIEW button on the unit, to which the RET
CAM RET
D.ZOOM
TEXT MEMO INH:
SHOT MARK The RET button function is disabled.
button of the lens or the RET SW function
is allocated, is pressed.
ATW LOCK
Y GET
R.REVIEW:
REC view function
DRS
It is possible to check a last few
seconds of the records taken.
CAM RET:
ASSIST
C.TEMP
AUD CH1/3
AUD CH2/4
REC SW
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
LCD B.L
Return video function
It is possible to confirm the return video
signals (analog HD-Y signals, SDI
signals) supplied to the GENKLOCK IN
connector or SDI IN connector on the
unit by using the viewfinder.
‹Notes
z When video signals in a format
different from that for the video mode
of the camera-recorder, return video
is not properly displayed.
z When the GENLOCK item (the
GENLOCK screen on the SYSTEM
SETTING page) is set to INT, the
return video image may be displayed
as slightly shaking horizontally.
– C U F R
USER2 SW
INH
Allocate the USER2 button. For
descriptions of the functions, see
[Assigning Functions to USER Buttons]
(page 55).
S.GAIN
DS.GAIN
S.IRIS
I.OVR
S.BLK
B.GAMMA
D.ZOOM
ATW
z The image is disrupted momentarily
in the viewfinder and the LCD
monitor when the image is switched
between the camera image and
ATW LOCK
Y GET
playback image, but this is not a
malfunction.
D.ZOOM:
Digital zoom function
Switch the digital zoom ON/OFF.
TEXT MEMO:
DRS
ASSIST
C.TEMP
AUD CH1/3
AUD CH2/4
REC SW
RET SW
PRE REC
SLOT SEL
PC MODE
LCD B.L
Text Memo function
Record a text memo on the frame at
the moment this is pressed.
SHOT MARK:
Shot Mark function
Press to add a shot mark, and press
again to delete.
– C U F R
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
183
WHITE BALANCE MODE
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
FILTER INH
ON
OFF
For selecting independently whether
memory data for white balance (Ach,
Bch) is retained or not for the respective
CC filters.
ON: Regardless of the CC filter, data for
the memories (2 memories) for Ach
and Bch is retained.
OFF:The memory data (8 memories) for
Ach and Bch is retained for the
respective CC filters.
S.BLK LVL
OFF
–10
–20
–30
For setting the super black level.
– C U F R
AUTO KNEE OFF
SW
For selecting ON/OFF of the AUTO
KNEE function and DRS function.
When it is set to OFF, the AUTO KNEE
may not function even if the AUTO KNEE
switch is turned ON.
ON
DRS
– C U F R
SHOCKLESS OFF
For setting the length of time for transiting
to the switched position of white balance,
when the position of the WHITE BAL
switch is changed.
When the DRS function is enabled and
the AUTO KNEE switch is positioned to
ON, the DRS function turns on.
AWB
FAST
NORMAL
SLOW1
SLOW2
SLOW3
S C U F R
SHD.ABB SW ON
CTL
For the setting to adjust the black shading
automatically when the AUTO W/B BAL
switch is held to the ABB side for 8
seconds or more.
OFF:
FAST:
To transit instantly
About 1 second
OFF
NORMAL: About 2 seconds
SLOW1: About 3 seconds
SLOW2: About 10 seconds
SLOW3: About 20 seconds
– C U F R
COLOR BARS SMPTE
For selecting the color bar to be used.
FULL BARS SMPTE:
Color bar complied with the
SMPTE standards
– C U F R
SPLIT
ARIB
AWB AREA
25%
50%
90%
For switching the detection area for
executing the automatic adjustment of
white balance.
25%: An area near the screen center
equivalent to 25% of the screen is
detected.
FULL BARS: Full color bar
SPLIT:
SPLIT color bar for SNG
(Satellite News Gathering)
Color bar complied with the
ARIB standards
ARIB:
– C U F R
50%: An area near the screen center
equivalent to 50% of the screen is
detected.
90%: An area equivalent to 90% of the
screen is detected.
S.GAIN OFF
L/M/H
S.GAIN
For selecting the method used to release
the super gain mode.
L/M/H
:
The mode is released by
making a change in the L/M/
H switch position and the
S.GAIN switch (USER
switch).
– C U F R
AWB B
MEM
ATW
For selecting the function to be assigned
to the B position of the WHITE BAL
switch.
MEM: The value set when the white
balance is automatically adjusted
is saved, which is used each time
the WHITE BAL switch is set to
B.
S.GAIN
:
Disabled only with the
S.GAIN switch (USER
button).
– C U F –
DS.GAIN OFF L/M/H
DS.GAIN
For selecting the method used to release
the digital super gain mode (cumulative
gain).
ATW: The auto-tracking white balance
function is assigned.
L/M/H
:
The mode is released by
making a change in the L/M/H
switch position and the
DS.GAIN switch (USER
switch).
– C U F R
ATW SPEED NORMAL
SLOW
Select the control speed for the auto-
tracking white balance.
FAST
– C U F R
TEMP PRE
SEL SW
VAR
3.2K/5.6K
For selecting whether the PRESET color
temperature is variable or switchable
between 3200K and 5600K. Immediately
after revising the value, the color
temperature for PRESET is set to 3200K
(For Filter A).
VAR: Selectable within the range from
2300K; to 15000K:.
3.2K/5.6K:
DS.GAIN: The mode is released using
only the DS.GAIN switch
(USER switch).
– C U F R
D.ZOOM x2
ON
For specifying whether to enable or
disable 2a when a user button on the
camera-recorder is assigned the digital
zoom function.
OFF
– C U F R
D.ZOOM x3
ON
For specifying whether to enable or
disable 3a when a user button on the
camera-recorder is assigned the digital
zoom function.
OFF
Switchable between 3200K and
5600K.
– – – F –
– C U F R
D.ZOOM x4
ON
OFF
For specifying whether to enable or
disable 4a when a user button on the
camera-recorder is assigned the digital
zoom function.
– C U F R
RC CHECK
SW
R.REVIEW For specifying what the camera-recorder
PLAY
does when the REC check button on the
remote control unit or the extension
control unit is pressed.
R.REVIEW
:
The camera-recorder
performs rec review.
The camera-recorder
performs playback.
PLAY:
– C U F R
Menu: Menu Description Tables
184
USER SW GAIN
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
S.GAIN
30 dB
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 30dB for
SUPER GAIN.
¢: Enable.
COLOR TEMP 2300K
;
For setting the color temperature when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to the PRST
position.
The PRESET color temperature selected
in TEMP PRE SEL SW is set.
2300K; - 15000K::
:
PRE
3200K
:
• : Disable.
– C U F R
15000K
:
36 dB
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 36dB for
SUPER GAIN.
When VAR was selected in TEMP PRE
SEL SW.
¢: Enable.
• : Disable.
– C U F R
42 dB
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 42dB for
SUPER GAIN.
¢: Enable.
3200K/5600K:
When 3200K/5600K was selected in
TEMP PRE SEL SW.
z Since the range of color temperatures
that can be set will vary with the CC
filter position, a numerical value cannot
be changed even if the color
temperature is changed when a high
color temperature is set.
3200K
5600K
• : Disable.
– C U F R
DS.GAIN
6 dB:
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 6 dB
DS.GAIN.
:
for
¢: Enable.
• : Disable.
– C U F R
– – – F –
10 dB:
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 10 dB
DS.GAIN.
¢: Enable.
• : Disable.
:
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
AWB A TEMP 2300K
;
For setting the color temperature when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to the A
position.
If the automatic adjustment of white
balance is executed in the A position, the
color temperature at that time is
memorized in the position of the WHITE
BAL switch A.
:
3200K
– C U F R
:
15000K
:
12 dB:
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 12 dB
:
:
:
:
:
:
DS.GAIN.
¢: Enable.
• : Disable.
– C U F R
– – – F –
15 dB:
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 15 dB
DS.GAIN.
¢: Enable.
• : Disable.
AWB B TEMP 2300K
;
For setting the color temperature when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to the B
position.
If the automatic adjustment of white
balance is executed in the B position, the
color temperature at that time is
memorized in the position of the WHITE
BAL switch B.
:
3200K
:
– C U F R
15000K
:
20 dB:
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 20 dB
DS.GAIN.
¢: Enable.
• : Disable.
– C U F R
– – – F –
24 dB:
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 24 dB
DS.GAIN.
¢: Enable.
• : Disable.
– C U F R
28 dB:
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 28 dB
DS.GAIN.
¢: Enable.
• : Disable.
– C U F R
34 dB:
¢
•
Select whether or not to enable 34 dB
DS.GAIN.
¢: Enable.
• : Disable.
– C U F R
‹Note
When the DS.GAIN function is active, the shutter mode is set to
OFF.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
185
LENS/IRIS
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
A.IRIS LEVEL 000
Set the target value for auto iris.
:
045
:
– C U F R 100
A.IRIS PEAK/ 000
Determine the peak-to-standard ratio for
the auto iris.
:
AVE
030
A larger value sets the auto iris to
respond to the peak in the IRIS detection
window, while a smaller value sets it to
respond to the average value in the
window.
:
100
– C U F R
A.IRIS
WINDOW
NORM1
NORM2
CENTR
Select the auto iris detection window.
NORM1: The window closer to the center
of the screen.
NORM2: The window closer to bottom of
the screen.
CENTR: The spot window in the center of
the screen.
– C U F R
S.IRIS LEVEL 000
Set the target value for the super iris
(Backlight correction function).
:
080
:
– C U F R 100
IRIS GAIN
CAM
LENS
Select which unit controls IRIS GAIN.
‹Note
Lenses with an extender, such as a2,
a0.8 sold before FUJINON DIGI
POWER, perform IRIS compensation
while enabling the extender. Therefore, if
this setting is switched to CAM, the
camera’s iris control will not operate
properly.
– C U F R
IRIS GAIN
VALUE
01
:
10
:
Set the adjustable value for IRIS GAIN.
This setting is effective when CAM is
selected for IRIS GAIN.
– C U F R 20
Menu: Menu Description Tables
186
MAIN OPERATION
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
BATTERY/P2CARD
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
BATTERY
SELECT
HYTRON140 Select the battery to use. Battery-
remaining detection matched to the
CARD NEAR ON
END ALARM OFF
Select whether or not to set the alarm to
beep for P2 CARD NEAR END ALARM.
DIONIC90
DIONIC160 battery is performed when HYTRON 140,
ENDURA10 DIONIC 90, or DIONIC 160 from Anton/
– C U F –
CARD NEAR 2min
END TIME
Set the remaining time to indicate the P2
CARD NEAR END TIME alarm.
PAG L95
TYPE A
TYPE B
TYPE C
Bauer, ENDURA 10 (E-10) from IDX, or
PAG L95 from PAG is selected.
3min
– C U F –
Select TYPE A, TYPE B, or TYPE C for
batteries other than those mentioned
above. At this time, set FULL (full
voltage), NEAR END (near end warning
voltage), and END (end voltage) for the
selected battery type in the [BATTERY
SETTING] (page 188).
CARD END
ALARM
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to set the alarm to
beep for P2 CARD END ALARM.
– C U F –
CARD
3min/
5min/
„
„
Set the length of time for one segment
(„) of the P2 card’s remaining capacity
indicator bars.
REMAIN/
„
The initial values for TYPE A are set
matching the IDX ENDURA ELITE-S, and
3min/„: One segment represents 3
minutes.
TYPE B is set matching the Anton/Bauer
HYTRON 140.
5min/„: One segment represents 5
minutes.
– C U F –
– C U F –
EXT DC IN
SELECT
AC_ADPT
Set the remaining capacity detection type
HYTRON140 when a battery is connected to the DC IN
connector. Remaining capacity detection
DIONIC90
DIONIC160 is also performed according to the
ENDURA10 selected battery type.
PAG L95
TYPE A
TYPE B
TYPE C
Selection of battery types is similar to the
above mentioned BATTERY SELECT
menu option.
Analog voltage is displayed on the
viewfinder screen.
– C U F –
BATT NEAR
END ALARM OFF
ON
Select whether or not to set the alarm to
beep for BATT NEAR END ALARM.
– C U F –
BATT NEAR
END CANCEL OFF
ON
If set to ON, the warning tone and
indication can be canceled by pulling the
MARKER SEL, MODE CHK/MENU
CANCEL switch when BATT NEAR END
ALARM is triggered.
– C U F –
BATT END
ALARM
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to set the alarm to
beep for BATT END ALARM.
– C U F –
BATT REMAIN 70%
Set the display of the remaining battery
level indicator bar in the display window
when a battery with this function is used.
70%: Indicate FULL at 70% capacity.
100%: Indicate FULL at 100% capacity.
FULL
100%
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
187
BATTERY SETTING (1/2)
BATTERY SETTING (2/2)
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
HYTRON140
¢
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
TYPE A
¢
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
¢:Enable selection.
¢:Enable selection.
•: Disable selection.
•: Disable selection.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
FULL
12.0
:
15.3
:
Set the voltage to display the FULL
indication in 0.1 V steps.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.
When MANUAL is selected in the menu
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1
V steps.
17.0
11.0
:
13.5
:
NEAR END 11.0
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V
steps.
:
13.6
:
15.0
15.0
– C U F –
END
11.0
:
13.2
:
Set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.
DIONIC90
¢
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
¢:Enable selection.
•: Disable selection.
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.
When MANUAL is selected in the menu
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1
V steps.
– C U F – 15.0
AUTO
MANUAL
TYPE B
¢
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
¢:Enable selection.
•: Disable selection.
Set the voltage to display the FULL
indication in 0.1 V steps.
11.0
:
13.4
:
FULL
12.0
:
15.5
:
15.0
– C U F –
17.0
DIONIC160
¢
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
¢:Enable selection.
•: Disable selection.
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
NEAR END 11.0
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V
steps.
:
13.5
:
15.0
AUTO
MANUAL
END
11.0
:
Set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.
13.1
:
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.
When MANUAL is selected in the menu
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1
V steps.
– C U F – 15.0
11.0
:
13.6
:
TYPE C
¢
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
¢:Enable selection.
15.0
– C U F –
•: Disable selection.
ENDURA10
¢
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
¢:Enable selection.
•: Disable selection.
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.
When MANUAL is selected in the menu
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1
V steps.
FULL
12.0
:
15.6
:
Set the voltage to display the FULL
indication in 0.1 V steps.
17.0
AUTO
MANUAL
NEAR END 11.0
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V
steps.
:
13.9
:
15.0
11.0
11.0
:
13.4
:
END
Set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.
:
13.6
:
15.0
– C U F –
– C U F – 15.0
PAG L95
¢
•
Enable selection under BATTERY
SELECT.
¢:Enable selection.
z The remaining battery level is indicated in percentage
when a battery with this function is installed on the unit.
•: Disable selection.
AUTO
MANUAL
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR
END voltage.
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.
When MANUAL is selected in the menu
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1
V steps.
11.0
:
13.6
:
15.0
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
188
MIC/AUDIO (1/3)
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
VR SELECT
CH1/2
CH3/4
Select the channels to assign to the
AUDIO LEVEL controls and F.AUDIO
LEVEL control.
LVLCONTROL 000
When the audio CH3 (CH1) level
automatic adjustment is “OFF”, this item
can be manually adjusted.
:
CH3 (CH1)
070
:
CH1/2: Assign level adjustments for
channels 1/2. Adjust channel 3/4
automatically, or through the LVL
CONTROL CH3 and LVL
CONTROL CH4 items in the
menu.
CH3/4: Assign level adjustments for
channels 3/4. Adjust channel 1/2
automatically, or through the LVL
CONTROL CH1 and LVL
CONTROL CH2 items in the
menu.
– C U F – 100
LVLCONTROL 000
When the audio CH4 (CH2) level
automatic adjustment is “OFF”, this item
can be manually adjusted.
:
CH4 (CH2)
070
:
– C U F – 100
REAR XLR
ON
Set to apply to CH1 and CH2 the function
to automatically detect whether a
connector is connected to the rear
AUDIO IN connector XLR.
ON: Automatically detects. When
connected to the rear AUDIO IN
CH1/3 connector, CH1 will
AUTO CH1/2 OFF
– C U F –
FRONT VR
CH1 (CH3)
OFF
FRONT
W.L.
Select whether or not to enable the
F.AUDIO LEVEL control for the signal
selected as the input signal to AUDIO
CH1 (CH3).
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.
Recording level does not change
by turning the volume control.
FRONT: Only enabled when FRONT is
selected.
automatically be selected for the
rear, and when connected to the
AUDlO IN CH2/4 connector, CH2
will automatically be selected for
the rear.
REAR
ALL
OFF: Disables automatic detection.
– C U F –
REAR XLR
ON
Set to apply to CH3 and CH4 the function
to automatically detect whether a
connector is connected to the rear
AUDIO IN connector XLR.
AUTO CH3/4 OFF
W.L.: Only enabled when the wireless
mic receiver is selected.
ON: Automatically detects. When
connected to the rear AUDIO IN
CH1/3 connector, CH3 will
REAR: Only enabled when REAR is
selected.
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.
– C U F –
automatically be selected for the
rear, and when connected to the
AUDlO IN CH2/4 connector, CH4
will automatically be selected for
the rear.
FRONT VR
CH2 (CH4)
OFF
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
ALL
Select whether or not to enable the
F.AUDIO LEVEL control for the signal
selected as an input signal to AUDIO
CH2 (CH4).
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.
Recording level does not change
by turning the volume control.
FRONT: Only enabled when FRONT is
selected.
W.L.: Only enabled when the wireless
mic receiver is selected.
REAR: Only enabled when REAR is
selected.
OFF: Disables automatic detection.
– C U F –
‹Note
When “CH3/4” is selected in the VR SELECT item, the following 6
items will also be swapped for channels 1/2 and 3/4. The channel
indicated in parentheses ( ) indicates the channels used during
replacement. Furthermore, settings values from menu items are
inherited between these channels.
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.
– C U F –
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
>
>
>
>
>
>
(CH3)
(CH4)
(CH1)
(CH2)
(CH1)
(CH2)
AUTOLVLCH3 ON
(CH1)
Select whether to use automatic
adjustment for the audio CH3 (CH1) level
adjustment method.
ON: Enables automatic adjustment.
OFF: Disables automatic adjustment. In
these cases, adjust using the LVL
CONTROL CH3 (CH1) item in the
menu
OFF
AUTO LEVEL CH3
AUTO LEVEL CH4
LVL CONTROL CH3
LVL CONTROL CH4
> [Recording level adjustment] (page 58)
– C U F –
AUTOLVLCH4 ON
Select whether to use automatic
adjustment for the audio CH4 (CH2) level
adjustment method.
(CH2)
OFF
ON: Enables automatic adjustment.
OFF: Disables automatic adjustment. In
these cases, adjust using the LVL
CONTROL CH4 (CH2) item in the
menu
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
189
MIC/AUDIO (2/3)
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
MIC LOWCUT OFF
Select the microphone low cut filter for
Input Channel 1.
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is
disabled for any input.
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled when the front
25M REC CH 2CH
Select the audio channels to be recorded
in the DVCPRO and DV formats.
2CH:Only recorded in CH1 and CH2.
4CH:Recorded in all channels from CH1
to CH4.
CH1
FRONT
SEL
4CH
W.L.
REAR
– C U F –
microphone is selected.
TEST TONE
OFF
Select the test signal.
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the wireless
microphone is selected.
NORMAL
ALWAYS
CHSEL
OFF:
Disable test tone output.
NORMAL: Test tone signals are output to
all of Channels 1 - 4 when the
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector
switch has been switched to
BARS and CH1 of the AUDIO
IN switch has been switched to
FRONT.
REAR
:
The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the rear
microphone is selected.
– C U F –
MIC LOWCUT OFF
Select the microphone low cut filter for
Input Channel 2.
CH2
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is
disabled for any input.
ALWAYS: Test tone signals are always
output to all of Channels 1 - 4
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled when the front
when
the
OUTPUT/AUTO
KNEE selector switch has been
switched to BARS.
microphone is selected.
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the wireless
microphone is selected.
CHSEL
:
Output test tone to the channels
where the AUDIO IN switch
CH1 or CH2 is set to FRONT
when OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE
selector switch is set to BARS.
The test tone is not output to
CH3 and CH4.
REAR
:
The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the rear
microphone is selected.
– C U F –
– C U F –
MIC LOWCUT OFF
Select the microphone low cut filter for
Input Channel 3.
CH3
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is
disabled for any input.
‹Note
The frequency characteristics when the microphone low cut
filter is applied are 200 Hz to 10 kHz.
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled when the front
microphone is selected.
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the wireless
microphone is selected.
REAR
:
The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the rear
microphone is selected.
– C U F –
MIC LOWCUT OFF
Select the microphone low cut filter for
Input Channel 4.
CH4
FRONT
W.L.
REAR
OFF: The microphone low cut filter is
disabled for any input.
FRONT: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled when the front
microphone is selected.
W.L.: The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the wireless
microphone is selected.
REAR
:
The microphone low cut filter is
enabled only when the rear
microphone is selected.
– C U F –
LIMITER CH1 ON
OFF
Select the limiter.
Disabled when automatic adjustment for
the recording level is selected.
– C U F –
LIMITER CH2 ON
OFF
Select the limiter.
Disabled when automatic adjustment for
the recording level is selected.
– C U F –
LIMITER CH3 ON
OFF
Select the limiter.
Disabled when automatic adjustment for
the recording level is selected.
– C U F –
LIMITER CH4 ON
OFF
Select the limiter.
Disabled when automatic adjustment for
the recording level is selected.
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
190
MIC/AUDIO (3/3)
TC/UB
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
FRONT MIC
POWER
ON
OFF
Select the phantom power supply for the
front microphone.
TC MODE
DF
NDF
Set the time code mode.
DF: Drop frame.
NDF:Non drop frame.
‹Note
When the camera-recorder operates at
50 Hz or in 24P or 24PA mode, the non-
drop frame is always used.
– C U F –
REAR MIC
POWER
ON
OFF
Select the phantom power supply for the
rear microphone.
When OFF is selected, no phantom power
is supplied even if the REAR AUDIO CH1
or CH2 switch is set to +48 V.
– C U F –
UB MODE
USER
TIME
DATE
EXT
Select the user bits mode.
USER: Select UB value set in the LCD
section.
TIME: Select local time (hours, minutes,
seconds).
– C U F –
MONITOR
SELECT
STEREO
MIX
When the MONITOR switch is set to ST
(stereo), select the signal format for the
monitor output.
– C U F –
TCG
FRONT MIC
LEVEL
–40dB
–50dB
Select the front microphone input level.
Select the rear microphone input level.
Select the rear microphone input level.
Select the rear line input level.
FRM RATE DATE: Select local date and time (2 last
REGEN
digits of year, month, date, time).
EXT: The user bits input to the TC IN
connector are recorded.
– C U F –
REAR MIC
CH1/3 LVL
–50dB
–60dB
TCG: TCG value enters UB.
FRM RATE:
Select the shooting information (e.g.
frame rate) for the camera. For more
information, see [Frame rate
information recorded in user bits] (page
64).
When clips recorded in Native mode
are played back, the frame rate
information recorded in VITC users bits
is output.
– C U F –
REAR MIC
CH2/4 LVL
–50dB
–60dB
– C U F –
REAR LINE IN +4dB
LVL
0dB
–3dB
– C U F –
AUDIO OUT
LVL
+4dB
0dB
–3dB
Select the audio output level.
REGEN: Read out value stored in the card
and record value continuously.
– C U F –
– C U F –
HEADROOM 18dB
20dB
Set the headroom (standard level).
– C U F –
WIRELESS
WARN
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to enable the alarm
to trigger for poor wireless receiver
reception.
– C U F –
WIRELESS
TYPE
SINGLE
DUAL
Select the type of wireless receiver.
SINGLE:
Select a single channel wireless
receiver.
DUAL: Select a 2-channel wireless
receiver.
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
191
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
VITC UB
MODE
USER/EXT Select the user bits mode for VITC.
TC DISP SEL 30F
24F
Select the display format for the time
code frame digits. (For 1080-59.94i or
480-59.94i only) For details, refer to
[Recording time code and user bits] (page
63).
TIME
USER/EXT:
DATE
TCG
FRM RATE
REGEN
If UB MODE is set to EXT, the EXT
value is recorded. If not, USER value
set by UB is recorded.
TIME: Select local time (hours, minutes,
30F: Display time code frame digits in 30
frames.
seconds).
DATE: Select local date and time (2 last
digits of year, month, date, time).
TCG: TCG value enters UB.
FRM RATE:
Select camera shoting information
(frame rate, etc.). For more
information, see [Frame rate
information recorded in user bits] (page
64).
REGEN: Read out value stored in card
and record value continuously.
‹Note
When the camera-recorder operates in
24P, 24PA, 30P (AVC-I) or 25P (AVC-I)
mode, FRM RATE is always selected.
24F: Convert time code frame digits into
24 frames for display.
– C U F –
TC VIDEO
SYNCHRO
0
1
2
3
For setting to correct the time code
according to the delay of video signals.
0: Do not correct.
1: To delay the time code to be input
according to the timing of the video
images.
2: To forward the time code to be output
according to the timing of the video
images.
3: To delay the time code to be input and
forward the time code to be output,
respectively, according to the timing of
the video images.
– C U F –
For details, refer to [Externally Locking
the Time Code] (page 68).
TCG SET
HOLD
ON
OFF
ON/OFF switching for the feature that
always starts recording (when the power
is turned ON again) the TCG value that
was set before the power is turned OFF.
– C U F –
REC REVIEW ON
REGEN
For selecting whether the time code is
regenerated to the value on the P2 card
or not, when subsequent recording starts
after setting the RET SW item on the SW
MODE screen to R.REVIEW and
pressing the RET button on the lens or
the USER button on the unit on which the
RET SW function is assigned.
OFF
– C U F –
FIRST REC TC PRESET
REGEN
For the first recording after the power is
turned on, a P2 card is inserted and then
switching from this P2 card to another
recording-target P2 card is performed,
select whether or not to regenerate the
time code as the value on the new P2
card.
ON: The time code is regenerated.
OFF: The time code is not regenerated.
– C U F –
PRESET:
Use the camera-recorder’s internal
time code.
REGEN:
UMID SET/INFO
For clips recorded on the recording-
target P2 card, regenerate the time
code as the time code of the clip that
has the most recent date and time.
‹Notes
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
COUNTRY
NO-INFO
Input the user’s country. NO-INFO is
displayed until the input completes.
z Set the date and time accurately. For
guidance on setting, see [Setting the
Internal Clock’s Date and Time] (page
66).
z During operation in either 24P or 24PA
mode, regeneration of the value of the
card recorded in drop-frame is not
permitted.
– C U F –
ORGANIZATION NO-INFO
Input the user’s organisation or company
name. NO-INFO is displayed until the
input completes.
– C U F –
USER
NO-INFO
Input the user name. NO-INFO is
displayed until the input completes.
– C U F –
P.OFF LCD
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to display the time
code setting and counter indication on the
LCD monitor when the power is turned
OFF.
ON: Display setting and indication while
the power is turned OFF.
– C U F –
DEVICE NODE
Indicate the product ID number.
– – – – –
OFF:Power-down LCD monitor while
camera power is turned OFF.
Setting and indication disabled.
Select the time code to be output to the
time code output connector.
TCG:Always output time code generator
value.
‹Note
– C U F –
Please refer to [Setting UMID Information] (page 73) for the
UMID information setting.
TC OUT
TCG
TCG/TCR
TCG/TCR:
Display time code generator value
in recording mode, and time code
reader value in playback mode.
– C U F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
192
FILE
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
SD CARD READ/WRITE
SD CARD R/W SELECT
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
R.SELECT
1
:
8
Select the file number to read out.
SYSTEM
MODE R/W
ON
OFF
Specify whether or not to use the settings
for the options on the SYSTEM MODE
screen when data is read or written from
or to SD memory cards.
– – – F –
– – – F –
READ
Read out the data from the SD memory
card.
ID READ/
WRITE
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the
CAMERA ID when reading out or writing
to the SD memory card.
– – – – –
– – – F –
W.SELECT
1
:
8
Select the file number to write in.
USER MENU ON
SELECT R/W OFF
Select whether or not to include the
USER MENU SELECT settings when
reading out or writing to the SD memory
card.
– – – F –
WRITE
Write the camera-recorder’s menu data to
the SD memory card.
– – – F –
SYSTEM
MENU R/W
ON
OFF
Specify whether or not to use the settings
on all screens except the SYSTEM
MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING
page and the settings on the OPTION
MENU page when data is read or written
from or to SD memory cards.
– – – – –
CARD
CONFIG
Format the SD memory card.
– – – – –
– – – F –
TITLE READ
Read out the title of the data recorded on
the SD memory card.
PAINT MENU ON
LEVEL R/W
Select whether or not to include the
adjusted values on the PAINT page when
reading out or writing to the SD memory
card.
OFF
– – – – –
TITLE1 - 8
¢¢¢¢
¢¢¢¢
Up to 8 letters can be set for the title
name.
– – – F –
PAINT MENU ON
SW( ) R/W OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the PAINT MENU page when
reading out or writing to the SD memory
card.
– – – – –
„
– – – F –
‹Notes
VF MENU R/W ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the VF page when reading out
or writing to the SD memory card.
z For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the respective
items for SD CARD READ/WRITE are executed, since it does
not access an SD memory card. Set PC MODE to “OFF” and
then execute the operation again.
– – – F –
CAM OPE
MENU R/W
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the CAM OPERATION page
when reading out or writing to the SD
memory card.
z In ONE CLIP REC mode, when a clip can be recorded
combined with the previous clip (when “1¢CLIP” is
displayed in the viewfinder or lower right of the LCD
monitor), items on the SD CARD READ/WRITE screen cannot
be manipulated. Close the menu, hold down the STOP button
for 2 seconds to end this connection, and try again.
z During INTERVAL REC standby, items on the SD CARD
READ/WRITE screen cannot be manipulated. Press the STOP
button to stop INTERVAL REC and try again.
– – – F –
MAINTE
MENU R/W
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the MAINTENANCE page
when reading out or writing to the SD
memory card.
– – – F –
MAIN OPE
MENU R/W
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to include the set
values on the MAIN OPERATION page
when reading out or writing to the SD
memory card.
– – – F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
193
CAC FILE CARD READ
LENS FILE
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
CARD FILE
SELECT
1
:
32
For selecting the number for performing
the color astigmatism correction data
operation (READ/DELETE) that is
recorded on the SD memory card.
FILE NO.
1
:
8
Select the lens file number.
– – – F –
– – – F –
READ
Read the lens file data.
READ
For reading the CAC FILE from the SD
memory card. When this is selected, the
display moves to the FILE READ screen.
– – – – –
– – – – –
WRITE
Write the lens file data.
DELETE
For deleting the CAC FILE on the SD
memory card
– – – – –
– – – – –
RESET ALL
For resetting the all data of the lens file.
TITLE READ
For reading the name of the CAC FILE on
the SD memory card
– – – – –
– – – – –
TITLE1 - 8
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ Up to 12 letters can be set for the title
¢¢¢¢¢ name.
TITLE
SCROLL
1
:
25
For scrolling the CAC files on the SD
memory card. Select this with the cursor,
press the JOG dial button, and then turn
the JOG dial button to scroll the CAC
files.
– – – – –
– – – – –
LENS FILE CARD R/W
01 - 32
For indicating the file names of 01 to 32
up to 27 characters
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
– – – – –
Remarks
CARD FILE
SELECT
1
:
8
For selecting the number of the lens file
in the SD memory card.
FILE READ screen
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
– – – F –
Remarks
READ
For reading the lens file data from the SD
memory card.
TITLE
The name of the CAC File selected in the
READ item of the CAC FILE CARD is
displayed.
The CAC files that are read from the SD
memory card are recorded in the built-in
memory of the unit.
– – – – –
WRITE
For writing the lens file data into the SD
memory card.
YES
– – – – –
NO (CANCEL)
The CAC files read from the SD memory
card are not recorded in the built-in
memory of the unit.
EMPTY: When data are recorded in
built-in memory of the unit, the
system searches vacant
TITLE READ
For reading the title of the lens file in the
SD memory card.
– – – – –
MEM STORE EMPTY
NO
TITLE1 - 8
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢ For setting a title consisting of not more
than 12 characters.
1
:
32
¢¢¢¢¢
– – – – –
spaces to record the data.
1 - 32: Data are recorded with the
selected number. If any CAC
FILE has already been
‹Notes
z For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the respective
items of LENS FILE CARD R/W are executed, since it does
not access an SD memory card. Set PC MODE to “OFF” and
then execute the operation again.
recorded with that number,
data are overwritten.
TITLE SCROLL 1
:
The CAC files in built-in memory of the
unit are scrolled. Select this item using
the cursor, and press the JOG dial button
and then turn the JOG dial button to
scroll the CAC files.
z In ONE CLIP REC mode, when a clip can be recorded
combined with the previous clip (when “1¢CLIP” is
displayed in the viewfinder or lower right of the LCD
monitor), items on the CAC FILE CARD READ screen and
LENS FILE CARD READ screen cannot be manipulated.
Close the menu, hold down the STOP button for 2 seconds to
end this connection, and try again.
25
01 - 32
The file names from 01 to 32 are
displayed with up to 27 characters.
z During INTERVAL REC standby, items on the CAC FILE
CARD READ screen and LENS FILE CARD READ screen
cannot be manipulated. Press the STOP button to stop
INTERVAL REC and try again.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
194
SCENE
INITIALIZE
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
READ USER
DATA
Read out the data from the user area in
the memory.
READ
FACTORY
DATA
The menu (MAIN MENU, OPTION
MENU) values are all reset to factory
settings.
– – – – –
‹Note
SCENE SEL
1
:
4
Select the scene file.
Read the scene file.
Write the scene file.
The settings for the following are not
reset to the factory-set values.
z Scene file
z User data
z Lens file
– – – F –
READ
– – – – –
z Black shading data
– – – – –
WRITE
WRITE USER
DATA
Save the user preference menu data in
the camera’s internal memory.
– – – – –
– – – – –
RESET
Reset the scene file values to the initial
values.
‹Notes
– – – – –
z For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the READ
FACTORY DATA item is executed, since it does not access
an SD memory card. Set PC MODE to “OFF” and then
execute the operation again.
TITLE 1-4
Create the scene file title.
– – – – –
z In ONE CLIP REC mode, when a clip can be recorded
combined with the previous clip (when “1¢CLIP” is
displayed in the viewfinder or lower right of the LCD
monitor), READ FACTORY DATA item on the INITIALIZE
screen cannot be manipulated. Close the menu, hold down
the STOP button for 2 seconds to end this connection, and
try again.
z During INTERVAL REC standby, READ FACTORY DATA item
on the INITIALIZE screen cannot be manipulated. Press the
STOP button to stop INTERVAL REC and try again.
‹Notes
z For a USB DEVICE mode, errors occur even if the READ
USER DATA item is executed, since it does not access an SD
memory card. Set PC MODE to “OFF” and then execute the
operation again.
z In ONE CLIP REC mode, when a clip can be recorded
combined with the previous clip (when “1¢CLIP” is
displayed in the viewfinder or lower right of the LCD
monitor), READ USER DATA item and READ item on the
SCENE screen cannot be manipulated. Close the menu, hold
down the STOP button for 2 seconds to end this connection,
and try again.
z During INTERVAL REC standby, READ USER DATA item and
READ item on the SCENE screen cannot be manipulated.
Press the STOP button to stop INTERVAL REC and try again.
Menu: Menu Description Tables
195
MAINTENANCE
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
SYSTEM CHECK
LENS FILE ADJ
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
COLOR
CHECK
ON
OFF
ON/OFF switching for checking proper
operation of the camera-recorder.
The RGB level in the area around the
center of the screen is indicated in the
viewfinder to show whether each signal is
successfully communicated from the
optical channel to the digital channel and
processed.
LENS FILE
ADJ MODE
ON
OFF
ON: The gains of Rch and Bch adjusted
in <RB GAIN CONTROL> screen
are reset.
Furthermore, the flare levels of
Rch, Gch and Bch that are
adjusted on <RGB BLACK
CONTROL> screen are reset.
OFF: The gains of Rch and Bch adjusted
in <RB GAIN CONTROL> screen
areenabled.
– – – – –
Furthermore, the flare levels of
Rch, Gch and Bch that are
adjusted on <RGB BLACK
CONTROL> screen are enabled.
LENS ADJ
– – – F –
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
LENS R GAIN –200
OFFSET
For compensating Rch sensitivity of the
lens used.
:
F2.8 ADJ
ON
The iris is only set to F2.8 when this item
set to ON. (Adjustment to F2.8 will be
executed on the lens)
+000
:
OFF
– – – F – +200
– – – – –
LENS B GAIN –200
For compensating Bch sensitivity of the
lens used.
F16 ADJ
ON
OFF
The iris is only set to F16 when this item
set to ON. (Adjustment to F16 will be
executed on the lens)
:
OFFSET
+000
:
– – – – –
– – – F – +200
LENS R
FLARE
000
:
100
For adjusting the flare level of Rch.
For adjusting the flare level of Gch.
For adjusting the flare level of Bch.
BLACK SHADING
– – – F –
LENS G
FLARE
000
:
100
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
– – – F –
CORRECT
ON
OFF
ON/OFF switching for digital black
shading compensation.
LENS B
FLARE
000
:
100
– C U F R
– – – F –
DETECTION
(DIG)
–
Execute digital black shading
compensation.
z Data adjusted on the LENS FILE ADJ screen can be
stored on an SD memory card as a lens file.
– – – – –
WHITE SHADING
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
CORRECT
ON
OFF
ON/OFF switching for white shading
compensation.
– C U F R
R H SAW
R H PARA
R V SAW
R V PARA
G H SAW
G H PARA
G V SAW
G V PARA
B H SAW
B H PARA
B V SAW
B V PARA
–255
:
+000
:
For executing the white shading
compensation manually.
The sawteeth-shaped waveform and the
parabola waveform of the respective
RGB channels are adjusted in the
horizontal direction and the vertical
direction.
+255
– – – F –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
196
CAC ADJ
DIAGNOSTIC (3/3)
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
CAC
CONTROL
ON
OFF
ON: The color astigmatism correction is
performed.
OFF:The color astigmatism correction is
not performed.
SYSCON
SOFT
Display the software version for the
system control microprocessor.
– – U F R
– – – – –
CAC FILE
DELETE
-
The color astigmatism correction file that
is recorded in built-in memory of the unit
and selected in the CAC FILE No item is
deleted.
LCD SOFT
Display the software version for the LCD
microprocessor.
– – – – –
– – – – –
P2CS BL2-1
Displays the version of the P2 control
microprocessor boot program 1.
CAC FILE NO.
1
:
32
To delete the color astigmatism correction
file from the CAC FILE DELETE item,
select the color astigmatism correction
file to be deleted.
– – – – –
P2CS BL2-2
Displays the version of the P2 control
microprocessor boot program 2.
– – – – –
TITLE
SCROLL
1
:
25
The color astigmatism correction files are
scrolled. Select this item by using the
cursor, and press the JOG dial button and
then turn the JOG dial button to scroll the
CAC files.
– – – – –
P2CS KR
Displays the version of the P2 control
microprocessor kernel.
– – – – –
P2CS AP
Displays the version of the P2 control
microprocessor application program.
– – – – –
01 - 32
The first 27 characters of the names of
the color astigmatism correction files 01
to 32 are displayed.
– – – – –
VUP
Displays the software version of the
system for updating the firmware of this
unit.
– – – – –
– – – – –
VUP FS
Displays the version of the file system for
updating the unit.
DIAGNOSTIC (1/3)
– – – – –
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
PQCNT FPGA
Displays the version of the backend PQ
control FPGA.
Remarks
VERSION
Displays the version of all firmwares in
the unit.
– – – – –
– – – – –
MODEL NAME
Displays the model name of the unit.
Displays the model number of the unit.
HOURS METER
– – – – –
Items/
Adjustable
Range
SERIAL NO.
Remarks
Data Saved
OPERATION
Display total hours the camera power has
been turned ON.
– – – – –
– – – – –
P.ON TIMES
Display total number of times the power
switch has been turned ON.
DIAGNOSTIC (2/3)
– – – – –
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
CAM SOFT
Displays the version of the camera
microprocessor software.
– – – – –
CAM TABLE
Display the table version.
– – – – –
PULSE FPGA
Displays the version of the program for
driving the CCD.
– – – – –
FMUC FPGA
Displays the version of the program for
the frame memory control and the
microprocessor interface FPGA.
– – – – –
CHAR FPGA
Displays the versions of the character
generator, and of the signal input control
FPGA program.
– – – – –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
197
OPTION MENU
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset mode.
OPTION
AREA SETTING
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Items/
Data Saved
Adjustable
Range
Remarks
Remarks
ENG
SECURITY
ON
OFF
Select whether or not to prohibit opening
the menu screen.
AREA SELECT NTSC
NTSC (J)
NTSC:
Any NTSC color TV standard
other than Japan is selected.
ON: Menu screen cannot be opened.
Please consult your distributor to
release the setting.
PAL
NTSC (J): Japan color TV standard is
selected.
PAL:
PAL color TV standard is
selected.
OFF:Menu screen can be opened.
– – – – –
– – – – –
FRAME RATE FRM RATE For setting the user bits to record when
„
AREA SET
-
The settings for the area selected in the
AREA SELECT item are applied. For
details, refer to [Color TV Standard
Settings (Settings for frame frequency)]
(page 14).
UB
MENU
the video system is set to 24P or 24PA.
For details, refer to [Recording time code
and user bits] (page 63).
FRM RATE:
For recording the shooting information
(frame rate etc.) of the camera.
– C – – –
MENU
:
This follows the settings in the
UB MODE item and the VITC UB
MODE item of <TC/UB> screen.
However, the camera recording
information is always recorded
when recording in Native mode.
– C – – –
FAN MODE
OFF
AUTO
For setting the operation mode of the fan
OFF: The fan always stops. Displays
the FAN STOP warning.
AUTO: The fan will run automatically
when the temperature in the unit
increases.
‹Note
Once the power is turned off, this will
always be set to "AUTO" whenever the
power is turned on. If the unit is operated
as the fan stops, the temperature in the
unit will increase, and data may not
record or play back properly. Use the unit
after setting this item to "AUTO" for
normal operation.
– – – – –
Menu: Menu Description Tables
198
Updating the Firmware
incorporated into the unit
The firmware can be updated using either of the following two methods.
1. Checking the current version of firmware and performing the update using the dedicated tool
(P2_Status_Logger)
PASS (P2 Asset Support System) is only available to customers who have completed customer registration with
Panasonic.
Log in to PASS and use the dedicated tool (P2_Status_Logger) to check the version information of the firmware on the
unit and download links to pages containing the necessary firmware. For further information about downloading and using
P2_Status_Logger, log in to PASS and refer to the relevant pages. Besides access to PASS, completing customer
registration has a number of other benefits. For further details, refer to the PASS (P2 Asset Support System) website
(http://pro-av.panasonic.net/).
2. Checking the current version of the firmware using the unit and performing the update
Check firmware version of the camera in the DIAGNOSTIC screen. Then access the site listed in the NOTE below to
check the most recent firmware information and download any firmware you require.
‹Notes
z The update is completed by loading the downloaded file onto the unit via an SD memory card. For details on updating, visit the
support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
z Be sure to use a compatible SD memory card. The unit is compatible with SD memory cards based on the SD and SDHC
standards. Also, be sure to format the memory card using the unit before use.
Updating the Firmware incorporated into the unit
199
Specifications
Operating humidity:
General
10% to 85% (relative humidity)
Maximum continuous operation:
Approximately 150 minutes (using an
Anton/Bauer DIONIC90 battery)
Dimensions (W a H a D):
Power supply:
DC 12 V (11.0 V - 17.0 V)
Power consumption:
34 W (main unit only)
140 mm a 270.5 mm a 335.8 mm
(5-1/2 inches a 10-5/8 inches a 13-1/4
inches)
indicates safety information.
(Excluding protrusion)
Approx. 3.9 kg (8.6 lb) (Excluding
accessories)
Operating temperature:
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature:
–20 °C to 60 °C (–4 °F to 140 °F)
Weight:
Camera Unit
Pickup devices:
2/3-type 2.2-million pixels,
IT CCD a 3
Shutter speeds:
1/60 (50 Hz), 1/100 (59.94 Hz), 1/120,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, HALF
180.0 deg, 172.8 deg, 144.0 deg,
120.0 deg, 90.0 deg, 45.0 deg
Image pickup scheme:
RGB 3CCD
Total pixels:
CC Filter:
2010 (H) a 1120 (V)
A: 3200K
Synchro-scan shutter:
1/61.7 to 1/7200
B: 4300K
(1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i)
1/30.9 to 1/3600
(1080/29.97p, 480/29.97p)
1/24.7 to 1/2880
(1080/23.98p, 480/23.98p)
1/51.4 to 1/6000
(1080/50i, 576/50i)
1/25.7 to 1/3000
C: 5600K
D: 6300K
1: CLEAR
2: 1/4ND
3: 1/16ND
4: 1/64ND
14-bit
ND Filter:
Quantizing:
Horizontal drive frequency:
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)
74.25 MHz (50 Hz)
Sampling frequencies:
(1080/25p, 576/25p)
2/3-type bayonet
Color separation optical system:
Optical prism (F1.4)
Lens mount:
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)
74.25 MHz (50 Hz)
Sensitivity:
F11 (1080/59.94i),
F12 (1080/50i)
Digital signal processing:
(2000 lx, 89.9% reflection)
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)
74.25 MHz (50 Hz)
Minimum object illuminance:
0.005 lx
Programmable gain:
(For F1.4, 42 dB (S. GAIN), 34 dB (DS.
–6/–3/0/3/6/9/12/15/18/ 21/24/27/30 dB
GAIN))
Digital Super Gain (DS.GAIN):
Selectable from 6/10/12/15/20/24/28/
34 dB
Super Gain (S.GAIN):
Selectable from 30/36/42 dB
Video S/N:
54 dB (DNR OFF) (standard)
59 dB (DNR ON) (standard)
Registration error: 0.03% or less (all areas, excluding lens
distortion)
Horizontal resolution:
1000 TV lines or more (center)
Specifications
200
Memory Card Unit
Record media: P2 card
Video recording signals:
1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 1080/29.97p,
Digital Video System
Frequency range: Y:
74.1758 MHz (59.94 Hz)
74.2500 MHz (50 Hz)
(AVC-Intra100/DVCPRO HD)
1080/29.97pN, 1080/23.98p, 1080/
23.98pN, 1080/23.98pA, 1080/25p,
1080/25pN
480/59.94i, 480/29.97p, 480/23.98p,
480/23.98pA, 576/50i, 576/25p
PB/PR: 37.0879 MHz (59.94 Hz)
37.1250 MHz (50 Hz)
(AVC-Intra100/DVCPRO HD)
Y:
PB/PR: 6.75 MHz (DVCPRO50)
Y: 13.5 MHz (DVCPRO)
13.5 MHz (DVCPRO50)
Video recording formats:
Selectable from AVC-Intra100/
AVC-Intra50/DVCPRO HD/
DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV
PB/PR: 3.375 MHz (DVCPRO)
10 bits (AVC-Intra100/AVC-Intra50)
8 bits (DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50/
DVCPRO/DV)
Quantization:
Audio recording signals:
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50:
Selectable from 48 kHz 16-bit 4ch/
48 kHz 24-bit 4ch
DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50:
Compression method:
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Intra Profile
(AVC-Intra100/AVC-Intra50)
DV base (SMPTE370M) (DVCPRO HD)
DV base (SMPTE314M)
(DVCPRO50/DVCPRO)
DV (IEC61834-2) (DV)
48 kHz/16-bit, 4ch
DVCPRO/DV:
Selectable from 48 kHz 16-bit 4ch/2ch
Recording/playback time:
AVC-Intra 100/DVCPRO HD:
8 GB a 1 Approximately 8 minutes
16 GB a 1 Approximately 16 minutes
32 GB a 1 Approximately 32 minutes
64 GB a 1 Approximately 64 minutes
Digital Audio System
Frequency response:
20 Hz - 20 kHz ± 1.0 dB
(at standard level)
AVC-Intra 50/DVCPRO50:
8 GB a 1 Approximately 16 minutes
16 GB a 1 Approximately 32 minutes
32 GB a 1 Approximately 64 minutes
64 GB a 1 Approximately 128 minutes
Dynamic range:
Distortion factor:
Minimum 85 dB (1 kHz, AWTD, 16 bits)
Minimum 93 dB (1 kHz, AWTD, 24 bits)
0.1% or less (1 kHz, standard level,
16 bits)
DVCPRO/DV:
0.05% or less (1 kHz, standard level
24 bits)
8 GB a 1 Approximately 32 minutes
16 GB a 1 Approximately 64 minutes
32 GB a 1 Approximately 128 minutes
64 GB a 1 Approximately 256 minutes
Headroom:
18/20 dB (selectable with menu)
‹Note
Time mentioned above is for when recording continuously as
one clip. Total recording time may be shorter than the above
mentioned time depending on the number of clips recorded.
For the latest information on P2 cards not available in
the operating Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk
at the following Web sites.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Specifications
201
Input/output Unit
GENLOCK IN:
BNCa1, 1.0 V [p-p], 75 h
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:
(This is available as the return video
input connector, which can be switched
in the menu.)
XLR a 2, 3 pins
LINE, MIC, and MIC +48 V switch-
selectable
SDI OUT :
BNCa1
LINE:
4 dBu
HD:
0.8 V [p-p], 75 h
(–3/0/4 dBu selectable
with menu)
(Compliant with the
SMPTE292M/299M
standards)
MIC:
–60 dBu (–60/–50 dBu
selectable with menu)
SD:
0.8 V [p-p], 75 h
MIC + 48V: Compatible with +48V
phantom power supply
–60 dBu (–60/–50 dBu
selectable with menu)
(Compliant with the
SMPTE259M-C/272M-A/
ITU-R. BT656-4 standards)
MON OUT:
BNCa1
MIC IN:
XLR a 1, 5 pins
(It can be switched among HD-SDI/SD-
SDI/Composite.)
+48 V phantom
(ON/OFF selectable with menu)
–40 dBu
(–50/–40 dBu selectable with menu)
25 pin D-SUB, –40 dBu
HD:
SD:
0.8 V [p-p], 75 h
0.8 V [p-p], 75 h
(Compliant with the
SMPTE259M-C/272M-A/
ITU-R. BT656-4 standards)
WIRELESS IN:
AUDIO OUT CH1/CH2:
XLR a 1, 5 pins, 4 dBu
Composite: 1.0 V [p-p], 75 h
BNCa1, 0.5 V [p-p] to 8 V [p-p], 10 kh
(–3/0/4 dBu selectable with menu)
Balanced low-impedance output
Stereo mini jack a 2
TC IN:
TC OUT:
SDI-IN :
BNC
a1, low impedance, 2.0 ± 0.5 V [p-p]
Headphones :
DC IN:
BNCa1
XLR
a
1, 4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11 V - 17 V)
(This is available as the VIDEO IN
connector/the return video input
connector/the GENLOCK IN connector,
which can be switched in the menu.)
HD: 0.8 V [p-p], 75 h (SMPTE292M/
299M standards)
DC OUT:
4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11 V - 17 V)
Maximum rated current: 1.5 A
12 pins
2 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11 V - 17 V)
Maximum rated current: 4.5 A
(Equivalent to 50 W)
20 pins
LENS:
LIGHT:
SD: 0.8 V [p-p], 75 h (SMPTE259M-C/
272M-A/ITU-R.BT656-4 standards)
EVF:
REMOTE:
GPS:
10 pins
6 pins
USB version 2.0 : HOST: 4-pin, Type-A connector
DEVICE: 4-pin, Type-B connector
LCD monitor:
81.28 mm (3.2 inches) LCD color
monitor, approximately 921,000 dots,
(16:9)
Accessories
Shoulder Strap
F.AUDIO LEVEL control knob (with screw)
CD-ROM
Mount cap *
AUDIO connector cap *
XLR connector cap *
GPS connector cap *
*
These are initially attached to the product.
Weight and dimentions when shown are approximately.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
202
Information on software for this product
1.Included with this product is software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) and GNU Lesser General
Public License (LGPL), and users are hereby informed that they have the right to obtain, change and redistribute the source
codes of this software.
To obtain the source codes, go to the following home page:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
The manufacturer asks users to refrain from directing inquiries concerning the source codes they have obtained and other
details to its representatives.
2.Included with this product is software which is licensed under MIT-License.
3.This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).
4.This product includes software which is licensed under OpenBSD License.
5.This product includes PHP, freely available from <http://www.php.net/>.
6.This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Details on the above software can be found on the installation CD provided with the unit. Refer to the folder called “LDOC”.
(Details are given in the original (English language) text.)
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i)
encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a
consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide
AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG
LA, LLC.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
Specifications
203
Index
MENU B-Cy (SAT) .......................................................... 170
Symbols
Black Balance........................................................ 52
MENU BLACK GAMMA .................................. 171, 172, 173
MENU BRIGHTNESS ..................................................... 167
MENU !LED ..................................................................... 180
Numerics
C
MENU 01 - 32.......................................................... 194, 197
MENU 25M REC CH SEL................................................ 190
MENU 2D LPF......................................................... 167, 176
CAC..................................................................... 104
MENU CAC............................................................. 179, 180
MENU CAC CONTROL .................................................. 197
MENU CAC FILE DELETE ............................................. 197
MENU CAC FILE NO...................................................... 197
MENU CAM OPE MENU R/W ........................................ 193
MENU CAM SOFT.......................................................... 197
MENU CAM TABLE ........................................................ 197
MENU CAMERA ID......................................................... 179
MENU CAMERA MODE ......................................... 162, 179
MENU CARD CONFIG ................................................... 193
MENU CARD END ALARM ............................................ 187
MENU CARD FILE SELECT........................................... 194
MENU CARD NEAR END ALARM ................................. 187
MENU CARD NEAR END TIME ..................................... 187
MENU CARD REMAIN/„................................................ 187
MENU CENTER MARK .................................. 165, 166, 178
MENU CHAR FPGA........................................................ 197
MENU CHROMA LEVEL ................................................ 175
Clip ...................................................................... 118
Copying Clips................................................... 127
A
MENU A.IRIS LEVEL....................................................... 186
MENU A.IRIS PEAK/AVE................................................ 186
MENU A.IRIS WINDOW.................................................. 186
MENU A.KNEE LVL......................................................... 175
MENU A.KNEE POINT .................................................... 175
MENU A.KNEE RESPONSE........................................... 175
ABB........................................................................ 52
MENU ACCESS LED ...................................................... 163
MENU AREA SELECT .................................................... 198
MENU AREA SET ........................................................... 198
MENU ASPECT............................................................... 162
ATW ....................................................................... 50
MENU ATW .................................................................... 180
MENU ATW SPEED........................................................ 184
MENU AUDIO.................................................................. 180
MENU AUDIO LVL .......................................................... 179
MENU AUDIO OUT LVL.................................................. 191
MENU AUDIO SMPL RES............................................... 162
MENU AUTO KNEE SW.................................................. 184
MENU AUTO LVL CH3 (CH1) ......................................... 189
MENU AUTO LVL CH4 (CH2) ......................................... 189
MENU AUTO REC........................................................... 163
Auto-tracking white balance................................... 50
MENU AWB A GAIN OFFSET......................................... 169
MENU AWB A TEMP....................................................... 185
MENU AWB AREA .......................................................... 184
MENU AWB B.................................................................. 184
MENU AWB B GAIN OFFSET......................................... 169
MENU AWB B TEMP....................................................... 185
Deleting Clips................................................... 126
Playing back Clips............................................ 121
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips ...................... 127
Restoring Clips................................................. 126
MENU COLOR BARS..................................................... 184
MENU COLOR CHECK .................................................. 196
MENU COLOR CORRECT............................. 171, 172, 173
MENU COLOR CORRECTION....................................... 180
MENU COLOR LEVEL.................................................... 167
MENU COLOR TEMP..................................................... 179
MENU COLOR TEMP PRE ............................................ 185
MENU CONTRAST......................................................... 167
MENU CORRECT........................................................... 196
MENU COUNTRY........................................................... 192
MENU Cy (PHASE)......................................................... 171
MENU Cy (SAT).............................................................. 170
MENU Cy-G (PHASE)..................................................... 171
MENU Cy-G (SAT).......................................................... 170
B
MENU B (PHASE) ........................................................... 171
MENU B (SAT) ................................................................ 170
MENU B FLARE .............................................................. 169
MENU B GAIN AWB A .................................................... 169
MENU B GAIN AWB B .................................................... 169
MENU B GAIN AWB PRE ............................................... 169
MENU B GAMMA ............................................................ 175
MENU B PEDESTAL....................................................... 169
MENU B.GAMMA ............................................................ 180
MENU B.GAMMA RANGE .............................. 171, 172, 173
MENU BACKLIGHT......................................................... 167
MENU BATT END ALARM .............................................. 187
MENU BATT NEAR END ALARM ................................... 187
MENU BATT NEAR END CANCEL................................. 187
MENU BATT REMAIN FULL ........................................... 187
MENU BATTERY............................................................. 179
Battery Pack......................................................... 108
D
MENU D.ZOOM x2 ......................................................... 184
MENU D.ZOOM x3 ......................................................... 184
MENU D.ZOOM x4 ......................................................... 184
MENU DATE/TIME ......................................................... 179
DC power supply ................................................. 110
MENU DETAIL........................................................ 167, 176
MENU DETECT TABLE.................................................. 174
MENU DETECTION (DIG).............................................. 196
MENU DEVICE NODE.................................................... 192
MENU DIONIC160.......................................................... 188
MENU DIONIC90............................................................ 188
MENU DISP CONDITION............................................... 177
MENU DISP MODE ........................................................ 177
Display Window..................................................... 28
MENU BATTERY SELECT.............................................. 187
MENU B-Cy (PHASE)...................................................... 171
MENU DNR..................................................................... 176
Index
204
MENU DOWNCON MODE ............................................. 167
DRS....................................................................... 55
MENU H PHASE FINE.................................................... 168
MENU H.DTL FREQ................................ 167, 171, 172, 173
MENU H.DTL LEVEL .............................. 167, 171, 172, 173
MENU HEADROOM........................................................ 191
MENU H-F COMPE......................................................... 176
MENU HI-COLOR LVL.................................................... 175
MENU HI-COLOR SW..................................................... 175
Hot-Swap recording ............................................... 10
MENU DRS..................................................................... 179
MENU DRS EFFECT DEPTH......................................... 175
MENU DRS MODE ......................................................... 175
MENU DS.GAIN...................................................... 180, 185
MENU DS.GAIN OFF...................................................... 184
MENU DTL CLIP............................................................. 173
MENU DTL CORING .............................. 167, 171, 172, 173
MENU DTL GAIN(+)........................................................ 173
MENU DTL GAIN(–)........................................................ 173
MENU DTL SOURCE ..................................................... 173
MENU HYTRON140........................................................ 188
I
MENU I CENTER ............................................................ 174
MENU I WIDTH ............................................................... 174
MENU ID POSITION ....................................................... 179
MENU ID READ/WRITE.................................................. 193
MENU ID1 ....................................................................... 181
MENU ID2 ....................................................................... 181
MENU ID3 ....................................................................... 181
MENU INTERVAL REC HOLD........................................ 164
MENU INTERVAL REC MODE....................................... 164
Interval Recording.................................................. 39
E
MENU ENDURA10 ......................................................... 188
MENU ENG SECURITY.................................................. 198
Error Codes ......................................................... 155
MENU EXT DC IN SELECT............................................ 187
MENU EXTENDER......................................................... 179
F
MENU IRIS...................................................................... 179
MENU IRIS GAIN ............................................................ 186
MENU IRIS GAIN VALUE ............................................... 186
F.AUDIO LEVEL control................................ 59, 117
MENU F16 ADJ............................................................... 196
MENU F2.8 ADJ.............................................................. 196
MENU FAN MODE.......................................................... 198
MENU FILE NO............................................................... 194
MENU FILTER ........................................................ 179, 180
MENU FILTER INH......................................................... 184
Firmware.............................................................. 199
K
MENU KNEE APE LVL.................................................... 173
MENU KNEE MASTER POINT ....................................... 174
MENU KNEE MASTER SLOPE ...................................... 174
MENU FIRST REC TC.................................................... 192
MENU FLARE................................................................. 176
MENU FMUC FPGA ....................................................... 197
MENU FRAME LVL......................................................... 178
MENU FRAME MARK............................................. 166, 178
MENU FRAME RATE UB ............................................... 198
MENU FRAME SIG................................................. 166, 178
MENU F-REC BLACK STR LVL ..................................... 176
MENU F-REC DYNAMIC LVL......................................... 176
MENU FRONT MIC LEVEL ............................................ 191
MENU FRONT MIC POWER.......................................... 191
MENU FRONT VR CH1 (CH3) ....................................... 189
MENU FRONT VR CH2 (CH4) ....................................... 189
MENU FUNCTION.......................................................... 180
L
MENU L MATRIX TABLE................................................ 170
MENU LCD SOFT ........................................................... 197
Lens..................................................................... 111
MENU LENS B FLARE.................................................... 196
MENU LENS B GAIN OFFSET ....................................... 196
Lens file.................................................................. 99
MENU LENS FILE ADJ MODE ....................................... 196
MENU LENS G FLARE ................................................... 196
MENU LENS R FLARE ................................................... 196
MENU LENS R GAIN OFFSET....................................... 196
MENU LEVEL DEPEND.................................. 171, 172, 173
MENU LIMITER CH1....................................................... 190
MENU LIMITER CH2....................................................... 190
MENU LIMITER CH3....................................................... 190
MENU LIMITER CH4....................................................... 190
MENU LOOP REC MODE............................................... 164
Loop Recording...................................................... 39
G
MENU G (PHASE) .......................................................... 171
MENU G (SAT) ............................................................... 170
MENU G FLARE ............................................................. 169
MENU G PEDESTAL...................................................... 169
MENU GAIN .................................................................... 179
MENU GAIN(0dB)........................................................... 180
MENU GAMMA............................................................... 176
MENU GAMMA MODE ................................................... 179
MENU GAMMA MODE SEL ........................................... 175
GENLOCK............................................................. 61
MENU LOW LIGHT LVL.................................................. 177
MENU LVL CONTROL CH3 (CH1) ................................. 189
MENU LVL CONTROL CH4 (CH2) ................................. 189
M
MENU M MATRIX TABLE............................................... 170
MENU MAIN OPE MENU R/W........................................ 193
MENU MAINTE MENU R/W............................................ 193
MENU MANUAL KNEE ................................................... 174
MENU MARKER SW....................................................... 165
MENU MARKER CHAR LVL........................................... 177
MENU MASTER DTL ...................................................... 173
MENU MASTER GAIN .................................... 171, 172, 173
MENU MASTER GAMMA ....................... 171, 172, 173, 175
MENU MASTER PED.............................................. 169, 174
MENU GENLOCK........................................................... 168
MENU GL PHASE........................................................... 168
MENU G-Yl (PHASE)...................................................... 171
MENU G-Yl (SAT)........................................................... 170
H
MENU H MATRIX TABLE............................................... 170
MENU H PHASE COARSE............................................. 168
Index
205
MENU MATRIX................................................................ 180
MENU MATRIX B-G ........................................................ 170
MENU MATRIX B-R ........................................................ 170
MENU MATRIX G-B ........................................................ 170
MENU MATRIX G-R........................................................ 170
MENU MATRIX R-B ........................................................ 170
MENU MATRIX R-G........................................................ 170
MENU MATRIX TABLE ........................... 170, 171, 172, 173
MENU MEM STORE NO ................................................. 194
Menu Options....................................................... 160
MENU POSITION1 SEL.................................................. 182
MENU POSITION2 ......................................................... 181
MENU POSITION2 SEL.................................................. 182
MENU POSITION3 ......................................................... 181
MENU POSITION3 SEL.................................................. 182
MENU POSITION4 ......................................................... 181
MENU POSITION4 SEL.................................................. 182
MENU POSITION5 ......................................................... 181
MENU POSITION5 SEL.................................................. 182
MENU POSITION6 ......................................................... 181
MENU POSITION6 SEL.................................................. 182
MENU PQCNT FPGA ..................................................... 197
MENU PRE REC MODE................................................. 164
MENU PRE REC TIME................................................... 164
MENU P-REC/i-REC....................................................... 180
PRE-RECORDING................................................ 38
Meta Data............................................................. 128
MENU Mg (PHASE)......................................................... 171
MENU Mg (SAT).............................................................. 170
MENU Mg-B (PHASE) ..................................................... 171
MENU Mg-B (SAT) .......................................................... 170
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH1.............................................. 190
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH2.............................................. 190
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH3.............................................. 190
MENU MIC LOWCUT CH4.............................................. 190
Microphone .......................................................... 114
Pull-down recording............................................... 37
MENU PULSE FPGA...................................................... 197
Q
MODE CHK............................................................ 75
MENU MODEL NAME ..................................................... 197
MENU MONITOR OUT.................................................... 165
MENU MONITOR OUT MODE........................................ 165
MENU MONITOR SELECT ............................................. 191
MENU Q PHASE............................................................. 174
MENU Q WIDTH............................................................. 174
R
N
MENU R (PHASE) .......................................................... 171
MENU R (SAT)................................................................ 170
MENU R FLARE ............................................................. 169
MENU R GAIN AWB A.................................................... 169
MENU R GAIN AWB B.................................................... 169
MENU R GAIN AWB PRE............................................... 169
MENU R GAMMA ........................................................... 175
MENU R PEDESTAL ...................................................... 169
MENU R.SELECT........................................................... 193
MENU RC CHECK SW................................................... 184
MENU RC MENU DISP. ................................................. 177
MENU READ FACTORY DATA...................................... 195
MENU READ USER DATA............................................. 195
MENU REAR LINE IN LVL.............................................. 191
MENU REAR MIC CH1/3 LVL ........................................ 191
MENU REAR MIC CH2/4 LVL ........................................ 191
MENU REAR MIC POWER ............................................ 191
MENU REAR XLR AUTO CH1/2 .................................... 189
MENU REAR XLR AUTO CH3/4 .................................... 189
MENU REC FORMAT............................................. 162, 179
MENU REC REVIEW REGEN........................................ 192
MENU REC SIGNAL....................................................... 162
MENU REC START ........................................................ 164
MENU REC STATUS...................................................... 180
MENU REC TALLY......................................................... 163
MENU REC TIME ........................................................... 164
Recording formats ................................................. 48
Native Recording.................................................... 37
O
ONE CLIP REC...................................................... 42
MENU ONE CLIP REC MODE........................................ 165
ONE SHOT mode .................................................. 41
MENU OPERATION........................................................ 197
MENU ORGANIZATION.................................................. 192
MENU OUTPUT ITEM..................................................... 165
P
MENU P.OFF GPS DATA ............................................... 163
MENU P.OFF LCD DISPLAY .......................................... 192
MENU P.ON IND ............................................................. 180
MENU P.ON REC SLOT SEL.......................................... 164
MENU P.ON TIMES ........................................................ 197
P2 Cards ................................................................ 32
Formatting a P2 Card ....................................... 131
Inserting P2 Cards.............................................. 32
P2 Card Status Display..................................... 134
Removing P2 Cards............................................ 33
Status of P2 cards .............................................. 33
Writing data back to P2 cards........................... 140
Recording level...................................................... 58
MENU P2CARD REMAIN................................................ 179
MENU P2CS AP.............................................................. 197
MENU P2CS BL2-1 ......................................................... 197
MENU P2CS BL2-2 ......................................................... 197
MENU P2CS KR.............................................................. 197
MENU PAG L95............................................................... 188
MENU PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W................................... 193
MENU PAINT MENU SW(„) R/W ................................... 193
MENU PAUSE TIME ....................................................... 164
MENU PC MODE ............................................................ 163
MENU PC MODE SELECT ............................................. 163
MENU PEDESTAL OFFSET ........................................... 169
Playback................................................................. 45
MENU POSITION1.......................................................... 181
Recording Review ................................................. 44
MENU RET SW............................................................... 183
MENU RETURN SIGNAL ............................................... 168
MENU R-Mg (PHASE) .................................................... 171
MENU R-Mg (SAT) ......................................................... 170
S
MENU S.BLK LVL........................................................... 184
MENU S.GAIN ................................................................ 185
MENU S.GAIN OFF ........................................................ 184
MENU S.IRIS LEVEL...................................................... 186
MENU SAFETY AREA............................................ 166, 178
Index
206
MENU SAFETY MARK ........................................... 166, 178
MENU SAVE LED........................................................... 180
MENU SCAN REVERSE ................................................ 162
Scene File.............................................................. 96
MENU SCENE SEL ........................................................ 195
SD memory cards.................................................. 91
To format an SD memory card........................... 92
MENU TYPE B ................................................................ 188
MENU TYPE C................................................................ 188
U
MENU UB MODE ............................................................ 191
Updating............................................................... 199
USB...................................................................... 136
MENU USER................................................................... 192
User bits................................................................. 64
MENU USER BOX .................................................. 166, 178
MENU USER BOX H POS ...................................... 166, 178
MENU USER BOX HEIGHT.................................... 166, 178
MENU USER BOX V POS ...................................... 166, 178
MENU USER BOX WIDTH...................................... 166, 178
MENU USER MAIN SW .................................................. 183
MENU USER MENU SELECT R/W ................................ 193
MENU USER SW STATUS............................................. 180
MENU USER1 SW .......................................................... 183
MENU USER2 SW .......................................................... 183
To insert an SD memory card ............................ 91
To remove the SD memory card........................ 91
MENU SDI EDH.............................................................. 163
MENU SDI METADATA.................................................. 163
MENU SDI OUT CHAR................................................... 165
MENU SDI OUT MODE .................................................. 165
MENU SEEK SELECT.................................................... 163
MENU SELF SHOOT...................................................... 167
MENU SERIAL NO. ........................................................ 197
MENU SETUP......................................................... 162, 167
MENU SHD.ABB SW CTL .............................................. 184
MENU SHOCKLESS AWB ............................................. 184
Shot Mark .............................................................. 46
MENU SHOT MARK SW (USER3 SW) .......................... 183
MENU SHUTTER.................................................... 179, 180
Shutter Modes ....................................................... 53
MENU SKIN DTL EFFECT ............................................. 174
MENU SKIN TONE DTL ................................................. 174
MENU SKIN TONE GET................................................. 174
MENU START DELAY.................................................... 164
MENU START TEXT MEMO .......................................... 163
MENU STATUS .............................................................. 180
MENU SYNCHRO SCAN................................................ 181
MENU SYNCHRO SCAN DISP. ..................................... 177
SYNCHRO SCAN Mode........................................ 54
MENU SYSCON SOFT................................................... 197
MENU SYSTEM INFO .................................................... 179
MENU SYSTEM MENU R/W .......................................... 193
MENU SYSTEM MODE.......................................... 162, 179
MENU SYSTEM MODE R/W.......................................... 193
V
MENU V.DTL LEVEL............................... 167, 171, 172, 173
Variable speed playback........................................ 45
MENU VERSION............................................................. 197
MENU VF DTL................................................................. 177
MENU VF MENU R/W..................................................... 193
MENU VF MODE............................................................. 165
MENU VF OUT................................................................ 177
MENU VF/LCD CHAR..................................................... 165
Viewfinder Display ................................................. 76
MENU VITC UB MODE................................................... 192
MENU VR SELECT......................................................... 189
MENU V-REC KNEE POINT........................................... 176
MENU V-REC KNEE SLOPE.......................................... 176
MENU VUP...................................................................... 197
MENU VUP FS................................................................ 197
W
T
MENU W.SELECT........................................................... 193
MENU WHITE ................................................................. 179
MENU WHITE CLIP ........................................................ 174
MENU WHITE CLIP LVL................................................. 174
MENU WHITE PRESET.................................................. 180
Wireless Receiver................................................ 114
MENU WIRELESS TYPE................................................ 191
MENU WIRELESS WARN .............................................. 191
MENU WRITE USER DATA............................................ 195
Write-protect .......................................................... 33
MENU TABLE ................................................................. 178
MENU TAKE TOTAL TIME............................................. 164
MENU TC........................................................................ 179
MENU TC DISP SEL....................................................... 192
MENU TC MODE............................................................ 191
MENU TC ON COLOR BAR ........................................... 179
MENU TC OUT ............................................................... 192
MENU TC VIDEO SYNCRO ........................................... 192
MENU TCG SET HOLD.................................................. 192
MENU TEMP PRE SEL SW............................................ 184
MENU TEST SAW .......................................................... 176
MENU TEST TONE ........................................................ 190
Text Memo............................................................. 45
MENU TEXT MEMO SW (USER4 SW) .......................... 183
Thumbnail............................................................ 119
Changing Thumbnails ...................................... 123
Y
MENU Y MAX.................................................................. 174
MENU Y MIN................................................................... 174
MENU Yl (PHASE) .......................................................... 171
MENU Yl (SAT) ............................................................... 170
MENU Yl-R (PHASE) ...................................................... 171
MENU Yl-R (SAT)............................................................ 170
Selecting Thumbnails....................................... 121
Switching the Thumbnail Display ..................... 122
MENU THUMBNAIL OUT ............................................... 165
Time code.............................................................. 62
Time zone.............................................................. 66
MENU TITLE................................................................... 194
MENU TITLE 1-4............................................................. 195
MENU TITLE READ................................................ 193, 194
MENU TITLE SCROLL ........................................... 194, 197
MENU TITLE1 - 8.................................................... 193, 194
MENU TOTAL REC TIME............................................... 164
MENU TYPE A................................................................ 188
Z
MENU ZEBRA MONI....................................................... 174
MENU ZEBRA SDI OUT ................................................. 174
MENU ZEBRA VF ........................................................... 174
MENU ZEBRA1 DETECT................................................ 177
MENU ZEBRA2............................................................... 177
MENU ZEBRA2 DETECT................................................ 177
MENU ZOOM LVL........................................................... 179
Index
207
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment
and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic
products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable
collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any
potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste
handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality,
your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
Cd
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by
the Directive for the chemical involved.
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
Panasonic Solutions Company
3 Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094 Tel: 877-803-8492
www.panasonic.com/broadcast e-mail: MediaProServices.PSC@us.panasonic.com
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3 Tel: 905-624-5010
Panasonic de México S.A. De C.V.
Casa Matriz: Moras No.313 Col. Tlacoquemecatl Del Valle Del.Benito Juárez México, D.F., C.P.03200
Tel: 55-5488-1000 Fax: 55-5575-6783
Panasonic Latin America, S.A.
P.O.Box 0816-03164 Panama, Republic of Panama Tel: +507-229-2955 Fax: 507-229-5352
Panasonic do Brasil Ltda.
o
Rua Cubatão, 320-6 andar-Paraíso CEP 04013-001- São Paulo -SP Tel: 11-3889-4000 Fax: 11-3889-4004
파나소닉 코리아 주식회사 (PKL)
서울특별시 서초구 서초동 1553-5 오퓨런스 17 층
서비스 문의 : 02-533-8452
http://panasonic.kr
əɒɅɓɋȷጋΉ᰷ƷモヷヤɕɋɐɷʀȷɁ᰷ƷȿɁɎɨ̗Ꮱȸɳʀɟ
〒 571-8503 大阪府門真市松葉町 2 番 15 号 i (06) 6901ー 1161
G
©
2010
|
RCA BRC3108 User Manual
Polk Audio Car Speaker MM400 User Manual
Planar Systems Car Video System PT1945R User Manual
Peerless Industries PARAMOUNT PA740 User Manual
Panasonic C7401U User Manual
Nokia Nseries User Manual
Newcon Optik LRB 6000CI User Manual
Lochinvar COPPER FIN CB 1796 User Manual
KitchenAid KFP750BW2 User Manual
Kenwood KDC 319 User Manual